Operation Manual
Cristina Bachmann, Heiko Bischoff, Lillie Harris, Christina Kaboth, Insa Mingers, Matthias Obrecht, Sabine Pfeifer, Benjamin Schütte, Marita Sladek This PDF provides improved access for vision-impaired users. Please note that due to the complexity and number of images in this document, it is not possible to include text descriptions of images. The information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH.
Table of Contents 8 8 8 9 10 Introduction Platform-Independent Documentation PDF Documents and Online Documentation Conventions Key Commands 11 11 18 20 Setting up Your System Setting up Audio Setting up MIDI Synchronizers 21 21 26 28 28 29 29 36 Audio Connections Audio Connections Window Renaming the Hardware Inputs and Outputs Adding Input and Output Busses Adding Child Busses (Cubase Pro only) Presets for Input and Output Busses Adding Group and FX Channels (Cubase Pro only) Monitoring Bus Externa
Table of Contents 230 230 234 239 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 251 260 Playback and Transport Transport Panel Transport Menu Transport Bar Transport Pop-Up Window Time Display Window Left and Right Locators Setting the Project Cursor Position Auto-Scroll Settings Menu Time Formats Pre-Roll and Post-Roll Punch In and Punch Out Metronome Click Chase 262 262 262 On-Screen Keyboard Recording MIDI With the On-Screen Keyboard On-Screen Keyboard Options 264 264 268 271 275 281 281 Recording Basic Recordin
Table of Contents 518 Snap Point 521 521 524 524 527 527 527 528 528 528 Hitpoints Calculating Hitpoints Locating to Hitpoints in the Project Window Slices Creating a Groove Quantize Map Creating Markers Creating Regions Creating Events Creating Warp Markers Creating MIDI Notes 530 530 531 531 533 534 535 537 540 540 Tempo Matching Audio Algorithm Presets Stretching Audio Events to the Project Tempo Musical Mode Auto Adjust Manual Adjust Free Warp Audio Alignment Flattening Realtime Processing Unstret
Table of Contents 762 765 MIDI Effects Transpose and Velocity on the Info Line 766 766 Using MIDI Devices Program Change Messages and Bank Select Messages Patch Banks MIDI Device Manager Device Panels (Cubase Pro only) 767 767 773 776 776 777 779 780 781 781 781 782 782 783 783 784 784 784 784 785 785 786 786 786 910 917 918 920 921 MIDI Functions Transpose Setup Dialog Merging MIDI Events into a New Part Dissolve Part Dialog Bouncing MIDI Parts Repeating MIDI Events of Independent Track Loops Extend
Table of Contents 1016 1016 1021 1022 1024 Export Audio Mixdown Export Audio Mixdown Dialog Mixing Down to Audio Files Available Channels for Export (Cubase Pro only) File Formats 1032 1032 1033 1035 1036 1041 1042 Synchronization Master and Slave Timecode Formats Clock Sources Project Synchronization Setup Dialog External Synchronization Setting up Synchronization for a Personal Music Studio (Cubase Pro only) 1044 1044 1048 1051 VST System Link Setting up VST System Link Activating VST System Link Ap
Introduction The documentation covers the following Steinberg products: Cubase Pro and Cubase Artist. Functions that are only available in Cubase Pro and not in Cubase Artist are clearly indicated. The screenshots are taken from Cubase Pro. Platform-Independent Documentation The documentation applies to the operating systems Windows and macOS. Features and settings that are specific to one of these platforms are clearly indicated.
Introduction Conventions Groove Agent SE Describes the features and parameters of the included VST instrument Groove Agent SE. Retrologue Describes the features and parameters of the included VST instrument Retrologue. MIDI Devices Describes how to manage MIDI devices and device panels. Conventions In our documentation, we use typographical and markup elements to structure information. Typographical Elements The following typographical elements mark the following purposes.
Introduction Key Commands Key Commands Many of the default key commands, also known as keyboard shortcuts, use modifier keys, some of which are different depending on the operating system. When key commands with modifier keys are described in this manual, they are indicated with the Windows modifier key first, followed by the macOS modifier key and the key. EXAMPLE Ctrl/Cmd-Z means: press Ctrl on Windows or Cmd on macOS, then press Z.
Setting up Your System To use Cubase, you must set up your audio, and if required, your MIDI system. Setting up Audio IMPORTANT Make sure that all equipment is turned off before making any connections. Simple Stereo Input and Output Setup If you only use a stereo input and output from Cubase, you can connect your audio hardware, for example, the inputs of your audio card or your audio interface, directly to the input source and the outputs to a power amplifier and speaker.
Setting up Your System Setting up Audio Recording Levels and Inputs When you connect your equipment, make sure that the impedance and levels of the audio sources and inputs are matched. Using the correct type of input is important to avoid distortion or noisy recordings. For example, different inputs can be used, such as consumer line level (-10 dBV) or professional line level (+4 dBu). Sometimes, you can adjust input characteristics on the audio interface or on its control panel.
Setting up Your System Setting up Audio 3. Do one of the following to open the control panel for your audio hardware: ● ● On Windows, click Control Panel. On macOS, click Open Config App. This button is available only for some hardware products. If it is not available in your setup, refer to the documentation of your audio hardware. NOTE The control panel is provided by the manufacturer of your audio hardware and is different for each audio interface brand and model.
Setting up Your System Setting up Audio ASIO-Guard Latency Shows the ASIO-Guard latency. HW Sample Rate Shows the sample rate of your audio hardware. HW Pull Up/Down Shows the pull up/down status of the audio hardware. Set to Defaults Allows you to restore the default settings. Processing Precision Allows you to set the audio processing precision to 32 bit float or 64 bit float. Depending on this setting, all channels are processed and mixed in 32-bit floatingpoint or 64-bit floating-point format.
Setting up Your System Setting up Audio Record Shift Allows you to shift the recordings by the specified value. RELATED LINKS VST Plug-in Manager Window on page 726 ASIO Driver Setup Page This page allows you to set up your ASIO driver. ● To open the page where you can set up the ASIO driver, select Studio > Studio Setup and select the audio driver in the Devices list. The following options are available: Control Panel Opens the control panel for the audio hardware.
Setting up Your System Setting up Audio Ports Reset Allows you to reset all port names and visibilities. I/O The port input/output status. Port System Name The system name of the port. Show As Allows you to rename the port. This name is used in the Input Routing and Output Routing pop-up menus. Visible Allows you to activate/deactivate audio ports. State The state of the audio port.
Setting up Your System Setting up Audio RESULT The application that has the focus gets access to the audio hardware. Audio Hardware Configuration Most audio cards provide one or more small applications that allow you to customize your hardware. The settings are normally gathered on a control panel that can be opened from within Cubase or separately, when Cubase is not running. For details, refer to the audio hardware documentation. Settings include: ● Selecting which inputs/outputs are active.
Setting up Your System Setting up MIDI RELATED LINKS Audio Connections on page 21 Monitoring In Cubase, monitoring means listening to the input signal while recording. The following ways of monitoring are available: ● Externally by listening to the signal before it reaches Cubase. ● Via Cubase. ● By using ASIO Direct Monitoring. This is a combination of the other methods.
Setting up Your System Setting up MIDI 4. Click OK. Setting up All MIDI Inputs When you record MIDI, you can specify which MIDI input each recording MIDI track should use. However, you can also record any MIDI data from any MIDI input. You can specify which inputs are included when you select All MIDI Inputs for a MIDI track. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Studio Setup. 2. In the Devices list, select MIDI Port Setup. 3. Activate In ‘All MIDI Inputs’ for a port.
Setting up Your System Synchronizers Device The connected MIDI devices. I/O The port input/output status. Port System Name The system name of the port. Show As Allows you to rename the port. This name is used in the Input Routing and Output Routing pop-up menus. Visible Allows you to activate/deactivate MIDI ports. State The state of the MIDI port. In 'All MIDI Inputs' Allows you to record MIDI data from all MIDI inputs. NOTE Deactivate this option if you use remote control devices.
Audio Connections To play back and record in Cubase, you must set up input and output busses in the Audio Connections window. Here, you can also set up group and FX channels, external effects, external instruments, and the Control Room (Cubase Pro only). The bus types that you need depend on your audio hardware, on your general audio setup, for example your surround speaker setup, and on the projects that you use.
Audio Connections Audio Connections Window Audio Device Shows the selected ASIO driver. Device Port Shows which physical inputs/outputs on your audio hardware are used by the bus. Expand the bus entry to show all speaker channels. If the bus entry is collapsed, only the first port that is used by this bus is visible. The Device Port pop-up menu displays how many busses are connected to a given port. The busses are shown in square brackets next to the port name.
Audio Connections Audio Connections Window The following options are available above the bus list: +- All Expands/Collapses all busses in the bus list. Add External FX Opens the Add External FX dialog, where you can configure a new external FX. Favorites Lets you store external effect configurations as favorites that you can recall. The following columns are available for the bus list: Bus Name Lists the busses. Click the name of a bus to select or rename it.
Audio Connections Audio Connections Window NOTE Excessive output levels from an external effect device can cause clipping in the audio hardware. You cannot use the Return Gain setting to compensate for this. You must lower the output level on the effect device instead. MIDI Device When you click in this column, a pop-up menu opens where you can disconnect the effect from the associated MIDI device, select a MIDI device, create a new device, or open the MIDI Device Manager to edit the MIDI device.
Audio Connections Audio Connections Window The Device Port pop-up menu displays how many busses are connected to a given port. The busses are shown in square brackets next to the port name. Up to 3 bus assignments can be displayed in this way. If more connections have been made, this is indicated by a number at the end of the port name. For example, “Adat 1 [Stereo1] [Stereo2] [Stereo3] (+2)” means that the Adat1 port is already assigned to 3 stereo busses plus 2 additional busses.
Audio Connections Renaming the Hardware Inputs and Outputs Add Channel Opens a menu where you can select the type of channel that you want to add. You can add the following channels: ● External Input ● Talkback ● Cue ● Headphone ● Monitor Presets Opens the Presets menu, where you can select bus configuration presets. Store allows you to save a bus configuration as preset. Delete deletes the selected preset. Enable/Disable Control Room Enables/Disables the Control Room.
Audio Connections Renaming the Hardware Inputs and Outputs NOTE If you open a project that was created on another computer and the port names do not match or the port configuration is not the same, the Missing Ports dialog appears. This allows you to manually re-route ports that are used in the project to ports that are available on your computer. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Studio Setup. 2. In the Devices list, select VST Audio System. 3.
Audio Connections Adding Input and Output Busses Adding Input and Output Busses PROCEDURE 1. In the Audio Connections dialog, click the Inputs or Outputs tab. 2. Click Add Bus. 3. In the Add Input Bus dialog, configure the bus. 4. Optional: Enter a name for the bus. If you do not specify a name, the bus is named according to the channel configuration. 5. Click Add Bus. The new bus is added to the bus list. 6.
Audio Connections Presets for Input and Output Busses Presets for Input and Output Busses For input and output bus configurations, you can use different kinds of presets. ● A number of standard bus configurations. ● Automatically created presets tailored to your specific hardware configuration. On startup, Cubase analyzes the physical inputs and outputs that are provided by your audio hardware and creates a number of hardware-dependent presets. ● Your own presets.
Audio Connections Monitoring Bus PROCEDURE 1. In the Audio Connections dialog, click the Group/FX tab. 2. Do one of the following: ● To create a group channel, click Add Group. ● To create an FX channel, click Add FX. 3. Configure the channel. 4. Optional: Enter a name for the group channel track. 5. Click OK. The group channel or FX channel is added to the bus list. 6. For each of the speaker channels in the bus, click in the Output Routing column and select a port of your audio hardware.
Audio Connections External Instruments and Effects (Cubase Pro only) PROCEDURE 1. Connect an unused output pair on your audio hardware to the input pair on your external hardware device. 2. Connect an unused input pair on your audio hardware to the output pair on your hardware device. IMPORTANT If you select input/output ports for external instruments/effects that are already used, the existing port assignment breaks without warning.
Audio Connections External Instruments and Effects (Cubase Pro only) RELATED LINKS Using MIDI Devices on page 766 Delay Compensation on page 719 Adding External Effects You can use the external FX bus as an insert effect or as a send effect, which is an insert effect on an FX channel track. PREREQUISITE Set up your external effects in the Audio Connections window. PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector, open the Inserts panel. 2. Open the Select Insert menu. 3.
Audio Connections External Instruments and Effects (Cubase Pro only) Activate Effect Activates/Deactivates the external effect. Bypass Effect Allows you to bypass the external effect. Measure Effect’s Loop Delay for Delay Compensation If this option is activated, Cubase automatically determines the delay value that is used for delay compensation. This is the same function as the Check User Delay option in the Audio Connections window.
Audio Connections External Instruments and Effects (Cubase Pro only) PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > VST Instruments. 2. Click Add Track Instrument. 3. Select an external instrument from the Instrument pop-up menu. External instruments are indicated by an x icon in the list next to their names in the Instrument pop-up menu. 4. Click OK. RESULT The external instrument is added to the VST instruments list. A parameter window for the external instrument opens.
Audio Connections External Instruments and Effects (Cubase Pro only) PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector, open the Output Routing pop-up menu for the corresponding MIDI track. 2. Select the MIDI device to which the external instrument is connected. RESULT The instrument plays any MIDI notes that it receives from the track and returns them to Cubase through the return channels that you have set up. Delay compensation is used. The external instrument behaves like any other VST instrument in Cubase.
Audio Connections Bus Configurations Missing Plug-ins Cubase shows a message if a plug-in cannot be found. This happens in the following situations: ● When you remove an external device from the Audio Connections window although it is used in a saved project. ● When you transfer a project to another computer on which the external device is not defined. ● When you open a project that is created with an earlier version of Cubase.
Audio Connections Bus Configurations Renaming Multiple Busses You can rename all the selected busses at once using incrementing numbers or letters. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Audio Connections. 2. Select the busses that you want to rename. 3. Do one of the following: 4. ● Enter a new name for one of the busses, followed by a number. ● Enter a new name for one of the busses, followed by a space and a capital letter. Press Return.
Project Window The Project window provides an overview of the project, and allows you to navigate and perform large scale editing. Each project has one Project window. The Project window is displayed whenever you open or create a new project. ● To open a project, select File > Open. ● To create a new project, select File > New Project.
Project Window Showing/Hiding Zones 3 Lower Zone The lower zone shows the Chord Pads, the Editor, the Sampler Control, and the MixConsole. 4 Right Zone The right zone shows the VSTi rack, the Media rack, the Control Room rack (Cubase Pro only), and the Meter rack (Cubase Pro only).
Project Window Project Zone RELATED LINKS Track List on page 48 Event Display on page 49 Global Track Controls on page 49 Ruler on page 51 Status Line on page 52 Info Line on page 52 Overview Line on page 53 Transport Bar on page 53 Project Window Toolbar The toolbar contains tools and shortcuts for opening other windows and various project settings and functions.
Project Window Project Zone Project History Undo/Redo Undoes/Redoes actions in the Project window. Constrain Delay Compensation Constrain Delay Compensation Minimizes the latency effects of the delay compensation. Left Divider Left Divider Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown. Media & MixConsole Windows Open MediaBay Opens/Closes the MediaBay. Open Pool Window Opens/Closes the Pool window. Open MixConsole Opens/Closes the MixConsole.
Project Window Project Zone Set Track Visibility Agents Allows you to set a visibility agent to filter the tracks. State Buttons Deactivate All Mute States Deactivates all mute states. Deactivate All Solo States Deactivates all solo states. Deactivate All Listen States Deactivates all listen states. Activate/Deactivate Read for All Tracks Activates/Deactivates read automation for all tracks. Activate/Deactivate Write for All Tracks Activates/Deactivates write automation for all tracks.
Project Window Project Zone Allows you to activate Page Scroll or Stationary Cursor and to activate Suspend Auto-Scroll When Editing. Locators Go to Left Locator Position Allows you to go to the left locator position. Left Locator Position Shows the left locator position. Go to Right Locator Position Allows you to go to the right locator position. Right Locator Position Shows the right locator position.
Project Window Project Zone Time Displays Select Primary Time Format Allows you to select a time format for the primary time display. Primary Time Display Shows the position of the project cursor in the selected time format. Select Secondary Time Format Allows you to select a time format for the secondary time display. Secondary Time Display Shows the position of the project cursor in the selected time format. Markers Jump to Marker Allows you to set and locate marker positions.
Project Window Project Zone Zoom Zooms in. Hold Alt and click to zoom out. Lane Comping Assembles takes. Time Warp Adjusts musical positions of events to time positions. Line Creates a series of contiguous events. Play Allows you to play back events. Color Menu Colorize Selected Tracks or Events Opens the Colorize pane that allows you to colorize the selected tracks or events. Nudge Palette Trim Start Left Increases the length of the selected event by moving its start to the left.
Project Window Project Zone Project Root Key Project Root Key Changes the root key of the project. Snap Snap to Zero Crossing Restricts editing to zero crossings, that is, positions where the amplitude is zero. Snap On/Off Restricts horizontal movement and positioning to the positions specified by the Snap Type. Snap Type Allows you to specify to what positions you want events to snap. Grid Grid Type Allows you to specify a grid type for the Snap function.
Project Window Project Zone System Performance Meter System Performance Meter Shows the meters for average audio processing load and the disk cache load. Right Divider Right Divider Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown. Window Zone Controls Show/Hide Left Zone Shows/Hides the left zone of the window. Show/Hide Lower Zone Shows/Hides the lower zone of the window. Show/Hide Right Zone Shows/Hides the right zone of the window.
Project Window Project Zone Toolbox The toolbox makes the editing tools from the toolbar available at the mouse pointer position. It can be opened instead of the standard context menus in the event display and editors. ● To activate the toolbox function, activate Pop-up Toolbox on Right-Click in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Tools page). ● To open the toolbox, right-click in the event display or editor. If Pop-up Toolbox on Right-Click is deactivated, the context menu opens.
Project Window Project Zone AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● To move any type of track from the lower track list to the upper and vice versa, right-click it in the track list and select Toggle Track List from the context menu. ● To resize the upper part of the track list, click and drag the divider between the track list sections. ● To revert to a single track list, click Divide Track List again. Event Display The event display shows the parts and events that are used in the project.
Project Window Project Zone NOTE If the track was outside the view or hidden, it is now shown. Tracks that are hidden using Set Track Type Filter are not shown. 4 Set Track Type Filter Determines which track types are shown in the track list. 5 Find Tracks Finds and selects specific tracks in the track list. RELATED LINKS Opening the Track Visibility on page 60 Filtering Track Types PROCEDURE 1. Click Set Track Type Filter above the track list. This opens the track types filter. 2.
Project Window Project Zone NOTE If the track was outside the view or hidden, it is now shown. Tracks that are hidden using Set Track Type Filter are not shown. Ruler The ruler shows the timeline and the display format of the project. Initially, the Project window ruler uses the display format that is specified in the Project Setup dialog. ● To select an independent display format for the ruler, click the arrow button to the right of the ruler and select an option from the pop-up menu.
Project Window Project Zone Samples Sets the ruler to display samples. fps (User) Sets the ruler to display hours, minutes, seconds, and frames, with a user-definable number of frames per second. To display subframes, activate Show Timecode Subframes in the Preferences dialog (Transport page). You can also set the number of frames per second. Time Linear Sets the ruler linear to time. Bars+Beats Linear Sets the ruler linear to bars and beats.
Project Window Project Zone To activate the info line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activate Info Line. RELATED LINKS Project Window Toolbar on page 40 Value Editing Rules on the Info Line You can edit almost all event or part data on the info line using regular value editing. If you select several events or parts, the info line is shown in another color and only the information about the first item in the selection is displayed.
Project Window Left Zone MIDI Record Modes on page 279 Left/Right Toolbar Divider on page 47 Project Window Toolbar on page 40 Left Zone The left zone of the Project window allows you to display the Inspector and the Visibility. To show/hide the left zone, click Show/Hide Left Zone on the Project window toolbar.
Project Window Left Zone RELATED LINKS Opening the Track Inspector on page 55 Opening the Editor Inspector on page 56 Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone on page 66 Opening the Track Inspector The Track Inspector shows controls and parameters for the selected track in the track list. PROCEDURE 1. Click Show/Hide Left Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the Left Zone. 2. At the bottom of the left zone, click the Track tab.
Project Window Left Zone RESULT The Track Inspector for the selected track in the track list is opened. If more than one track is selected, the controls and parameters for the topmost selected track are shown. Opening the Editor Inspector The Editor Inspector shows controls and parameters for the event or part that is shown in the editor in the lower zone. PREREQUISITE The Sample Editor, the Key Editor, the Drum Editor or the Score Editor is shown in the lower zone. PROCEDURE 1.
Project Window Left Zone RESULT The Editor Inspector for the event or part that is shown in the editor in the lower zone is opened. NOTE The Editor Inspector only contains information if the lower zone shows an editor. Otherwise, it is empty. RELATED LINKS Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone on page 66 Selecting a different Inspector for the Score Editor (Cubase Pro only) The Score Editor Inspector allows you to select the following tabs: Inspector and Symbols.
Project Window Left Zone RESULT The selected Inspector is shown. RELATED LINKS Key Editor Inspector on page 812 Inspector Sections The Track Inspector and the Editor Inspector are divided into a number of sections that each contain different controls for the track, event or part. Not all Inspector sections are shown by default. The available sections depend on the type of the selected track, event, or part, and on the settings in the setup dialog for the Track Inspector/ Editor Inspector.
Project Window Left Zone ● To open the Setup dialog for the Editor Inspector settings, click Setup Inspector Editor Inspector, and from the pop-up menu select Setup. NOTE This is only available for the Key Editor, the Drum Editor and the Score Editor. Hidden Items Displays sections that are hidden in the Inspector. Visible Items Displays sections that are visible in the Inspector.
Project Window Left Zone Remove Allows you to move an item selected in the visible sections list to the list of hidden sections. Move Up/Move Down Allows you to change the position of an item in the list of visible sections. Presets Allows you to save Inspector settings as presets. Reset All Allows you to restore the default Inspector settings.
Project Window Left Zone 2. At the top of the left zone, click the Visibility tab. 3. At the bottom of the left zone, click the Track tab. RESULT The Track Visibility for your project is shown. RELATED LINKS Showing/Hiding Individual Tracks on page 61 Showing/Hiding Individual Tracks The Track Visibility shows a list of all tracks of your project. This list allows you to show and hide individual tracks.
Project Window Left Zone ● If you want to synchronize the track and the channel visibility in a separate MixConsole window, you must use the Sync Visibility of Project and MixConsole function. RELATED LINKS Synchronizing Track and Channel Visibility on page 62 Synchronizing Track and Channel Visibility You can synchronize the track visibility in the Project window with the channel visibility in a separate MixConsole window. PROCEDURE 1. At the top of the left zone, select the Visibility tab. 2.
Project Window Lower Zone RESULT The MixConsole is opened in the lower zone, and the Zones Visibility for the MixConsole in the lower zone is shown in the left zone. RELATED LINKS Opening the MixConsole in the Lower Zone on page 65 Lower Zone The lower zone of the Project window allows you to display specific windows and editors in an integrated and fixed zone of the Project window. This is useful if you work on single screen systems and notebooks, for example.
Project Window Lower Zone To close the lower zone, click Close Lower Zone to the left of the tabs. RELATED LINKS Opening Chord Pads on page 64 Opening the MixConsole in the Lower Zone on page 65 Opening Sampler Control on page 66 Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone on page 66 Project Window Toolbar on page 40 Setting up the Lower Zone In the lower zone, the MixConsole, Editor, Sampler Control, and Chord Pads tabs are shown. You can change their order, and you can hide tabs that you do not need.
Project Window Lower Zone RESULT The Chord Pads are opened. RELATED LINKS Chord Pads on page 927 Setting up the Lower Zone on page 64 Project Window Toolbar on page 40 Opening the MixConsole in the Lower Zone The MixConsole in the lower zone allows you to perform all basic mixing procedures from within the lower zone of the Project window, and at the same time to see the context of your tracks and events. PROCEDURE 1. Click Show/Hide Lower Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the lower zone.
Project Window Lower Zone RELATED LINKS MixConsole in Lower Zone on page 344 Project Window Toolbar on page 40 Opening Sampler Control Sampler Control allows you to display and edit the waveform of an audio sample on a sampler track. PROCEDURE 1. Click Show/Hide Lower Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the lower zone. 2. At the bottom of the lower zone, click the Sampler Control tab. RESULT Sampler Control is opened.
Project Window Lower Zone ● Select an audio event. ● Select an audio part. RESULT Depending on your event or part selection, the lower zone shows either the Audio Part Editor, the Sample Editor, or one of the MIDI editors. NOTE To change the default MIDI editor, select MIDI > Set up Editor Preferences, and select an option from the Default MIDI Editor pop-up menu. NOTE If you open the editor and no event or part is selected, the editor in the lower zone is empty.
Project Window Lower Zone RESULT The MIDI part is displayed in the selected editor. NOTE This selection is temporary. Next time you open the MIDI part, the default MIDI editor is used. Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors You can link cursors and zoom factors of the project zone and the Key Editor, Drum Editor, and the Audio Part Editor in the lower zone. NOTE Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors is not available in the Sample Editor.
Project Window Right Zone If you activate Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors , the cursors and zoom factors are linked in the event displays of the project zone and the lower zone. This is useful if you edit in both zones and you want to keep the same position in view. NOTE In the Key Commands dialog in the Edit category, you can assign a key command for this.
Project Window Right Zone NOTE You can show/hide specific tabs in the right zone by right-clicking a tab and activating/ deactivating the options in the context menu. RELATED LINKS VSTi Rack in the Right Zone on page 71 Media Rack in the Right Zone on page 73 Project Window Toolbar on page 40 Opening the VSTi Rack in the Right Zone You can show the VSTi rack in the right zone of the Project window.
Project Window Right Zone RESULT The VSTi rack is opened in the right zone of the Project window. RELATED LINKS VSTi Rack in the Right Zone on page 71 VST Instruments on page 708 Project Window Toolbar on page 40 VSTi Rack in the Right Zone The VSTi rack in the right zone of the Project window allows you to add and edit VST instruments in the context of the Project window. The following sections are available: ● Track Shows the associated VST instrument for an instrument track.
Project Window Right Zone Opens the Settings menu where you can activate/deactivate the following modes: ● Show VST Quick Controls for One Slot Only shows the VST Quick Controls exclusively for the selected instrument. ● MIDI Channel follows track selection ensures that the Channel selector follows the MIDI track selection in the Project window. Use this mode if you work with multitimbral instruments.
Project Window Right Zone Project Window Toolbar on page 40 Media Rack in the Right Zone The Media rack in the right zone of the Project window allows you to drag audio events, MIDI parts, or instrument presets into the event display. It lists Steinberg factory content and any installed Steinberg content sets. The Media rack Home tab shows the following tiles: VST Instruments Shows all included VST instruments. VST Effects Shows all included VST effects.
Project Window Right Zone File Browser Shows your file system and the pre-defined folders Favorites, This Computer, VST Sound, Factory Content, and User Content where you can search for media files and access them immediately. RELATED LINKS Media Rack in Right Zone on page 611 MediaBay and Media Rack on page 611 Opening the Control Room in the Right Zone (Cubase Pro only) You can show the Control Room in the right zone of the Project window. PROCEDURE 1.
Project Window Keyboard Focus in the Project Window RESULT The Meter is opened in the right zone of the Project window. It has exactly the same features as the Meter that you open in the right zone of the MixConsole. RELATED LINKS Metering and Loudness (Cubase Pro only) on page 431 Project Window Toolbar on page 40 Keyboard Focus in the Project Window The different zones in the Project window can be controlled by using key commands.
Project Window Zooming in the Project Window Project Window on page 38 Activating Keyboard Focus for a Zone You can activate the keyboard focus for a zone by clicking with the mouse and by using key commands. PROCEDURE ● Do one of the following: ● To activate any zone, click in it. ● To activate the next zone, press Tab. This allows you to cycle forward through the zones. ● To activate the previous zone, press Shift-Tab.
Project Window Zooming in the Project Window NOTE For this to work, you must deactivate the Zoom Tool Standard Mode: Horizontal Zooming Only option in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Tools page). ● Use the vertical zoom sliders to zoom in and out. If you have made any individual track height adjustments, the relative height differences are maintained. ● Click Shift-H to zoom in vertically. Click Shift-G to zoom out vertically.
Project Window Zooming in the Project Window Zoom to Selection (Horiz.) Zooms in horizontally so that the current selection fills the screen. Zoom to Event Zooms in to show the currently selected event. This option is available in the Sample Editor and in some MIDI editors. Zoom In Vertically/Zoom Out Vertically Zooms in/out one step vertically. Zoom In Tracks/Zoom Out Tracks Zooms the selected tracks in/out one step vertically.
Project Window Zooming in the Project Window This displays the project from the Project Start Time to the Project Length that is set in the Project Setup dialog. ● To delete a preset, open the Zoom Presets pop-up menu and select Organize. In the dialog that opens, select the preset in the list and click Delete. ● To rename a preset, open the Zoom Presets pop-up menu and select Organize. In the dialog that opens, select a preset in the list and click Rename.
Project Window Snap Function Snap Function The Snap function helps you to find exact positions when editing in the Project window. It does this by restricting horizontal movement and positioning to certain positions. Operations affected by Snap include moving, copying, drawing, sizing, splitting, range selection, etc. ● To activate/deactivate Snap, activate/deactivate Snap on the toolbar. Setting the Snap Point You can set the snap point at any position of the audio event. PROCEDURE 1. Select an event.
Project Window Snap Function NOTE This only applies when dragging existing events or parts. When you create new events or parts, this Snap Type works like Grid. Events If this option is activated, the start and end positions of other events and parts become magnetic. This means that if you drag an event to a position near the start or end of another event, it is automatically aligned with the start or end of the other event. For audio events, the position of the snap point is also magnetic.
Project Window Cross-Hair Cursor Use Quantize Sets the grid and snap resolution to the value that is activated in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu. Adapt to Zoom Sets the grid and snap resolution to the horizontal zoom level. The more you zoom in on the event display, the finer the resolution. High zoom levels allow you to snap to 64th notes, low zoom levels allow you to snap to bars. NOTE Adapt to Zoom is only available if Bars+Beats is set as ruler display format.
Project Window Edit History Dialog ● The cross-hair cursor is only available for tools where such a function is of any use. The Mute tool, for example, does not use a cross-hair cursor, as you have to click directly on an event to mute it. NOTE If the Key Editor, Drum Editor or the Audio Part Editor is open in the lower zone of the Project window and Link Project and Lower Zone Cursors is activated, the cross-hair cursor is shown in the editor in the lower zone and in the Project window.
Project Window Color Handling RELATED LINKS Direct Offline Processing on page 466 Applying Offline Processing Permanently on page 477 Setting the Number of Maximum Undo Steps You can limit the number of maximum undo steps. This is useful if you run out of memory, for example. PROCEDURE 1. In the Preferences dialog, select General. 2. Set the number in the Maximum Undo Steps field. Color Handling You can colorize events and tracks in Cubase.
Project Window Color Handling NOTE If you assign a different color to individual parts or events, they no longer follow color changes of the track. Automatically Assigning Colors to New Tracks You can automatically assign colors to newly added tracks. PROCEDURE 1. In the Preferences dialog, select Event Display > Tracks. 2. Open the Auto Track Color Mode pop-up menu and select one of the options. 3. Click OK. 4.
Project Window Color Handling Color fields Click a field to open the Color Picker that allows you to specify a new color. The following options are available in the Options pop-up menu: Append New Color Adds a new color button at the bottom of the color list. Insert New Color before Selection Adds a new color button above the selected color button. Remove Selected Color Removes the selected color button. Reset Selected Color Resets the selected color to the factory settings.
Project Window Color Handling Adding and Editing Individual Colors You can add new colors to the Project Colors dialog. This allows you to apply custom colors for events, tracks, and channels. PROCEDURE 1. On the Project window toolbar, click Colorize Selected Tracks or Events. 2. In the Colorize pane, click Set up Colors. 3. In the Project Colors dialog, click Options and select Append New Color. 4. Click the newly created color field to open the Color Picker. 5. Pick a color and click OK.
Project Window Color Handling Color selectors Allow you to select a color. Context menu Allows you to copy, paste or reset colors. Current Color/New Color Shows the current color and the new color. Hue/Saturation/Value Allows you to edit the colors numerically. Red/Green/Blue Allows you to edit the colors numerically. OK Confirms the color changes. NOTE You must restart the application for some changes to take effect.
Project Handling In Cubase, projects are the central documents. You must create and set up a project to work with the program. Creating New Projects You can create empty projects or projects that are based on a template. PROCEDURE 1. Select File > New Project. Depending on your settings, either the Hub or the Project Assistant dialog opens. 2. 3. In the location options section, select where to store the new project. ● To use the default location, select Use default location.
Project Handling Hub News and Tutorials Section The News and Tutorials section displays Steinberg news, tutorial videos as well as links to the user forum, downloads, and the Help Center. NOTE Ensure that you have an active Internet connection to access this material. Projects Section The Projects section lets you create new projects, which can either be empty or based on a template. It lets you specify where to save the projects.
Project Handling Project Assistant Dialog Deactivating the Hub To start Cubase or to create new projects without the Hub, you can deactivate it. PROCEDURE 1. In the Preferences dialog, select General. 2. Deactivate Use Hub. RESULT Cubase starts without opening a project and opens the Project Assistant dialog when you create a new project using the File menu. However, you can still open the Hub through the Hub menu.
Project Handling Template Files Template Files Templates can be a good starting point for new projects. Templates are projects where you can save all settings that you regularly use, such as bus configurations, sample rates, record formats, basic track layouts, VSTi setups, drum map setups, etc. The following template types are available from within the Hub: ● Factory templates for specific scenarios. These are listed in the Recording, Scoring, Production, or Mastering categories.
Project Handling Project Setup Dialog If you do not select a category, the new template will be listed in the Hub in the More category. 6. Click OK to save the template. Renaming Templates PROCEDURE 1. In the Hub or the Project Assistant, right-click a template and select Rename. 2. In the Rename dialog, enter a new name and click OK. Project Setup Dialog You can perform general settings for your project in the Project Setup dialog. ● To open the Project Setup dialog, select Project > Project Setup.
Project Handling Project Setup Dialog Project Length Allows you to specify the length of the project. Project Frame Rate In the Project Frame Rate section, the following options are available: Project Frame Rate Allows you to specify the timecode standard and frame rate for the project. When synchronizing to an external device, this setting must correspond to the frame rate of any incoming timecode.
Project Handling Project Setup Dialog ● When you record with effects, consider setting the bit depth to 32 bit float or 64 bit float. This prevents clipping (digital distortion) in the recorded files and keeps the audio quality very high. Effect processing and level or EQ changes in the input channel are done in 32-bit float or 64-bit float format, depending on the Processing Precision setting in the Studio Setup dialog.
Project Handling Opening Project Files HMT Type (MIDI only) Allows you to specify a mode for Hermode tuning of MIDI notes. HMT Depth (MIDI only) Allows you to specify the overall degree of retuning. RELATED LINKS VST Audio System Page on page 13 Record - Audio on page 1123 Opening Project Files You can open one or several saved project files at the same time.
Project Handling Saving Project Files Activating Projects If you have several projects opened at the same time in Cubase, only one project can be active. The active project is indicated by the lit Activate Project button in the upper left corner of the Project window. If you want to work on another project, you have to activate the other project. PROCEDURE ● To activate a project, click Activate Project . Opening Recent Projects You can open recent projects directly from the recent projects list.
Project Handling Reverting to the Last Saved Version Auto Save Cubase can automatically save backup copies of all open project files with unsaved changes. NOTE Only the project files are backed up. If you want to include the files from the Pool and save your project in a different location, you must use the Back up Project function. Cubase can automatically save backup copies of all open projects with unsaved changes. To set this up, activate the Auto Save option in the Preferences dialog (General page).
Project Handling Self-Contained Projects PROCEDURE 1. 2. Do one of the following: ● Select Use default location to create a project in the default project location, and in the Project folder field, specify a name for the project folder. If you do not specify a project folder here, the project is saved in a folder named Untitled. ● Click in the path field to change the default project location, and specify the new default location in the file dialog that opens.
Project Handling Self-Contained Projects AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You must copy audio files that reside within the project folder to the Audio folder or save them separately. You must also move your video clips manually, as videos are only referenced and not saved in the project folder. Backing up Projects You can create a backup copy of your project. Backups only contain the necessary work data. All media files except the files from VST Sound archives are included as a copy. PROCEDURE 1.
Tracks Tracks are the building blocks of your project. They allow you to import, add, record, and edit parts and events. Tracks are listed from top to bottom in the track list and extend horizontally across the Project window. Each track is assigned to a particular channel strip in the MixConsole. If you select a track in the Project window, the controls, settings, and parameters displayed in the Inspector and the track list allow you to control the track.
Tracks Track Control Settings Dialog Hidden Items Displays sections that are hidden in the Inspector. Visible Items Displays sections that are visible in the Inspector. Pin If you activate Pin by clicking the column for a section the open/close status of the selected Inspector section is pinned. Add Allows you to move an item selected in the hidden sections list to the list of visible sections. Remove Allows you to move an item selected in the visible sections list to the list of hidden sections.
Tracks Track Control Settings Dialog Track Type Allows you to select the track type to which your settings are applied. Hidden Controls Displays controls that are hidden in the track list. Visible Controls Displays controls that are visible in the track list. Width If you click in this column, you can set the maximum length for the track name. Group Displays the group number. Add Allows you to move an item selected in the hidden controls list to the list of visible controls.
Tracks Audio Tracks Ungroup Allows you to ungroup grouped controls in the visible controls list. To remove an entire group, select the first (topmost) element belonging to this group and click Ungroup. Reset Allows you to restore all default track controls settings for the selected track type. Controls Area Preview Shows a preview of the customized track controls. Controls Area Width Allows you to determine the width of the track controls area for the selected track type.
Tracks Audio Tracks The following settings are available: Audio Inputs Opens a window where you can select an input of your connected audio hardware. If you have added an input bus in the Audio Connections window, you can connect to that input bus. The Open Audio Connections button opens the Audio Connections window. Configuration Allows you to set the channel configuration. Audio-related tracks can be configured as mono, stereo, or surround tracks (Cubase Pro only).
Tracks Audio Tracks Audio Track Inspector The Inspector for audio tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit your audio track. The top section of the audio track Inspector contains the following basic track settings: Track name Click once to show/hide the basic track settings section. Double-click to rename the track. Colorize Selected Track Allows you to colorize the selected track. Edit Channel Settings Opens the Channel Settings window for the track. Mute Mutes the track.
Tracks Audio Tracks Activates the track for recording. Monitor Routes incoming signals to the selected output. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo related) and linear (time related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Show Lanes Divides the tracks in lanes. Freeze Audio Channel Allows you to freeze the audio channel. Volume Allows you to adjust the level of the track. Pan Allows you to adjust the panning of the track.
Tracks Audio Tracks Track Versions Allows you to create and edit Track Versions. Chords Allows you to specify how the track follows the chord track. Equalizers Allows you to adjust the EQs for the track. You can have up to four bands of EQs for each track.
Tracks Audio Tracks Allows you to add insert effects to the track. Sends Allows you to route the track to one or several FX channels. Direct Routing Allows you to set up direct routing. Fader Shows a duplicate of the corresponding MixConsole channel. Notepad Allows you to enter notes about the track.
Tracks Audio Tracks Strip Allows you to set up the channel strip modules. Cue Sends (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to route cue mixes to Control Room cues. Surround Pan (Cubase Pro only) Shows the panner for a track. Device Panel (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to display and use device panels.
Tracks Audio Tracks Quick Controls Allows you to configure quick controls to use remote devices, for example. Audio Track Controls The track list for audio tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit your audio track. Track name Double-click to rename the track. Edit Channel Settings Opens the Channel Settings window for the track. Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Read Automation Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation.
Tracks Instrument Tracks Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Show Lanes Divides the tracks in lanes. Bypass Inserts Bypasses the inserts for the track. Bypass EQs Bypasses the equalizers for the track. Bypass Sends Bypasses the sends for the track. Channel Configuration Shows the channel configuration of the track. Listen The listen indicator is lit if the track is in listen mode. Freeze Channel Opens a dialog that allows you to set the Tail Size time in seconds.
Tracks Instrument Tracks The following settings are available: Instrument Allows you to select an instrument. Audio Outputs Allows you to set the output routing. Count Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add. Keep Dialog Open Activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track. This allows you to click the page of another track type to set up and add more tracks.
Tracks Instrument Tracks Track name Click once to show/hide the basic track settings section. Double-click to rename the track. Colorize Selected Track Allows you to colorize the selected track. Edit Channel Settings Opens the Channel Settings window for the track. Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Read Automation Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation. Open Device Panels Allows you to open the instrument panel.
Tracks Instrument Tracks Freeze Instrument Channel Allows you to freeze the instrument. Volume Allows you to adjust the level of the track. Pan Allows you to adjust the panning of the track. Delay Allows you to adjust the playback timing of the track. Show Lanes Divides the tracks in lanes. Load/Save/Reload Track Preset Loads or saves a track preset or reverts the default presets. Input Routing Allows you to specify the input bus for the track.
Tracks Instrument Tracks Track Versions Allows you to create and edit Track Versions. Chords Allows you to specify how the track follows the chord track. Expression Map Allows you to use the Expression Map features. Note Expression Allows you to work with the Note Expression features.
Tracks Instrument Tracks MIDI Modifiers Allows you to transpose or adjust the velocity of the MIDI track events in real time during playback. MIDI Inserts Allows you to add MIDI insert effects. Instrument Section Shows the audio-related controls for the instrument. Notepad Allows you to enter notes about the track.
Tracks Instrument Tracks Device Panel (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to display and use device panels. Quick Controls Allows you to configure quick controls to use remote devices, for example. Instrument Track Controls The track list for instrument tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit your instrument track. Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Track name Double-click to rename the track. Record Enable Activates the track for recording.
Tracks Instrument Tracks Read Automation Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation. Show Lanes Divides the tracks in lanes. ASIO Latency Compensation Moves all recorded events on the track by the current latency. Programs Allows you to select a program. Bypass Inserts Bypasses the inserts for the track. Bypass EQs Bypasses the equalizers for the track. Bypass Sends Bypasses the sends for the track. Instrument Allows you to select an instrument.
Tracks Sampler Tracks Switches between musical (tempo related) and linear (time related) time base for the track. Freeze Channel Opens a dialog that allows you to set the Tail Size time in seconds. Load available update This button lights up when other users have made changes to a track and committed them over the network to indicate that you can load the changes and update the project. Sampler Tracks You can use sampler tracks for controlling the playback of audio samples via MIDI.
Tracks Sampler Tracks Name Allows you to specify a track name. Count Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add. Keep Dialog Open Activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track. This allows you to click the page of another track type to set up and add more tracks. Add Track Adds one or more tracks, according to the track type and settings of the active page, and closes the dialog.
Tracks Sampler Tracks Input Transformer Opens a pop-up menu that allows you to transform incoming MIDI events in real time. Record Enable Activates the track for recording. Monitor Routes incoming MIDI to the selected MIDI output. For this to work, activate MIDI Thru Active in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page). Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo related) and linear (time related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track.
Tracks Sampler Tracks Track Versions Allows you to create and edit Track Versions. Chords Allows you to specify how the track follows the chord track. Expression Map Allows you to use the Expression Map features. Note Expression Allows you to work with the Note Expression features.
Tracks Sampler Tracks MIDI Modifiers Allows you to transpose or adjust the velocity of the MIDI track events in real time during playback. MIDI Inserts Allows you to add MIDI insert effects. Instrument Section Shows the audio-related controls for the sampler track. Notepad Allows you to enter notes about the track.
Tracks Sampler Tracks Device Panel (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to display and use device panels. Quick Controls Allows you to configure quick controls to use remote devices, for example. Sampler Track Controls The track list for sampler tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit your sampler track. Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Track name Double-click to rename the track. Record Enable Activates the track for recording.
Tracks MIDI Tracks Read Automation Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation. Show Lanes Divides the tracks in lanes. ASIO Latency Compensation Moves all recorded events on the track by the current latency. Bypass Inserts Bypasses the inserts for the track. Bypass EQs Bypasses the equalizers for the track. Bypass Sends Bypasses the sends for the track. Listen The listen indicator is lit if the track is in listen mode.
Tracks MIDI Tracks RELATED LINKS Add Track Dialog – MIDI on page 127 Add Track Dialog – MIDI The MIDI page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add MIDI tracks. To open the MIDI page of the Add Track dialog, do one of the following: ● Click Add Track ● Right-click in an empty area of the track list, and select Add MIDI Track. in the global track controls area of the track list, and click MIDI. ● Select Project > Add Track > MIDI.
Tracks MIDI Tracks MIDI Track Inspector The Inspector for MIDI tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to control your MIDI track. These affect MIDI events in real time, on playback, for example. The top section of the MIDI track Inspector contains the following basic track settings: Track name Click once to show/hide the basic track settings section. Double-click to rename the track. Colorize Selected Track Allows you to colorize the selected track.
Tracks MIDI Tracks Record Enable Activates the track for recording. Monitor Routes incoming MIDI to the selected MIDI output. For this to work, activate MIDI Thru Active in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page). Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo related) and linear (time related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Show Lanes Divides the tracks in lanes. Volume Allows you to adjust the level of the track.
Tracks MIDI Tracks Programs Allows you to select a program. Program Selector Allows you to set a program change message that is sent to your MIDI device. Drum Maps Allows you to select a drum map for the track. MIDI Track Inspector Sections Apart from the basic track settings that are always shown, MIDI tracks also provide other Inspector sections. Track Versions Allows you to create and edit Track Versions. Chords Allows you to specify how the track follows the chord track.
Tracks MIDI Tracks Note Expression Allows you to work with the Note Expression features. MIDI Modifiers Allows you to transpose or adjust the velocity of the MIDI track events in real time during playback. MIDI Inserts Allows you to add MIDI insert effects.
Tracks MIDI Tracks MIDI Sends Section Allows you to add MIDI send effects. MIDI Fader Section Shows a duplicate of the corresponding MixConsole channel. Notepad Allows you to enter notes about the track. Device Panel (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to display and use device panels.
Tracks MIDI Tracks Quick Controls Allows you to configure quick controls to use remote devices, for example. MIDI Track Controls The track list for MIDI tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit your MIDI track. The track list for MIDI tracks contains the following controls: Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Track name Double-click to rename the track. Record Enable Activates the track for recording.
Tracks FX Channel Tracks Divides the tracks in lanes. Output Allows you to specify the output for the track. Programs Allows you to select a program. Edit In-Place Allows you to edit MIDI events and parts on the track in the Project window. Bypass Inserts Bypasses the inserts for the track. Bypass Sends Bypasses the sends for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Edit Channel Settings Opens the Channel Settings window for the track.
Tracks FX Channel Tracks You can add FX channel tracks via the Add Track dialog. RELATED LINKS Add Track Dialog – Effect on page 135 Add Track Dialog – Effect The Effect page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add FX channel tracks. To open the Effect page of the Add Track dialog, do one of the following: ● Click Add Track in the global track controls area of the track list, and click Effect. ● Select Project > Add Track > Effect.
Tracks FX Channel Tracks Add Track Adds one or more tracks, according to the track type and settings of the active page, and closes the dialog. RELATED LINKS Adding FX Channel Tracks on page 448 Adding FX Channels to Selected Channels on page 449 FX Channel Track Inspector The Inspector for FX channel tracks shows the settings for the FX channel. When you select the folder track instead, the Inspector shows the folder and the FX channels it contains.
Tracks FX Channel Tracks Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Volume Allows you to adjust the level of the track. Pan Allows you to adjust the panning of the track. Output Routing Allows you to specify the output bus for the track. FX Channel Track Inspector Sections Apart from the basic track settings that are always shown, FX channel tracks also provide other Inspector sections. Inserts Allows you to add insert effects to the track.
Tracks FX Channel Tracks Equalizers Allows you to adjust the EQs for the track. You can have up to four bands of EQs for each track. Sends Allows you to route the track to one or several FX channels. Cue Sends (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to route cue mixes to Control Room cues. Direct Routing Allows you to set up direct routing.
Tracks FX Channel Tracks Surround Pan (Cubase Pro only) Shows the panner for a track. Fader Shows a duplicate of the corresponding MixConsole channel. Notepad Allows you to enter notes about the track. Quick Controls Allows you to configure quick controls to use remote devices, for example.
Tracks FX Channel Tracks FX Channel Track Controls The track list for FX channel tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the settings for the effect. Track name Double-click to rename the track. Edit Channel Settings Opens the Channel Settings window for the track. Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Read Automation Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation.
Tracks Group Channel Tracks Bypass Sends Bypasses the sends for the track. Channel Configuration Shows the channel configuration of the track. RELATED LINKS Click Pattern Editor on page 252 Creating a Click Track on page 260 Group Channel Tracks You can use group channel tracks to create a submix of several audio channels and apply the same effects to them. A group channel track contains no events as such, but displays settings and automation for the corresponding group channel.
Tracks Group Channel Tracks Configuration Allows you to set the channel configuration. Audio-related tracks can be configured as mono, stereo, or surround tracks (Cubase Pro only). Audio Outputs Allows you to set the output routing. Folder Setup Allows you to select whether you want to create the effect inside or outside a dedicated folder. Name Allows you to specify a track name. Count Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add.
Tracks Group Channel Tracks Read Automation Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo related) and linear (time related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Volume Allows you to adjust the level of the track. Pan Allows you to adjust the panning of the track. Output Routing Allows you to specify the output bus for the track.
Tracks Group Channel Tracks Strip Allows you to set up the channel strip modules. Equalizers Allows you to adjust the EQs for the track. You can have up to four bands of EQs for each track. Sends Allows you to route the track to one or several FX channels.
Tracks Group Channel Tracks Cue Sends (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to route cue mixes to Control Room cues. Direct Routing Allows you to set up direct routing. Surround Pan (Cubase Pro only) Shows the panner for a track.
Tracks Group Channel Tracks Shows a duplicate of the corresponding MixConsole channel. Notepad Allows you to enter notes about the track. Quick Controls Allows you to configure quick controls to use remote devices, for example. Group Channel Track Controls The track list for group channel tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the settings for the group. Track name Double-click to rename the track. Edit Channel Settings Opens the Channel Settings window for the track.
Tracks VCA Fader Track (Cubase Pro only) Automation parameter Allows you to select a parameter for automation. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo related) and linear (time related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Bypass Inserts Bypasses the inserts for the track. Bypass EQs Bypasses the equalizers for the track. Bypass Sends Bypasses the sends for the track. Channel Configuration Shows the channel configuration of the track.
Tracks VCA Fader Track (Cubase Pro only) The following settings are available: Folder Setup Allows you to select whether you want to create the effect inside or outside a dedicated folder. Name Allows you to specify a track name. Count Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add. Keep Dialog Open Activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track. This allows you to click the page of another track type to set up and add more tracks.
Tracks VCA Fader Track (Cubase Pro only) Read Automation Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo related) and linear (time related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Volume Allows you to adjust the level of the track.
Tracks VCA Fader Track (Cubase Pro only) Quick Controls Allows you to configure quick controls to use remote devices, for example. VCA Fader Track Controls The track list for VCA fader tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the settings for the VCA fader. Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Volume Allows you to adjust the level of the track. Mute Automation Deactivates the automation read function for the selected parameter.
Tracks Marker Track Marker Track Cubase Pro only: You can use marker tracks to add and edit markers that help you to locate certain positions quickly. Cubase Artist only: You can use the marker track to add and edit markers that help you to locate certain positions quickly. You can add marker tracks via the Add Track dialog. Cubase Pro only: You can add up to 10 marker tracks in a project.
Tracks Marker Track Keep Dialog Open Activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track. This allows you to click the page of another track type to set up and add more tracks. Add Track Adds one or more tracks, according to the track type and settings of the active page, and closes the dialog. RELATED LINKS Marker Track (Cubase Artist only) on page 162 Marker Track Inspector The marker track Inspector displays the marker list. Track name Double-click to rename the track.
Tracks Ruler Track Allows you to select a cycle marker. Zoom Allows you to zoom in a cycle marker. Add Marker Allows you to add a position marker at the project cursor position. Add Cycle Marker Allows you to add a cycle marker at the project cursor position. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo related) and linear (time related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Activate this Track Activates this marker track.
Tracks Ruler Track The following settings are available: Count Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add. Keep Dialog Open Activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track. This allows you to click the page of another track type to set up and add more tracks. Add Track Adds one or more tracks, according to the track type and settings of the active page, and closes the dialog.
Tracks Folder Tracks Rate pop-up menu. To display subframes, activate Show Timecode Subframes in the Preferences dialog (Transport page). Samples Activates a display format of samples. fps (User) Activates a display format of hours, minutes, seconds, and frames, with a userdefinable number of frames per second. To display subframes, activate Show Timecode Subframes in the Preferences dialog (Transport page). On the Transport page, you can also set the frame rate.
Tracks Folder Tracks Keep Dialog Open Activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track. This allows you to click the page of another track type to set up and add more tracks. Add Track Adds one or more tracks, according to the track type and settings of the active page, and closes the dialog. Folder Track Inspector The Inspector for folder tracks shows the folder and its underlying track, much like a folder structure in the File Explorer/macOS Finder.
Tracks Other Tracks Folder Track Controls The track list for folder tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit all tracks in the folder. Expand/Collapse Folder Shows/Hides the tracks in the folder. Hidden tracks are played back as usual. Track name Double-click to rename the track. Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Record Enable Activates the track for recording. Monitor Routes incoming signals to the selected output.
Tracks Other Tracks Arranger Track You can use the arranger track for arranging your project by marking out sections and determining in which order they are to be played back. ● To add the arranger track to your project, click Add Other Track or Use Track Preset the global track controls area of the track list, and select Add Arranger Track. in Arranger Track Inspector The arranger track Inspector displays the lists of available arranger chains and arranger events.
Tracks Other Tracks Select Active Arranger Chain + Functions Allows you to select the active arranger chain, to rename it, to create a new one, to duplicate, or to flatten it. Current Arranger Chain Shows the active arranger chain. Arranger Events Lists all arranger events in your project. Click the arrow of an arranger event to play it back and start the live mode. Stop Allows you to stop the live mode.
Tracks Other Tracks Chord Track You can use the chord track for adding chord and scale events to your project. These can transform the pitches of other events. ● To add the chord track to your project, click Add Other Track or Use Track Preset the global track controls area of the track list, and select Add Chord Track. Chord Track Inspector The chord track Inspector contains a number of settings for the chord events.
Tracks Other Tracks Voicing library subset Allows you to select a library subset. Configure voicing parameters Allows you to configure your own voicing parameters for a specific voicing scheme. Adaptive Voicings If this option is activated, the voicings are set automatically. Automatic Scales If this option is activated, the program creates scale events automatically.
Tracks Other Tracks Chord Track Controls The track list for the chord track contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the chord track. The track list for the chord track contains the following controls: Mute Chord Track Mutes the track. Select Track for Auditioning Allows you to select a track for auditioning the chord events. Record Enable Activates the track for recording.
Tracks Other Tracks Track name Double-click to rename the track. Colorize Selected Track Allows you to colorize the selected track. Open Marker Window Opens the Markers window. Marker attributes Shows the markers, their IDs, and their time positions. Click in the leftmost column for a marker to move the project cursor to the marker position. Marker Track Controls (Cubase Artist only) The track list for the marker track contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the marker track.
Tracks Other Tracks RELATED LINKS Time Signature Events on page 1004 Click Patterns Tab on page 259 Signature Track Inspector The signature track Inspector displays a list of all time signature events. Colorize Selected Track Allows you to colorize the selected track. Bar Shows the number of the bar where the signature event is positioned. Double-click the field and enter a new value to change the position of the signature event. NOTE The first signature event is always positioned at bar 1.
Tracks Other Tracks ● Apply Click Pattern to Equal Signatures Pastes the click pattern from the clipboard to signature events that are equal. NOTE For this you do not have to select the signature events first. ● Reset Click Pattern to Default Sets the click pattern of the selected signature event to default. If no signature event is selected, the click patterns of all signature events are set to default. ● Show Click Patterns Allows you to show/hide the click patterns for the signature events.
Tracks Other Tracks Tempo Track Controls The track list for the tempo track contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the tempo track. Activate Tempo Track Allows you to activate the tempo track. In this mode, the tempo cannot be changed on the Transport panel. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Current Tempo Allows you to change the tempo at the project cursor position. Open Process Tempo Dialog Allows you to open the Process Tempo dialog.
Tracks Other Tracks Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo related) and linear (time related) time base for the track. Transpose Track Inspector sections Apart from the basic track settings that are always shown, the transpose track also provides other Inspector sections. Notepad Allows you to enter notes about the track. Transpose Track Controls The track list for the transpose track contains parameters that allow you to control the transpose track. Mute Transpose Events Mutes the track.
Tracks Other Tracks Video Track Inspector The video track Inspector contains a number of parameters to control the video track. Colorize Selected Track Allows you to colorize the selected track. Reveal Video Window Opens the Video Player window. Mute Video Track Mutes the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Show Frame Numbers Allows you to show each thumbnail with the corresponding video frame number.
Tracks Other Tracks Disables all editing of all events on the track. Show Thumbnails Allows you to activate/deactivate the thumbnails of a video track. Show Frame Numbers Allows you to show each thumbnail with the corresponding video frame number.
Track Handling Tracks are the building blocks of your project. In Cubase, events and parts are placed on tracks. Adding Tracks via the Add Track Dialog You can add tracks via the Add Track dialog. This dialog is only available for track types that can be added more than once. PROCEDURE 1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Track . 2. Click the track type and set up the options according to your needs. 3. Click Add Track.
Track Handling Adding Tracks Using Track Presets RELATED LINKS Arranger Track on page 158 Chord Track on page 160 Signature Track on page 163 Tempo Track on page 165 Transpose Track on page 166 Video Track on page 167 Adding Tracks Using Track Presets You can add tracks based on track presets. Track presets contain sound and channel settings. PROCEDURE 1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Other Track or Use Track Preset . 2. Select Using Track Preset. 3.
Track Handling Track Import (Cubase Pro only) RELATED LINKS MediaBay and Media Rack on page 611 Media Rack in Right Zone on page 611 Import Options Dialog on page 172 Import Options Dialog ● The Import Options dialog opens if you drag multiple audio files into the track list. Copy File to Working Directory/Copy Files to Working Directory Copies the audio file to the Audio folder of the project, and has the clip refer to the copy.
Track Handling Track Import (Cubase Pro only) settings of the existing track remain unchanged. If the imported track contains more than one track version, only its active track version is imported. Imported track versions must be of the same type as the track in your active project. Marker tracks A new marker track is created. If your project already contains 10 marker tracks, you cannot import a marker track from another project. In this case, you must remove an existing marker track first.
Track Handling Track Import (Cubase Pro only) Importing Tracks from Track Archives You can import tracks from track archives. PREREQUISITE You have created at least one track archive by exporting selected tracks from a project. PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Import > Track Archive. 2. In the file dialog, select the .xml file of the track archive and click Open. 3. In the Import column of the Import Options dialog, select the tracks that you want to import or click Select All. 4.
Track Handling Track Export (Cubase Pro only) Select All Selects all tracks. Select None Deselects all tracks. Project Settings Shows the sample rate, the frame rate, and the project start time for both the imported tracks and your active project. NOTE Imported tracks may contain media files with a sample rate that differs from the sample rate of your destination project. Files with a sample rate different from the one that is used in the destination project play back at the wrong speed and pitch.
Track Handling Exporting MIDI Tracks as Standard MIDI Files 3. In the file dialog that opens, select or create a folder for saving the track archive as a single .xml file. 4. Enter a file name and click Save. RELATED LINKS Exporting Audio or Video Tracks as Track Archives on page 176 Exporting Audio or Video Tracks as Track Archives PROCEDURE 1. Select the audio or video tracks and any other tracks that you want to export. 2. Select File > Export > Selected Tracks. 3.
Track Handling Exporting MIDI Tracks as Standard MIDI Files Export Options Dialog for MIDI Files The Export Options for MIDI files allow you to specify what data is included in the exported MIDI files. ● To open the Export Options for MIDI files, select File > Export > MIDI File. Export Inspector Patch Includes MIDI patch settings in the Inspector as MIDI bank select and program change events in the MIDI file.
Track Handling Merging Mono Audio Tracks to Multi-Channel Tracks RELATED LINKS Automation on page 686 Markers on page 335 MIDI Track Parameters on page 755 Merging MIDI Events into a New Part on page 777 Export Options on page 1120 Merging Mono Audio Tracks to Multi-Channel Tracks You can convert mono tracks into multi-channel tracks to make editing and mixing more convenient. PREREQUISITE ● You project contains tracks with audio events that are not in Musical Mode.
Track Handling Removing Selected Tracks Merge Mono to Multi-Channel ● To open the Merge Mono to Multi-Channel dialog, select Project > Convert Tracks > Mono to Multi-Channel. Source Tracks Allows you to select whether you want to split all multi-channel tracks or only the selected. Options Allows you to specify what happens when the multi-channel file is split: ● Keep Source Tracks Inserts new mono tracks below the source tracks.
Track Handling Removing Empty Tracks Removing Empty Tracks You can remove empty tracks from the track list. PROCEDURE ● Select Project > Remove Empty Tracks. Moving Tracks in the Track List You can move tracks up or down in the track list. PROCEDURE ● Select a track and drag it up or down in the track list. Renaming Tracks PROCEDURE 1. Double-click the track name and type in a new name for the track. 2. Press Return.
Track Handling Showing Track Pictures PROCEDURE 1. Right-click any track in the track list. 2. From the track list context menu, select Show Track Pictures. If you move the mouse to the left on a track, a highlighted rectangle appears. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Double-click the rectangle to open the Track Pictures Browser and set up a track picture.
Track Handling Setting the Track Height Reset Current Picture Removes the picture from the selected track/channel. Show Preview/Hide Preview Opens/Closes a section with further color and zoom settings. Track Picture Preview Shows the current track picture. When you zoom in the picture, you can drag it with the mouse to change its visible part. Track Color Opens the Color Picker that allows you to select a track color.
Track Handling Selecting Tracks The following options are available: Zoom Tracks x Rows Zooms all track heights to show the specified number of rows. Zoom Tracks Full Zooms all tracks to fit in the active Project window. Zoom Tracks N Rows Allows you to set the number of rows to fit in the active Project window. Zoom x Tracks Zooms the specified number of tracks to fit in the active Project window. Zoom N Tracks Allows you to set the number of tracks to fit in the active Project window.
Track Handling Deselecting Tracks Selecting Tracks with Arrow Keys You can select tracks and events with the Up Arrow key or the Down Arrow key on the computer keyboard. However, you can make the Up Arrow key and the Down Arrow key exclusively available for selecting tracks. ● To make the Up Arrow key and the Down Arrow key exclusively available for selecting tracks, activate Use Up/Down Navigation Commands for Selecting Tracks Only in the Preferences dialog (Editing page).
Track Handling Organizing Tracks in Folder Tracks Organizing Tracks in Folder Tracks You can organize your tracks in folders by moving tracks into folder tracks. This allows you to perform editing on several tracks as one entity. Folder tracks can contain any type of track including other folder tracks. ● To add a folder track, click Add Track in the global track controls area of the track list, and click Folder.
Track Handling Track Folding Menu ● Right-click the audio event in the event display and select the desired event or region from the To Front or Set to Region submenu. NOTE The available options depend on whether you performed a linear or a cycle recording and the record mode you used. When recording audio in cycle mode, the recorded event is divided in regions, one for each take. ● Click the middle handle on the lower border of a stacked event and select an entry from the pop-up menu.
Track Handling Events Display on Folder Tracks ● If you activate Deep Track Folding in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Project & MixConsole page), track folding is applied to all subelements of the tracks. Events Display on Folder Tracks Closed folder tracks can display data of the contained audio, MIDI, and instrument tracks as data blocks or as events. When you close folder tracks, the contents of the contained tracks are displayed as data blocks or events.
Track Handling Lanes, Takes and Overlapping Events Lanes are handled differently, depending on whether you work with audio or MIDI: Audio As each audio track can only play back one single audio event at a time, you only hear the take that is activated for playback, for example, the last lap of a cycle recording. MIDI Overlapping MIDI takes (parts) can be played back simultaneously. If you recorded in Mix-Stacked mode, you hear all takes from all cycle laps.
Track Handling Lanes, Takes and Overlapping Events ● Right-click a track and select Create Tracks from Lanes. The lane is converted into a new track. Assembling Operations Unless it is clearly stated, all operations can be performed in the Project window and in the Audio Part Editor. Snap is taken into account, and all operations can be undone. To assemble a perfect take, you can use the Lane Comping tool, the Object Selection tool, or the Range Selection tool.
Track Handling Defining the Track Time Base Operation Lane Comping tool Audition Press Ctrl/Cmd to activate the See left. Speaker tool and click at the position where you want playback to start. Move Click and drag on the main track. Click and drag on any lane. Resize Drag the resize handles. All takes with the same start and end positions are affected. Resizing is constrained to the end or start of the adjacent takes. This ensures that you do not create overlaps accidentally.
Track Handling Track Versions RESULT Musical time base is indicated by a note symbol: Linear time base is indicated by a clock symbol: NOTE Switching between linear and musical time base results in a very small loss of positioning precision. Therefore, you should avoid switching repeatedly between the two modes.
Track Handling Track Versions NOTE Track versions are not available for automation tracks. Track versions are included in track archives and project backups. The track version key commands can be found in the Track Versions category of the Key Commands dialog. Track Versions Pop-Up Menu The Track Versions pop-up menu is available for all track types that support track versions. It contains the most important functions for managing track versions and a track versions list.
Track Handling Track Versions Track Version Indicator Indicates that more than one track version exists. Name Shows the version name. Double-click to change it. The name will be changed for all selected tracks. ID Shows the track version ID. Track Version list Lists all track versions and allows you to activate one of them for all selected tracks. New Version Creates a new, empty track version for all selected tracks. Duplicate Version Creates a copy of the active track version for all selected tracks.
Track Handling Track Versions Track Version IDs All track versions are automatically assigned an ID. Track versions that are created together get the same track version ID and can be selected together. In the Track Versions section in the Inspector, the track version ID is shown in the ID column of the track version list. In the track list, you can open the Track Versions pop-up menu to see the track version ID.
Track Handling Track Versions 2. Select the track version that you want to activate. RESULT The selected version is activated and its events are shown in the event display. NOTE If you work with audio tracks, MIDI tracks, instrument tracks, the sampler track or the chord track, you can also use the Track Versions Inspector to activate a track version. Activating Track Versions on Multiple Tracks You can simultaneously activate track versions on multiple tracks if these track versions share the same ID.
Track Handling Track Versions NOTE You can also use the Track Versions Inspector for audio tracks, MIDI tracks, instrument tracks, and chord tracks or the Track Versions pop-up menu in the track list to delete the active track version for selected tracks. Copying and Pasting Selection Ranges Between Track Versions You can copy and paste ranges between different track versions, even across multiple tracks. PREREQUISITE You have at least 2 track versions. PROCEDURE 1. Select the Range Selection tool. 2.
Track Handling Track Versions Track Version Names Each track version has a default track version name. If more than one version is available for the track, the track version name is shown in the track list and in the Track Versions section in the Inspector. By default, track versions are named v1, v2, etc. However, you can rename each track version to your liking. Renaming a Track Version PROCEDURE ● In the Track Versions section in the Inspector, double-click the track version name and enter a new name.
Track Handling Track Presets Track Versions vs. Lanes Track versions and lanes are individual features that complement each other. Every track version can have its own set of lanes. Creating Lanes from Track Versions If your project contains track versions and you want to continue working with lanes, using the Lane Comping tool, for example, you can create lanes from track versions. PROCEDURE 1. Select the tracks for which you want to create lanes. 2.
Track Handling Track Presets ● Applying VST presets to instrument tracks leads to removal of modifiers, MIDI inserts, inserts, or EQs. These settings are not stored in VST presets. Audio Track Presets Track presets for audio tracks, group tracks, FX tracks, VST instrument channels, input channels, and output channels include all settings that define the sound.
Track Handling Track Presets NOTE You can also define attributes for the preset. 4. Click OK to save the preset and exit the dialog. RESULT Track presets are saved within the application folder in the track presets folder. They are saved in default subfolders named according to their track type: audio, MIDI, instrument, and multi. RELATED LINKS Attribute Inspector on page 641 Loading Presets for Tracks You can choose from a variety of track presets. PROCEDURE 1.
Track Handling Track Presets ● Audio input gain and phase ● MIDI insert effects ● MIDI track parameters ● Input Transformer settings ● The VST instrument used for the track ● Staff settings ● Color settings ● Drum map settings VST Presets VST instrument presets behave like instrument track presets. You can extract sounds from VST presets for use in instrument tracks.
Track Handling Track Presets are of the same type, number, and sequence as the tracks in the track preset, therefore, they should be used in recurring situations with similar tracks and settings. Loading Multi-Track Presets PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, select several tracks. NOTE Multi-track presets can only be applied if track type, number, and sequence are identical for the selected tracks and the track preset. 2. In the track list, right-click a track and select Load Track Preset. 3.
Track Handling Track Presets RELATED LINKS Creating a Track Preset on page 199 Pattern Banks Pattern banks are presets that are created for the Beat Designer MIDI effect. They behave much like track presets. RELATED LINKS Pattern Banks Previewer on page 637 Track Presets on page 198 Loading Track, VST, or Sampler Track Presets PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, select a track. 2. Do one of the following: ● In the Inspector, click Load Track Preset.
Track Handling Track Presets Track Quick Control Presets For audio, instrument, MIDI, FX, and group tracks, you can save and load your own Quick Control assignments as presets or use the factory presets. Saving/Loading Track Quick Control Assignments as Presets PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector for your track, open the Quick Controls section. For instrument tracks, the track quick controls are set to the 8 default VST quick controls of the loaded instrument by default. 2.
Parts and Events Parts and events are the basic building blocks in Cubase. Events In Cubase, most event types can be viewed and edited on their specific tracks in the Project window. Events can be added by importing or recording. RELATED LINKS Audio Events on page 205 MIDI Events on page 208 Audio Events Audio events are created automatically when you record or import audio in the Project window. You can view and edit audio events in the Project window and in the Sample Editor.
Parts and Events Events RELATED LINKS Basic Recording Methods on page 264 Audio File Import on page 283 Importing Audio CD Tracks on page 286 Importing Audio from Video Files on page 288 MediaBay and Media Rack on page 611 Audio Part Editor on page 567 Sample Editor on page 499 Find Media Window on page 602 Creating New Files From Events An audio event plays a section of an audio clip, which in turn refers to one or more audio files on the hard disk.
Parts and Events Events This allows you to undo processing at a later stage, and to apply different processing to different audio clips that refer to the same original file. You can view and edit audio clips in the Pool. RELATED LINKS Pool on page 592 Audio Regions on page 207 Replacing Clips in Events on page 207 Replacing Clips in Events You can replace the clips in audio events.
Parts and Events Events RESULT A region is created in the corresponding clip, with the start and end position of the region determined by the start and end position of the event or selection range within the clip. RELATED LINKS Creating Regions on page 516 Creating Events from Regions PROCEDURE 1. Selected an audio event whose clip contains regions within the boundaries of the event. 2. Select Audio > Advanced > Events from Regions.
Parts and Events Parts Parts Parts are containers for MIDI or audio events, and for tracks. RELATED LINKS Audio Parts on page 209 MIDI Parts on page 209 Folder Parts on page 209 Audio Parts Audio parts are containers for audio events. If you want to treat several audio events as one unit in the Project window, you can convert them to a part. You can create audio parts in the following ways: ● Select the Draw tool and draw on the audio track.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events NOTE If you want to edit the individual tracks within the folder, you can double-click the folder part. This opens the editors for the events and parts that are present on the tracks. RELATED LINKS Event Colors Menu on page 788 Group Editing Mode (Cubase Pro only) on page 222 Editing Techniques for Parts and Events This section describes techniques for editing in the Project window.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events RELATED LINKS Project Window Toolbar on page 40 Previewer Section on page 632 Scrubbing The Scrub tool allows you to locate positions in events by playing back, forwards or backwards. PROCEDURE 1. Click Play. 2. Click again to open a pop-up menu. 3. Select Scrub. 4. Click the event and keep the mouse button pressed. 5. Drag to the left or right. RESULT The project cursor moves correspondingly and the event is played back.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Select Submenu If the Object Selection tool is selected, the Select submenu features specific options for selecting events in the Project window. ● To open the Select submenu, select Edit > Select. All Selects all events in the Project window. None Deselects all events in the Project window. Invert Inverts the selection. All selected events are deselected and all events that were not selected are selected instead.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events ● Select the events and select Edit > Delete. ● Select the events and press Backspace. RELATED LINKS Project Window Toolbar on page 40 Event Movement Options You can move events using any of the following methods: ● Use the Object Selection tool. ● Use the Nudge tool. ● Select Edit > Move to and select one of the options. ● Select the event and edit the start position on the info line.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events RELATED LINKS Project Window Toolbar on page 40 Move to Submenu If the Object Selection tool is selected, the Move to submenu features options for moving events to specific positions in the Project window. ● To open the Move to submenu, select Edit > Move to. The following options are available: Cursor Moves the selected event to the project cursor position.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Resizing Events with the Object Selection Tool - Sizing Moves Contents on page 215 Resizing Events with the Object Selection Tool - Sizing Applies Time Stretch on page 216 Resizing Events with the Trim Tool on page 216 Resizing Events with the Scrub Tool on page 217 Snap Function on page 80 Resizing Events with the Object Selection Tool - Normal Sizing You can move the start or end point of the event. PROCEDURE 1. Select Object Selection. 2.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Resizing Events with the Object Selection Tool - Sizing Applies Time Stretch You can move the start or end point of the event and time stretch the content to fit the new event length. PROCEDURE 1. Select Object Selection. 2. Click the Object Selection tool again, and select Sizing Applies Time Stretch from the pop-up menu. 3. Click and drag the lower left or right corner of the event.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Resizing Events with the Scrub Tool You can scrub the event when moving the start or end point of the event. PROCEDURE 1. Click Play. 2. Click Play again to open a pop-up menu. 3. Select Scrub. 4. Click and drag the lower left or right corner of the event. RESULT The event is resized and you get an acoustic feedback while dragging.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Splitting Events Repeatedly You can split events repeatedly into multiple events of equal size. PROCEDURE ● Select Split , hold down Alt and click the event where you want to make the first split. RESULT The event is automatically split into as many equal events as the length of the original event allows. Gluing Events In the Project window, you can glue two or more events on the same track.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Pasting Events to Matching Track Names You can copy events in one project and paste them at the first track that matches the exact track name in another project. PROCEDURE 1. Copy the events in one project. 2. Activate the project where you want to paste the events. 3. Select Edit > Functions > Paste to Matching Track Name. RESULT The events are inserted on the track with the name that exactly matches the original track name.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events NOTE This applies to MIDI events only. ● Move the mouse pointer over the middle of the right event border so that it becomes a pointing hand symbol, hold down Shift, click and drag to the right to create a shared copy. NOTE Repeating by dragging only works if the track has a height of at least 2 rows.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events The last copy is automatically shortened to end at the right locator position. Sliding the Contents of Events You can move the contents of an event without changing its position in the Project window. PROCEDURE ● Hold down Ctrl/Cmd-Alt, click the event, and drag to the left or right. RESULT The content of the event is moved. NOTE You cannot slide an audio event past the start or end of the actual audio clip.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Group Editing Mode (Cubase Pro only) The Group Editing mode for folder tracks allows you to edit parts and events in a folder as a group. If Group Editing is activated and you select an event, a part or a range on a track inside the folder track, other events, parts, or ranges that have the same start and end time and the same playback priority, are also selected and temporarily grouped.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events ● Click the padlock button in the track list or in the Inspector to lock all events on a track. RESULT The events are locked. This is indicated by a padlock symbol. To unlock an event, select the event and select Edit > Unlock. Lock Event Attributes Dialog The Lock Event Attributes dialog allows you to lock specific event attributes. ● To open the Lock Event Attributes dialog, select a locked event and select Edit > Lock.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events You can unmute events by selecting them and selecting Edit > Unmute.
Range Editing Editing in the Project window is not restricted to handling whole events and parts. You can also work with selection ranges, which are independent from the event/part and track boundaries. Creating a Selection Range PROCEDURE 1. On the Project window toolbar, select Range Selection. 2. Do one of the following: ● Draw a selection rectangle around the range that you want to select. ● Select Edit > Select, and select one of the menu functions.
Range Editing Editing Selection Ranges From Start to Cursor Makes a selection on all tracks, from the start of the project to the project cursor. From Cursor to End Makes a selection on all tracks, from the project cursor to the end of the project. Equal Pitch - all Octaves This function requires that a single note is selected. It selects all notes of this part that have the same pitch in any octave as the selected note. Equal Pitch - same Octave This function requires that a single note is selected.
Range Editing Editing Selection Ranges The pointer takes the shape of a double arrow when you move it over an edge of the selection range. ● By holding down Shift and clicking. The closest selection range edge is moved to the position at which you clicked. ● By adjusting the selection range length, or the start or end position on the info line. ● By using the trim buttons on the toolbar. The left trim buttons move the start of the selection range and the right buttons move the end.
Range Editing Editing Selection Ranges Duplicating Selection Ranges PREREQUISITE You have created a selection range. PROCEDURE ● Click the selection range, hold down Alt, and drag. RESULT RELATED LINKS Creating a Selection Range on page 225 Cut, Copy, and Paste of Selection Ranges You can cut or copy and paste selection ranges, using the functions on the Edit menu. You can also use the Cut Time and Paste Time options. Cut Cuts out the data in the selection range and moves it to the clipboard.
Range Editing Editing Selection Ranges Deleting Data in Selection Ranges ● To replace data within the deleted selection range with empty track space, select Edit > Delete or press Backspace. Events to the right of the range keep their position. ● To remove the selection range and make the events to the right move to the left to fill the gap, select Edit > Range > Delete Time.
Playback and Transport Cubase offers multiple methods and functions to control playback and transport. RELATED LINKS Transport on page 1127 Transport Panel The Transport panel contains the main transport functions as well as many other options related to playback and recording. ● To show the Transport panel, select Transport > Transport Panel or press F2.
Playback and Transport Transport Panel Allow you to select what happens when you record over existing MIDI parts. MIDI Auto Quantize Automatic MIDI Record Quantize Activates automatic quantizing during a MIDI recording. Locators Go to Left Locator Position Allows you to go to the left locator position. Left Locator Position Shows the left locator position. Go to Right Locator Position Allows you to go to the right locator position. Right Locator Position Shows the right locator position.
Playback and Transport Transport Panel Go to Next Marker/Project End Moves the project cursor to the next marker/project end. Rewind Moves backward. Forward Moves forward. Cycle Activates/Deactivates cycle mode. Stop Stops playback. Start Starts playback. Transport Record Activates/Deactivates record mode. Time Display Select Primary Time Format Allows you to select a time format for the primary time display. Primary Time Display Shows the position of the project cursor in the selected time format.
Playback and Transport Transport Panel Opens the Markers window. Pre-roll & Post-roll Activate Pre-roll Activates pre-roll. Pre-roll Amount Allows you to set the pre-roll position. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider. Activate Post-roll Activates post-roll. Post-roll Amount Allows you to set the post-roll position. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider. Tempo & Time Signature Activate Tempo Track Allows you to activate/deactivate the tempo track.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu Level Display Displays the output level. Level Control Allows you to control the output level. Set up Transport Set up Transport Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which elements are visible. RELATED LINKS Transport on page 1127 Transport - Scrub on page 1127 Transport Menu The Transport menu contains several transport functions as well as many other options related to playback and recording. Transport Panel Opens the Transport panel.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu Nudge Cursor Left Moves the project cursor position to the left. Nudge Cursor Right Moves the project cursor position to the right. Enter Project Cursor Position Allows you to enter the project cursor position manually. Enter Tempo Allows you to enter the tempo manually. Enter Time Signature Allows you to enter the time signature manually. Go to Project Start Moves the project cursor position to the start of the project.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu Activate Punch In Activates/Deactivates punch in. Activate Punch Out Activates/Deactivates punch out. Go to Punch In Position Moves the project cursor position to the punch in position. Go to Punch Out Position Moves the project cursor position to the punch out position. Set Punch In to Project Cursor Position Moves the punch in position to the project cursor position. Set Punch Out to Project Cursor Position Moves the punch out position to the project cursor position.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu Play until Selection Start Activates playback two seconds before the start of the current selection and stops at the selection start. Play until Selection End Activates playback two seconds before the end of the current selection and stops at the selection end. Play until Next Marker Activates playback from the project cursor and stops at the next marker. Play Selection Range Activates playback from the start of the current selection and stops at the selection end.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu Keep History Keeps existing events or portions of events. Cycle History + Replace Replaces existing events or portions of events by the new recording. In cycle mode, all takes from the current cycle recording are kept. Replace Replaces existing events or portions of events by the last take. MIDI Record Mode These options allow you to select what happens when you record over existing parts. New Parts Keeps existing parts and saves the new recording as a new part.
Playback and Transport Transport Bar In Stop mode, the project cursor is hidden from the event display. However, it is always visible in the ruler. Metronome Setup Opens the Metronome Setup dialog. Activate Metronome Activates/Deactivates the metronome click. Project Synchronization Setup Opens the Project Synchronization Setup dialog. Activate External Sync Sets Cubase to be synchronized externally.
Playback and Transport Transport Bar Constrain Delay Compensation Constrain Delay Compensation Minimizes the latency effects of the delay compensation. Common Record Modes Common Record Modes Allow you to determine what happens if you click Record during an audio or MIDI recording, and where the recording should start. Audio Record Modes Audio Record Modes Allow you to select what happens when you record over existing audio events.
Playback and Transport Transport Bar Allows you to go to the right locator position. Right Locator Position Shows the right locator position. Punch Points Punch In Activates Punch In. Punch Out Activates Punch Out. Lock Punch Points to Locators Locks the punch points to the left and right locator positions. Punch In Position Allows you to set up the punch in position. For this to work, Lock Punch Points to Locators must be deactivated. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider.
Playback and Transport Transport Bar Stops playback. Start Starts playback. Transport Record Activates/Deactivates record mode. Time Display Select Primary Time Format Allows you to select a time format for the primary time display. Primary Time Display Shows the position of the project cursor in the selected time format. Select Secondary Time Format Allows you to select a time format for the secondary time display.
Playback and Transport Transport Bar Allows you to set the post-roll position. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider. Tempo & Time Signature Activate Tempo Track Allows you to activate/deactivate the tempo track. Tempo Allows you to set the tempo value. Time Signature Allows you to set the first time signature value. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider. Right Divider Right Divider Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown.
Playback and Transport Transport Pop-Up Window Input/Output Activity MIDI In Activity Displays the MIDI input signals. MIDI Out Activity Displays the MIDI output signals. Audio Activity Displays the audio input/output signals. Audio Clipping Displays audio clipping. Level Display Displays the output level. Level Control Allows you to control the output level. Set up Transport Bar Set up Transport Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which elements are visible.
Playback and Transport Time Display Window Enter Punch In Position Shift-I Enter Punch Out Position Shift-O Go to Left Locator Num 1 Go to Right Locator Num 2 Using a specific key command opens the corresponding section of the Transport pop-up window: Transport pop-up window for entering the left Locator position. NOTE To close the Transport pop-up window, press Esc. Time Display Window The Time Display window allows you to view the current time position in a separate window.
Playback and Transport Left and Right Locators Samples Displays the time in samples. Show Beat Count Only Shows the beat counts only. This is useful if you want to use the Time Display window as a visual metronome. Increase Window Size Increases the size of the window and the displayed values. Decrease Window Size Decreases the size of the window and the displayed values. NOTE You can set up the Window Transparency in the Studio Setup dialog (Time Display page).
Playback and Transport Setting the Project Cursor Position ● Click in the upper part of the ruler and drag to the right. ● Select a range or an event and select Transport > Locators > Set Locators to Selection Range. ● Double-click a cycle marker. ● Select a range or an event and press P. To move the locator range, do the following: ● Click and then drag left or right in the upper part of the ruler.
Playback and Transport Auto-Scroll Settings Menu NOTE You can use Num1 to set the project cursor to the left locator position, and Num2 to set the project cursor to the right locator position. ● By using markers. ● By using the arranger functions. ● By using key commands.
Playback and Transport Time Formats If this option is activated, auto-scrolling is suspended as soon as you click anywhere in the event display during playback until playback stops or you click Auto-Scroll again. As a visual feedback, the Auto-Scroll button changes its color. Time Formats You can set up different time formats. Selecting the Primary Time Format On the Transport panel, you can select the primary time format.
Playback and Transport Pre-Roll and Post-Roll Pre-Roll and Post-Roll You can activate pre-roll and post-roll with the corresponding buttons in the Pre-roll & Post-roll section on the Transport panel or by selecting Transport > Pre-roll & Post-roll > Use Preroll/Use Post-roll. NOTE To show the Pre-roll & Post-roll section, right-click anywhere in the Transport Bar panel or in the Transport Bar and activate Pre-roll & Post-roll.
Playback and Transport Punch In and Punch Out Punch In and Punch Out The punch in and the punch out points are a pair of markers that you can use for punch in and punch out of recordings. The punch in position determines the record start position and the punch out position determines the record stop position. You can activate punch in and punch out by activating the corresponding buttons on the Transport panel.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click The default metronome click pattern with 4 clicks at a 4/4 time signature A metronome click pattern with 3 clicks at a 3/4 time signature By setting up click patterns for the metronome at the current time signature, you can create a custom metronome click. You can determine the number of clicks and the level of the clicks to your liking.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click ● To open the Click Pattern Editor in the Transport Bar, click the points to the right of the Click & Count-in & Click Pattern section and drag all the way to the right. Click the pattern field to open the Click Pattern Editor. Clicks Allows you to define the number of clicks that are used in the pattern. Pattern Allows you to select a pattern preset or to save your own ones.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click RELATED LINKS Click Pattern Editor on page 252 Transport Bar Sections on page 239 Setting up Metronome Click Patterns for Signature Events You can set up a metronome click pattern for each signature event in your project. This is useful if you have different project parts with different time signatures, and you want to customize click patterns to the rhythm and feel of these parts.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click RELATED LINKS General Tab on page 256 Click Sounds Tab on page 257 Click Patterns Tab on page 259 Transport Bar Sections on page 239 255
Playback and Transport Metronome Click General Tab The General tab allows you to make basic metronome settings. In the topmost section, the following options are available: Activate Metronome Click Activates/Deactivates the metronome click. In the Click Destinations section, the following options are available: Use MIDI Click Activates a MIDI click for the metronome. Use Audio Click Activates an audio click for the metronome that is output via the audio hardware.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click In the Count-In section, the following options are available: ● Number of Bars in Count-In Allows you to set the number of bars that the metronome counts in before recording starts. ● Time Signature at Record Start Position Activate this to let the count-in automatically use the time signature and tempo set at the position where recording starts. ● Time Signature at Project Position Activate this to let the count-in use the time signature at the project position.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click Note Allows you to set the MIDI note number, that is, the pitch from C-2 to G8. Set the note number for the first beat in a bar in the top row, and the note numbers for the other beats in the rows below. Velocity Allows you to set the velocity of the MIDI click sound. Set the velocity for the first beat in a bar in the top row, and the velocities for the other beats in the rows below.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click 3. In the file dialog, navigate to the audio file that you want to use as a custom sound for the first beat and select it. 4. Click Open. 5. Click the other rows to select audio files for the other beats. 6. Set the level of the sounds by clicking the respective rows in the Level column and adjusting the value. 7. Optional: Click Play to audition the custom sounds. RESULT The metronome uses the defined custom sounds for the audio click.
Playback and Transport Chase Double-click to add a new click pattern for the time signature. 5 Clicks Allows you to change the number of clicks used in the click pattern. 6 Click Pattern Shows the click pattern. You can open the Click Pattern Editor by clicking the pattern. 7 Remove Click Pattern Removes the click pattern from the list of available patterns. 8 Add New Pattern Adds a new default click pattern for the time signature.
Playback and Transport Chase The Chase function takes care of that. If program change events are set to be chased, Cubase tracks the music back to the beginning, finds the first program change, and transmits it to your synth, setting it to the correct sound. The same can apply to other event types as well. In the Preferences dialog (MIDI page), the Chase Events settings determine which event types are chased when you locate to a new position and start playback.
On-Screen Keyboard The On-Screen Keyboard allows you to play and record MIDI notes by using your computer keyboard or mouse. This is useful if you have no external MIDI instrument at hand and you do not want to draw in notes with the Draw tool. When the On-Screen Keyboard is displayed, the usual key commands are blocked because they are reserved for the On-Screen Keyboard.
On-Screen Keyboard On-Screen Keyboard Options 1 Note Velocity Level This slider allows you to adjust the volume of the On-Screen Keyboard. You can also use the Up Arrow key or the Down Arrow key for this. 2 Change On-Screen Keyboard Type This button allows you to switch between computer keyboard and piano keyboard display mode. In computer keyboard mode, you can use the two rows of keys that are displayed on the On-Screen Keyboard to enter notes. The piano keyboard has a wider range of keys.
Recording In Cubase, you can record audio and MIDI. Make the following initial preparations: ● Set up, connect, and calibrate your audio hardware. ● Open a project and set up the parameters in the Project Setup dialog according to your specifications. The parameters in the Project Setup dialog determine the record file format, sample rate, project length, etc. that affect the audio recordings that you make during the course of the project.
Recording Basic Recording Methods RELATED LINKS Editing - Project & MixConsole on page 1112 VST on page 1129 Record Enabling Tracks on Selection You can set up a preference so that tracks are record-enabled when you select them. PROCEDURE 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Open the Editing—Project & MixConsole page and activate Enable Record on Selected Audio Track or Enable Record on Selected MIDI Track. RESULT The tracks are record-enabled when you select them.
Recording Basic Recording Methods If cycle mode is activated, and the punch in point corresponds to the left locator position, and the punch out point is positioned before the right locator, recording is stopped at the punch out position and resumed at the punch in position. If the punch positions are locked to the locators, recording is automatically activated when the project cursor reaches the left locator.
Recording Basic Recording Methods ● Press Num 0. RESULT Recording and playback stops. Cycle Recording You can record in a cycle, that is, you can record a selected section repeatedly and seamlessly. PREREQUISITE A cycle is set up with the left and right locators. PROCEDURE 1. Click Activate Cycle on the Transport panel to activate cycle mode. 2. Activate recording from the left locator, before or within the cycle.
Recording Monitoring Common Record Modes Menu The Common Record Modes determine what happens if you click Record during an audio or MIDI recording. ● To access the record modes, select Transport > Common Record Modes. You can also access the Common Record Modes by clicking the upper part of the Record Modes section on the Transport panel. Punch In/Out In this mode, the recording is stopped.
Recording Monitoring Monitoring via Cubase If you use monitoring via Cubase, the input signal is mixed with the audio playback. This requires an audio hardware configuration with a low latency value. PROCEDURE 1. In the track list, activate Monitor. 2. In the MixConsole, adjust the monitoring level and the panning. You can add effects and EQ to the monitor signal using the track’s channel.
Recording Monitoring 2. Select Studio > Studio Setup. 3. In the Devices list, select your audio hardware driver, and activate Direct Monitoring. If the checkbox is grayed out, your audio hardware (or its driver) does not support ASIO Direct Monitoring. Consult the audio hardware manufacturer for details. 4. In the Preferences dialog, select VST. 5. Open the Auto Monitoring pop-up menu and select a monitoring mode. 6. In the MixConsole, adjust the monitoring level and panning.
Recording Audio Recording Specifics Audio Recording Specifics Preparations Selecting a Record File Format You can set up the record file format, that is, the sample rate, bit depth, and record file type for new audio files. PROCEDURE 1. Select Project > Project Setup. 2. Set up the settings for Sample Rate, Bit Depth, and Record File Type. IMPORTANT The bit depth and file type can be changed at any time while the sample rate of a project cannot be changed at a later stage.
Recording Audio Recording Specifics RELATED LINKS Add Track Dialog – Audio on page 104 RAM Requirements for Recording Each track on which you record requires a certain amount of RAM, and the memory usage increases the longer the recording lasts. For each audio channel, 2.4 MB of RAM are required for MixConsole settings, etc. The memory usage increases with the length of the recording, the sample rate, and the number of tracks you record.
Recording Audio Recording Specifics Audio Record Modes By selecting an Audio Record Mode, you decide what happens to your recording and to any existing events on the track where you are recording. This is necessary because you will not always record on an empty track. There may be situations where you record over existing events, especially in cycle mode. ● To access the record modes, select Transport > Audio Record Mode.
Recording Audio Recording Specifics RESULT The output of the group track will be recorded on the new track and you will get a mix of your separate tracks. NOTE You can also select an FX channel as recording source. In this case, only the output of the FX channel will be recorded. RELATED LINKS Routing on page 379 Undoing Recordings You can undo a recording immediately after recording it. PROCEDURE ● Select Edit > Undo. RESULT ● The events that you just recorded are deleted from the Project window.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics This creates an audio event that starts where the cursor position was when you activated recording. If you were in stop mode, and the cursor was at the beginning of the project, you may have to move the event to the right in the next step. If you were playing along to a project, you leave the event where it is. 6. Select the Object Selection tool and place the cursor on the bottom left edge of the event so that a double arrow appears. Then click and drag to the left.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics Naming MIDI Ports MIDI inputs and outputs are often displayed with long and complicated names. In Cubase, you can rename your MIDI ports to more descriptive names. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Studio Setup. 2. In the Devices list, select MIDI Port Setup. The available MIDI inputs and outputs are listed. On Windows, the device to choose depends on your system. 3. Click in the Show As column and type in a new name. 4. Click OK.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics Selecting a Sound You can select sounds from within Cubase by instructing the program to send Program Change and Bank Select messages to your MIDI device. PROCEDURE 1. In the track list, select the track to which you want to assign a sound. 2. In the track list or the Inspector, open the Program Selector pop-up menu and select a program. Program Change messages give access to 128 different program locations. 3.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics activate ASIO Latency Compensation on the track list, all recorded events are moved by the current latency setting. The following preferences affect MIDI recording: ● Length Adjustment ● Snap MIDI Parts to Bars ● MIDI Record Catch Range in ms ● ASIO Latency Compensation Active by Default You can find them in the Preferences dialog on the MIDI and on the Record—MIDI page.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics Program Change Messages When you switch from one program to another on your synthesizer or on another MIDI keyboard, a number corresponding to that program is sent out via MIDI as a Program Change Message. You can record Program Change Messages together or independently from the notes, that is, afterwards or before. You can record Program Change Messages on their own tracks, separately from the notes to which they belong.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics Replace Existing events in parts that are overlapped by a new recording are replaced. NOTE In Merge or Replace mode you can activate Record in Editor to record MIDI data in the editor. For this to work, the editor must have the focus. Otherwise, the data is recorded on the MIDI track in the Project window.
Recording Remaining Record Time Recovering MIDI Recordings Cubase allows you to recover MIDI recordings. Enabling Retrospective MIDI Record The Retrospective MIDI Record setting allows you to capture any MIDI notes that you play in stop mode or during playback and turn them into a MIDI part after the fact. This is possible because Cubase can capture MIDI input in buffer memory, even when not recording. PROCEDURE 1. In the Preferences dialog, select Record > MIDI. 2.
Recording Lock Record NOTE An automatic punch out at the right locator position will be ignored in Lock Record mode.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files You can add audio and MIDI files to your project by importing them. Audio File Import You can import compressed and uncompressed audio files in a variety of different formats. You can also import audio from audio CDs or extract the audio of video files. RELATED LINKS Importing Media on page 604 Setting up Audio File Import Options You can specify how audio files should be handled on import. PROCEDURE 1. In the Preferences dialog, select Editing > Audio. 2.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Audio File Import Copy File to Working Directory/Copy Files to Working Directory Copies the audio file to the Audio folder of the project, and has the clip refer to the copy. Deactivate this option to have the clip refer to the original file in the original location. In this case, it is marked as “external” in the Pool.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Audio File Import Convert to Project/Convert and Copy to Project If Needed Converts the imported file if the sample rate or the bit depth differ from the settings in the Project Setup dialog. Split Channels/Split multi-channel files Splits stereo or multichannel audio files into a corresponding number of mono files, one for each channel, and copies the imported files to the Audio folder of the project.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Audio File Import Layer 2 and MPEG Layer 3. MP3 files are highly compressed files that still provide good audio quality. The files have the extension .mp3. Ogg Vorbis File This is an open source, patent-free audio encoding and streaming technology. The Ogg Vorbis encoder uses variable bit rate encoding. It offers compressed audio files of small size, but with comparatively high audio quality. The files have the extension .ogg.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Audio File Import Drive Opens a pop-up menu that allows you to select the correct CD drive. Speed (Windows only) Allows you to select the data transfer speed. NOTE While you normally want to use the fastest possible speed, you may have to select a slower speed for flawless audio extraction. Eject CD Opens the CD drive. Secure Mode (Windows only) Activates error checking and correction when reading the CD.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Audio File Import Copy Start The start of the section that is imported. On the ruler, drag the Left Marker to the right to adjust this. Copy End The end of the section that is imported. On the ruler, drag the Right Marker to the left to adjust this. The Ruler The ruler has the following functions: 1 Play Tracks Plays back the selected track from the start to the end or from the left marker to the right marker. 2 Stop Playback Stops playback.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Audio File Import A new audio clip is created and added to the Pool. In the Project window, an event referencing the audio file is inserted on the selected track at the project cursor position. If no track was selected, a new track is created. RELATED LINKS Extracting Audio from Video on page 1060 Importing Video Files on page 1056 Importing ReCycle Files You can import REX and REX 2 audio files created by ReCycle from Propellerhead Software.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files MIDI File Import MIDI File Import Cubase can import standard MIDI files. This allows you to transfer MIDI material to and from virtually any MIDI application on any platform. Import Options for MIDI Files The Import Options for MIDI files allow you to specify what data is included in imported MIDI files. Extract First Patch Converts the first Program Change and Bank Select events for each track to Inspector settings for the track.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files MIDI File Import Import Karaoke Lyrics as Text Converts karaoke lyrics in the MIDI file to text that can be displayed in the Score Editor. If this option is deactivated, lyrics are only shown in the List Editor. Importing MIDI Files PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Import > MIDI File. 2. Optional: If a project is open, choose if you want to create a new project. If you select No, the MIDI file is imported into the current project. 3.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantizing means moving recorded audio or MIDI and positioning it on the nearest grid position that is musically relevant. Quantizing is designed to correct errors, but you can also use it in a creative way. You can quantize audio and MIDI to a grid or to a groove. You can also quantize multiple audio tracks simultaneously. Audio and MIDI can be quantized at the same time.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantizing MIDI Event Starts Cuts off the ends of selected MIDI events so that the events match the length quantize value. The start positions are kept. ● Quantize MIDI Event Ends Moves the ends of MIDI events to the nearest grid positions. ● Freeze MIDI Quantize Makes the start and end positions of MIDI events permanent. This function is useful in situations where you want to quantize a second time, based on the current quantized positions rather than the original positions.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantizing MIDI Event Lengths Quantizing MIDI Event Lengths PREREQUISITE You have set up a length quantize value on the Length Quantize pop-up menu on the Key Editor toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. 2. Perform one of the following actions: ● In the Key Editor, select the MIDI events that you want to quantize. ● In the Project window, select a MIDI part. Select Edit > Advanced Quantize > Quantize MIDI Event Lengths.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantizing Audio Event Lengths (AudioWarp Quantizing) (Cubase Pro only) RESULT The event snap point, or, if not available, the start of the audio event, is quantized. Event starts that do not match exact note positions are moved to the closest grid positions. NOTE If you use the Quantize function on an audio part, the starts of the events inside the part are quantized.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantizing Multiple Audio Tracks (Cubase Pro only) NOTE The audio on all tracks must have the same start and end positions. 5. Select the folder track and activate Group Editing in the track list. 6. In the event display, select one of the events. All audio events contained in the folder track are selected. 7. On the Project window toolbar, click Open Quantize Panel to open the Quantize Panel. 8.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel RELATED LINKS Quantize Panel on page 297 Group Editing Mode (Cubase Pro only) on page 222 Quantize Panel The Quantize Panel allows you to define how to quantize audio or MIDI to the grid or to a groove. Depending on what method you choose, different parameters are shown. To open the Quantize Panel, perform one of the following actions: ● Click Open Quantize Panel on the toolbar. ● Select Edit > Quantize Panel.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel Quantize Presets To the top of the Quantize Panel the quantize presets are shown. Here, you can load and save presets that include all settings for quantizing. Select Preset Allows you to select a preset. Save Preset Allows you to save the current settings as a preset, so that they become available on all Quantize Presets pop-up menus. Remove Preset Allows you to remove the selected preset. Rename Preset Opens a dialog where you can rename the selected preset.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel The hitpoints for the audio event are detected and displayed automatically. 3. Click Create Groove. The groove is extracted. RESULT The groove is extracted from the audio event and made available in the Quantize Presets popup menu on the Project window toolbar. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Open the Quantize Panel and save the groove as a preset.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel NOTE Swing is only available if Grid is set to a straight value and Tuplet is deactivated. Catch Range Allows you to set a value that determines that quantizing affects only audio or MIDI within the set distance from the grid lines. This is reflected in the grid display. Non-Quantize Range Creates a safe zone before and after the quantize positions. If you specify a distance in ticks (120 ticks = one 16th note), events that lie within this zone are not quantized.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel Quantize Applies your settings. Options for Quantizing to a Groove You can generate a timing grid from a MIDI part or an audio loop, and use this groove to quantize your recorded music. This way, you can recreate the rhythmic feel of this specific event or part.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel Pre-Q Allows you to select a musical grid to which you can quantize your audio or MIDI first. This gets the notes closer to their groove destination. NOTE If you apply a shuffle groove to a 16th-note pattern, for example, set up a prequantize value of 16 to straighten up the timing before applying the groove quantizing. Max. Move Allows you to select a note value to specify a maximum distance that the audio or MIDI can be moved. Orig.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel RELATED LINKS Creating Groove Quantize Presets on page 298 Options for Quantizing Multiple Audio Tracks If you quantize multiple audio tracks, the Slice Rules section becomes available in the Quantize Panel. Here, you determine how the audio events are sliced at the hitpoints. ● To access the Slice Rules section, move your audio tracks to a folder track, activate Group Editing, and open the Quantize Panel.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel Group Editing Mode (Cubase Pro only) on page 222 Crossfades Section The Crossfades section becomes available after you have sliced the audio events. The functions in this section allow you to correct the overlaps or the gaps that might appear due to the repositioning of your audio.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel If no star is shown, the hitpoints on the corresponding track are not taken into account. Range Two hitpoints on different tracks are considered to mark the same beat if they are located within a certain distance from each other. The Range parameter specifies this distance. The following rules apply: ● If one of the tracks has a higher priority, its hitpoint is used to create the warp marker.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Fades allow you to gradually increase or decrease the volume at the start or end of audio events or audio clips, and to create smooth transitions. You can create the following fades: ● Fade ins/fade outs Fade ins and fade outs allow you to gradually increase or decrease the volume of audio events or audio clips. Fade ins and fade outs can be either event-based or clip-based. Event-based fades are calculated in real time when you play back audio events.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event-Based Fades ● By using range selections You can edit event-based fades in the Fade dialogs. RELATED LINKS Creating and Editing Fades with the Handles on page 307 Creating and Editing Fades with the Range Selection Tool on page 308 Fade Dialog for Event-Based Fades on page 309 Creating and Editing Fades with the Handles You can create and edit event-based fade ins and fade outs using the event handles.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event-Based Fades In the upper left and right corners, you find triangular fade handles that allow you to change the fade-in or fade-out length. In the top middle, you find a square handle that allows you to change the volume. ● To change the fade-in length, drag the fade handle in the upper left to the right or to the left. ● To change the fade-out length, drag the fade handle in the upper right to the left or to the right.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event-Based Fades 2. Select Audio > Remove Fades. Fade Dialog for Event-Based Fades ● To open the dialog for event-based fades, create a fade for one or more audio events, select the events and select Audio > Open Fade Editor(s). NOTE If you select several events, you can adjust the fade curves for all selected events at the same time. This is useful if you want to apply the same type of fade in to more than one event, for example.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Creating Clip-Based Fades 8 ● To apply a stored preset, select it from the pop-up menu. ● To remove a stored preset, select it from the pop-up menu and click Remove. As Default Click this button to save the current settings as default fade. 9 Shape buttons Give you quick access to some common curve shapes. Creating Clip-Based Fades You can create and edit clip-based fade ins and fade outs using Direct Offline Processing. These fades are applied to the audio clip.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Crossfades Crossfades Crossfades allow you to create smooth transitions for consecutive audio events on the same track. Crossfades are always event-based. You can only create crossfades if the consecutive events or their respective clips overlap. ● If the audio events overlap, a crossfade of the default shape (linear, symmetric) is applied in the overlapping area. NOTE You can edit the default crossfade length and shape in the Crossfade editor.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Crossfades Crossfade Editor The Crossfade editor allows you to edit crossfades. It contains fade-in and fade-out curve settings, and common settings. ● To open the Crossfade editor, select one or both crossfaded events, and select Audio > Crossfade, or double-click the crossfade zone. Fade curve displays Show the shape of the fade-out and fade-in curve, respectively. ● To add points, click a curve. ● To change the fade shape, click and drag existing points.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Auto Fades and Crossfades Length Specifies the length of the crossfade area. Cubase tries to center the crossfade, that is, the length change is applied equally to both sides. To be able to resize a crossfade, it must be possible to resize the corresponding event. For example, if the fade-out event already plays its audio clip to the end, its end point cannot be moved any further to the right.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Auto Fades and Crossfades Auto Fades Dialog The Auto Fades dialog allows you to set up auto fades and crossfades for the whole project, or separately for each audio track. ● To open the global Auto Fades dialog, select Project > Auto Fades Settings. ● To open the Auto Fades dialog for a track, right-click in the track list and select Auto Fades Settings. 1 Fades Click this tab to show the settings for auto fades.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Auto Fades and Crossfades Equal Gain allows you to adjust the fade curves so that the summed fade-in and fade-out amplitudes are the same all along the crossfade region. Equal Power allows you to adjust the fade curves so that the energy (power) of the crossfade is constant all along the crossfade region. 3 Length Allows you to specify the length of the auto fades or crossfades. 4 Auto Fade In Allows you to activate auto fade ins.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event Envelopes PROCEDURE 1. Perform one of the following actions: ● Right-click the track in the track list, and from the context menu, select Auto Fades Settings. ● Select the track, and in the Inspector, click Auto Fades Settings. The Auto Fades dialog for the track opens. 2. Deactivate Use Project Settings. Any settings you now make are applied to the track only. 3. Set up the auto fades. 4. Click OK.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event Envelopes ● To remove an event envelope curve from a selected event, select Audio > Remove Volume Curve. Creating Clip-Based Volume Changes PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, select the event. 2. Select Audio > Processes > Envelope. 3. In the Direct Offline Processing dialog, make your settings, and click Apply. RESULT The volume change is created. The waveform image of the event changes according to the volume change.
Arranger Track The arranger functions in Cubase allow you to work in a non-linear fashion. Using an arranger track allows you to specify how and when specific sections are played back, even in live performances. This way, you do not need to move, copy, and paste events in the Project window. NOTE There can be only one arranger track in a project. To use the arranger functions, you must add an arranger track and define arranger events. Arranger events can be of any length.
Arranger Track Arranger Editor RESULT The arranger events are added to your project. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Use the functions of the Arranger Editor to arrange the events. RELATED LINKS Arranger Track on page 158 Setting up an Arranger Chain and Adding Events on page 322 Snap Function on page 80 Snap Types Menu on page 80 Renaming Arranger Events When you add arranger events, they are automatically named in alphabetical order.
Arranger Track Arranger Editor NOTE Initially, the arranger chain is empty. To fill it up, you must add events from the Arranger Events list. Shows the order in which the events are played back, from top to bottom, and how many times they are repeated. 3 Arranger Events Lists the available arranger events in the order they appear on the timeline. Arranger Toolbar ● To open the Arranger Editor, select an arranger track, and click Open Arranger Editor in the track list. Stop Stops playback.
Arranger Track Arranger Editor Duplicate Current Chain Creates a duplicate of the current arranger chain, containing the same events. Remove Current Chain Removes the selected arranger chain. This is only available if you have created more than one arranger chain. Flatten Converts the current arranger chain into a linear project. Flatten (with Options & Preferences) Allows you to set up the flatten options.
Arranger Track Setting up an Arranger Chain and Adding Events Current Chain Flattens the current chain only. Checked Chains Opens a list of the available arranger chains where you can activate the arranger tracks that you want to flatten. All Chains Flattens all arranger chains of the current project. The Destination section allows you to choose where the result of the flattening is saved. Current Project This is only available if Source is set to Current Chain.
Arranger Track Setting up an Arranger Chain and Adding Events 3. 4. Perform one of the following actions to add arranger events to the arranger chain: ● Double-click an event in the Arranger Events list. ● Select one or more events in the Arranger Events list, right-click, and select Append Selected In Arranger Chain. ● Drag an arranger event from the Arranger Events list and drop it in the Current Arranger Chain list.
Arranger Track Jump Mode RELATED LINKS Arranger Chain Repeat Modes on page 321 Flattening the Arranger Chain When you have set up an arranger chain that you like, and you are sure that you do not want to edit it any more, you can convert it to a linear project. PREREQUISITE You have saved a copy of the project before flattening the arranger chain. NOTE Flattening the arranger chain may remove events and parts from the project.
Arranger Track Jump Mode 3. In the Arranger Events list of the Inspector, click the arrow to the left of the arranger event that you want to trigger. RESULT The arranger event is looped according to your settings, until you click another arranger event. NOTE You can assign key commands to trigger arranger events in the Arranger category of the Key Commands dialog. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● To stop Jump Mode, click Stop.
Arranger Track Arranging Music to Video 1 Beat Jumps to the next section at the next beat. End Plays the current section to the end, then jumps to the next section. Arranging Music to Video When you compose music for video, you can use arranger events to fill a specific video section with music. The following is an example on how you could do that. PREREQUISITE You have connected and set up an external sync master device to your computer. You have created a new, empty project and added a MIDI track.
Transpose Functions The transpose functions for audio and MIDI in Cubase allow you to change the pitches of audio and MIDI for playback without changing the actual MIDI notes or the audio. You can transpose the following: ● An entire project by changing the Project Root Key on the Project window toolbar. ● Specific sections of your project by creating a transpose track and adding transpose events. ● Individual parts or events by changing their transpose value on the Project window info line.
Transpose Functions Project Root Key Transposing with the Project Root Key The loops included in Cubase already contain root key information. If you change the project root key, these loops will follow automatically. PREREQUISITE You have opened a project that contains audio loops with different root keys. PROCEDURE 1. Optional: Select the drum and percussion loops in your project and set the Global Transpose setting on the info line to Independent. This setting excludes the loops from being transposed.
Transpose Functions Project Root Key This setting excludes the loops from being transposed. 3. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Other Track or Use Track Preset . 4. Select Add Transpose Track. The transpose track is added to the track list. You can only have one transpose track in a project. 5. In the track list, right-click the transpose track, and from the context menu select Set root key for unassigned events.
Transpose Functions Transpose Track The Key column is displayed in the Pool window. 3. Click the Key column for the audio event or part that you want to assign a different root key to, and select a key from the pop-up menu. RESULT The root key of the audio event or part is changed. The corresponding audio file however, remains unchanged. If you change the project root key, the audio events or parts keep their own root key settings, and are transposed to match the Project Root Key.
Transpose Functions Transpose Track Transposing Sections of a Project with Transpose Events You can transpose specific sections of your project by creating transpose events on the transpose track. PROCEDURE 1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Other Track or Use Track Preset . 2. Select Add Transpose Track. The transpose track is added to the track list. You can only have one transpose track in a project. 3. Select the Draw tool and click on the transpose track.
Transpose Functions Keep Transpose in Octave Range Keep Transpose in Octave Range Keep Transpose in Octave Range on the transpose track keeps the transposition in the octave range. This ensures that nothing is transposed by more than seven semitones, and that your music never sounds unnatural because the pitch was raised too high or too low. We also recommend activating this function, when you work with audio loops. EXAMPLE You have opened the Key Editor and activated Indicate Transpositions .
Transpose Functions Transpose on the Info Line Transpose Track and Recording The transpose track affects the result of the recorded parts or events. If your project contains a transpose track with transpose events, and you record audio or MIDI, the following happens: ● Global Transpose is automatically set to Independent for the recorded parts or events. ● The project root key is not taken into account.
Transpose Functions Excluding Individual Parts or Events from Global Transpose Excluding Individual Parts or Events from Global Transpose If you add global transposition, for example, by changing the root key or by creating transpose events, you can exclude specific events from being transposed. This is useful for drum and percussion loops or special effects (FX) loops. PROCEDURE 1. Select the event or part that you want to exclude from being transposed. 2.
Markers Markers are used to locate certain positions quickly. There are two types of markers: position markers and cycle markers. If you often find yourself jumping to a specific position within a project, you should insert a marker at this position. You can also use markers to make range selections or for zooming. Markers are located on the marker track. You can add 1 marker track in Cubase Artist and up to 10 marker tracks in Cubase Pro.
Markers Markers Window AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Now you can move the project cursor position to the start or the end of the cycle marker by moving it to the corresponding locator or use cycle markers to export specific ranges of your project with the Export Audio Mixdown dialog. Editing Cycle Markers When editing cycle markers on a marker track, snap is taken into account. ● To add a cycle marker, press Ctrl/Cmd click and drag on the marker track.
Markers Markers Window 4 Marker type Allows you to specify which marker type is shown in the marker list. 5 Auto-Scroll with Project Cursor Allows you to keep track of the locate arrow, even if your project contains a large number of markers. If this option is activated, the Marker window is automatically scrolled to keep the locate arrow visible. 6 Markers list Shows the markers in the order in which they occur in the project. 7 Marker Settings Shows the marker settings.
Markers Markers Window NOTE No matter by which attribute you sort, the second sort criterion will always be the position attribute. Marker Settings ● To open the marker settings, select Project > Markers, and click Marker Settings . Cycle follows when locating to Markers This sets the left and right locators automatically to a position or cycle marker, when locating to this marker. This is useful if you need to set the locators on the fly during recording for Punch In/Punch Out, for example.
Markers Markers Window ● To change the attributes of several markers, select the markers and click the checkbox for the desired attribute. All selected markers will change their attributes accordingly. Note that this does not work when clicking on a timecode value or a text field. NOTE To navigate in the list of marker attributes, you can also use the Tab key and the Up Arrow, Down Arrow, Left Arrow, and Right Arrow keys.
Markers Marker Track Marker Track A marker track is used for adding and editing markers. 1 Add Marker Adds a position marker at the cursor position. 2 Add Cycle Marker Adds a cycle marker at the cursor position. 3 Locate pop-up menu If you select a position or a cycle marker in this pop-up menu, the corresponding marker in the event display or in the Markers window is selected. 4 Activate this track Activates the marker track.
Markers Marker Track ● Cubase Artist only: To remove the marker track, right-click it in the track list and select Remove Selected Tracks. ● To remove an empty marker track, select Project > Remove Empty Tracks. This also removes any other tracks that are empty. NOTE Cubase Pro only: When you remove all marker tracks, the marker track that you removed last (including all its markers) is moved to the clipboard.
Markers Importing and Exporting Markers ● To move a marker, select it and drag it. You can also edit marker positions on the info line. Cubase Pro only: If you move markers from one track to another, the marker gets the numbering of the first free marker ID on the track where it is dropped. ● To remove a marker, select it and press Delete or use the Erase tool.
Markers Importing and Exporting Markers Exporting Markers via MIDI You can export your markers as part of a MIDI file. ● To include any markers in the MIDI file, activate Export Markers in the Export Options dialog.
MixConsole The MixConsole provides a common environment for producing mixes in stereo or surround. It allows you to control level, pan, solo/mute status, etc. for audio and MIDI channels. Furthermore, you can set up the input and output routing for multiple tracks or channels at the same time. You can undo/redo MixConsole parameter changes for an open project at any time. You can open the MixConsole in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window.
MixConsole MixConsole in Lower Zone 1 Page selector Allows you to select what page is displayed in the fader section: the channel faders, the insert effects for a channel, or the send effects. The top button allows you to show/hide the toolbar. 2 Toolbar The toolbar shows tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MixConsole. 3 Fader section The fader section is always visible and shows all channels in the same order as in the track list.
MixConsole MixConsole in Lower Zone RESULT The track in the track list and the corresponding MixConsole channel are shown/hidden in the lower zone of the Project window. RELATED LINKS Opening the Track Visibility on page 60 Showing/Hiding Individual Tracks on page 61 Visibility on page 60 Determining the MixConsole Channel Order in the Lower Zone You can determine and lock the position of MixConsole channels in the lower zone of the Project window. PROCEDURE 1.
MixConsole MixConsole Window MixConsole Window You can open the MixConsole in a separate window. To open the MixConsole, do one of the following: ● Press F3. ● Select Studio > MixConsole. ● On the Project window toolbar, click Open MixConsole. NOTE This is only visible on the toolbar if the Media & MixConsole Windows section is activated. The MixConsole is divided into the following sections: 1 Toolbar The toolbar shows tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MixConsole.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Apart from the main sections, you can also access the following sections from within the MixConsole window: 1 Channel overview Displays all channels as boxes. If you have more channels than can be displayed in the window, you can use the channel overview to navigate to other channels and select them. 2 Meter bridge Allows you to monitor the levels of your channels. To select a meter type, open the meter bridge context menu and select either PPM or Wave.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Allows you to add a picture to the selected channel. Pictures can help you identify your MixConsole channels quickly. 6 Notepads Allows you to enter notes and comments about a channel. Each channel has its own notepad. 7 Channel Latencies Allows you to show the latencies caused by insert effects or channel strip modules.
MixConsole MixConsole Window ● Snapshots Lists all MixConsole snapshots that you saved, and allows you to recall snapshots. RELATED LINKS Undoing/Redoing MixConsole Parameter Changes on page 358 MixConsole Toolbar on page 352 MixConsole Visibility The Visibility tab in the MixConsole lists all channels contained in your project, and allows you to show/hide specific channels. ● To show/hide channels, check/uncheck them by clicking to the left of the channel name.
MixConsole MixConsole Window MixConsole Zones The Zones tab lists all channels contained in your project, and allows you to lock the position of specific channels. ● To lock channels on the left/right of the fader section, click the left or right dots next to the channel names. Locked channels are excluded from scrolling. They are always visible. NOTE The MixConsole in the lower zone of the Project window does not follow any visibility changes that you perform in the MixConsole window and vice versa.
MixConsole MixConsole Window MixConsole Snapshots The Snapshots tab lists all snapshots of MixConsole settings, and allows you to recall them later. This is useful if you want to compare different versions of a mix. In Cubase, you can save up to 10 snapshots for audio-related channels. These save settings for input/output, audio, VST instrument, sampler track, group, FX, and VCA fader channels. Snapshots are saved with the project.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Left Divider Left Divider Allows you to use the left divider. Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown. Search Find Track/Channel Opens a selector that lists all tracks/channels. Channel Visibility Configuration Channel Visibility Configurations Allows you to create configurations that are useful for switching quickly between different visibility setups.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Right Locator Position Shows the right locator position. Transport Buttons Go to Previous Marker/Zero Moves the project cursor to the previous marker/zero position on the timeline. Go to Next Marker/Project End Moves the project cursor to the next marker/project end. Rewind Moves backward. Forward Moves forward. Activate Cycle Activates/Deactivates cycle mode. Stop Stops playback. Start Starts playback. Transport Record Activates/Deactivates record mode.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Allows you to select a time format for the secondary time display. Markers Jump to Marker Allows you to set and locate marker positions. Open Markers Window Opens the Markers window. State Buttons Deactivate All Mute States Deactivates all mute states. Deactivate All Solo States Deactivates all solo states. Deactivate All Listen States Deactivates all listen states. Activate/Deactivate Read for All Tracks Activates/Deactivates read automation for all tracks.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Link Group Link/Unlink Selected Channels Links the selected channels/removes their link. Edit Link Group Settings Allows you to change the link group settings. Suspend All Channel Linking Suspends all channel linking. Absolute Mode Enables absolute value changes. Temporary Link Mode Synchronizes all touched parameters of selected channels. Zoom Palette Reduce Channel Width Allows you to reduce the channel width. Set Number of Channels Displays the set number of channels.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown. Mixer Functions Menu Functions Menu Opens a pop-up menu where you can select a MixConsole function. Window Zone Controls Show/Hide Left Zone Shows/Hides the left zone of the window. Show/Hide Right Zone Shows/Hides the right zone of the window. Set up Window Layout Allows you to set up the window layout. Set up Toolbar Set up Toolbar Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which toolbar elements are visible.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Undoing/Redoing MixConsole Parameter Changes You can undo/redo MixConsole parameter changes and experiment with different MixConsole settings. NOTE MixConsole parameters that change due to read automation actions are not part of the MixConsole history. To undo/redo a MixConsole parameter, do one of the following: ● On the MixConsole toolbar in the MixConsole window or in the lower zone of the Project window, click Undo or Redo.
MixConsole MixConsole Window AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can open the MixConsole Snapshot Recall Settings dialog, and activate the settings that you want to recall. RELATED LINKS MixConsole Snapshot Recall Settings on page 361 Renaming MixConsole Snapshots You can rename MixConsole snapshots. PROCEDURE 1. In the left zone of the MixConsole, open the Snapshots tab. 2. Double-click the snapshot name and type in a new name for the snapshot. 3. Press Return.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 2. Optional: Click MixConsole Snapshot Functions and select MixConsole Snapshot Recall Settings to open a dialog where you can activate the settings that you want to recall, and click OK. 3. Select the snapshot that you want to recall, and click Recall Snapshot x . NOTE Automation data is not saved in MixConsole snapshots. If you recall a snapshot to a channel that contains automation data, you get a warning message. A message informs you that the snapshot is recalled.
MixConsole MixConsole Window PROCEDURE 1. In the left zone of the MixConsole, open the Snapshots tab. 2. Select the snapshot for which you want to add comments. 3. In the Snapshot Notes section of the Snapshots tab, type in your notes. MixConsole Snapshot Recall Settings The MixConsole Snapshot Recall Settings allow you to specify the channel settings that are recalled when you load a saved snapshot.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Volume Activate this to recall the volume. Selected Channels only Activate this to recall the settings only for selected channels. Warn Before Deleting Plug-in Automation If this option is activated, a warning opens if plug-in automation might be deleted. Filtering Channel Types The channel types filter on the MixConsole toolbar allows you to determine which channel types are shown. PROCEDURE 1. Click Set Channel Type Filter. This opens the channel types filter. 2.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Delete Configuration Allows you to delete the active configuration. Move Configuration to Position This function becomes available if 2 or more configurations exist. It allows you to change the position of the active configuration on the menu. This is useful as you can assign key commands to the first 8 configurations in the Channel & Track Visibility category of the Key Commands dialog.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Show Channels for Tracks with Data between the Locators Shows all channels for tracks with events or parts between the locators. Show Channels that are Connected to the First Selected Channel Shows all channels that are connected to the channel you first selected. Undo Visibility Change Undoes visibility changes. Redo Visibility Change Redoes visibility changes.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Sends Allows you to select send effects for your channel. Cue Sends (audio-related channels only) (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to activate and control the level and pan for up to 4 cue sends. Direct Routing (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to set and activate outputs for all selected channels at once. Track Quick Controls Allows you to add quick controls for instant access. Device Panels (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to view the available device panels.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Show Quick Controls as Select Combined Destination & Value if you want to show the destination and the value in one line. Select Separate Destination & Value if you want to show the destination and the value in separate lines. RELATED LINKS MixConsole Toolbar on page 352 Linking Channels In Cubase Pro, you can link selected channels in the MixConsole to form a link group.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Select VCA Fader Allows you to select a VCA fader channel. Volume Activate this to link the volume of the linked channels. Pan Activate this to link the panorama of the linked channels. EQ Activate this to link the equalizers of the linked channels. Dynamics (Compressor, Gate, etc.) Activate this to link the dynamics of the linked channels. Sends Activate this to link the sends of the linked channels. Inserts Activate this to link the inserts of the linked channels.
MixConsole MixConsole Window The pop-up menu provides the following options: Unlink Selected Channels Only available for a selected link group. Select this option to remove the link between the channels. This removes the link group. If you use a VCA fader, you must specify if you want to revert to the original automation of the linked channels. A VCA fader that controls this link group is not removed. Edit Link Group Settings Allows you to change the link group settings.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Changing the Link Group Settings (Cubase Pro only) If you change a setting for a channel of a link group, the change is applied to the whole group. ● To change the link settings for an existing link group, select the group, on the MixConsole toolbar, click Edit Link Group Settings, and change the settings in the Link Group Settings dialog. ● To unlink channels, select one of the linked channels and click Link on the MixConsole toolbar.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Using Quick Link You can activate the Temporary Link Mode to synchronize all touched parameters of selected channels. PROCEDURE 1. Select the channels that you want to link. 2. On the MixConsole toolbar, activate Q-Link. NOTE You can also press Shift-Alt to temporarily link channels. In that case, the link is only active as long as you press the keys. 3. Change the parameters for one of the selected channels.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Save Selected Channels Saves the settings for the selected channels. Load Selected Channels Loads the settings for the selected channels. Global Meter Settings Opens a submenu where you can set up the global meter settings. Reset MixConsole Channels Allows you to reset EQ, insert, and send effect settings for all or selected channels. Solo and mute buttons are deactivated, the volume fader is set to 0 dB, and pan is set to the center position.
MixConsole MixConsole Window NOTE When you apply loaded MixConsole settings to fewer channels, some of the saved settings are not applied. Since the saved settings are applied from left to right as shown in the MixConsole, the settings for the channels furthest to the right are not applied to any channels. Fader Section The fader section is the heart of the MixConsole. It shows input and output channels together with audio, instrument, MIDI, group, FX, VCA fader (Cubase Pro only), and ReWire channels.
MixConsole MixConsole Window NOTE All fader section functions and settings are also available in the MixConsole in the lower zone of the Project window. RELATED LINKS Changing the Link Group Settings (Cubase Pro only) on page 369 Channel Settings on page 399 Write/Read Automation on page 686 Showing/Hiding MixConsole Channels in the Lower Zone on page 345 Pan Control For each audio-related channel with at least a stereo output configuration, you can find a pan control at the top of the fader section.
MixConsole MixConsole Window ● To specify the default stereo panner mode for new audio tracks, set the Default Stereo Panner Mode in the Preferences dialog (VST page). Pan Bypass You can bypass the panning for all audio-related channels. ● To activate panning bypass, click the button to the left or press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-Shift and click the pan control. ● To deactivate panning bypass, press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-Shift and click again.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Volume Each channel in the fader section of the MixConsole has a volume fader. The fader levels are displayed below the fader, in dB for audio-related channels and as MIDI volume (0 to 127) for MIDI channels. ● To change the volume, move the fader up or down. ● To make fine volume adjustments, press Shift while moving the faders. ● To reset the volume to its default value, press Ctrl/Cmd and click a fader.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 2. 3. 4. Do one of the following: ● Click Channel Meter to make settings for the channel meter. ● Click Master Meter to make settings for the master meter. Do one of the following to set the level position for a color change: ● Double-click a level position to the right of the meter scale and enter the level (dB) value. To enter dB values smaller than zero, add a minus sign before the entered number.
MixConsole MixConsole Window NOTE Input and output channels have clipping indicators. When they light up, lower the gain or the levels until the indicator is no longer lit. Input Levels When recording digital sound, it is important to set the input levels high enough to ensure low noise and high audio quality. At the same time, you must avoid clipping (digital distortion). Setting Input Levels PROCEDURE 1. Select Functions Menu > Global Meter Settings > Meter Position and activate Input.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Channel Racks The Channel Racks section contains specific MixConsole functions, such as routing, insert, or send handling. These are organized in racks. NOTE The MixConsole in the lower zone of the Project window features the Inserts and the Sends rack only.
MixConsole MixConsole Window You can copy rack and channel settings between different types of channels, provided that the target channels have corresponding settings. ● For example, copying from input/output channels leaves the sends settings in the target channel unaffected. ● Cubase Pro only: For projects with surround sound, any insert effects that are routed to surround speaker channels become muted when the settings are pasted to a mono or stereo channel.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Input Busses The input routing selector only lists busses that correspond to the channel configuration. NOTE If you select a group channel as input for an audio channel, you can record a downmix. Input Routing Configurations for Mono Channels ● Mono input busses or individual channels within a stereo or surround input bus (Cubase Pro only). ● External inputs that are configured on the Control Room tab of the Audio Connections window.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Output Busses For output busses any assignment is possible. Using Group Channels You can route the outputs from multiple audio channels to a group. This enables you to control the channel levels using one fader, apply the same effects and EQ to all channels, etc. You can also select a group channel as input for an audio track, to record a downmix of separate tracks, for example. PREREQUISITE You have created and set up a group channel track in stereo. PROCEDURE 1.
MixConsole MixConsole Window You can choose between 6, 12, 24, 36, and 48 dB. The default value is 12 dB. 3. Click to the left of the low-cut filter to activate the low-cut filter. You have the following options: ● Drag the slider to adjust the cutoff frequency. The available range spans from 20 Hz to 20 kHz. ● Click Select Filter Slope on the right of the low-cut filter to select a filter slope. You can choose between 6, 12, 24, 36, and 48 dB. The default value is 12 dB.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 3. Click an insert effect to select it. RESULT The selected insert effect is loaded and automatically activated. Its plug-in panel opens. Changing the Number of Pre-Fader/Post-Fader Slots For each audio-related channel, you can add pre-fader and post-fader inserts, and you can adjust their number. PROCEDURE ● Do one of the following: ● Right-click an insert effect in a pre-fader position, and from the context menu, select Set as last Pre-Fader Slot.
MixConsole MixConsole Window ● To load a preset, select Load FX Chain Preset and select a preset. NOTE You can also apply inserts together with EQ and channel strip settings from track presets. You can load, tag, and save FX chain presets in the MediaBay. Equalizers (EQ) The Equalizers (EQ) rack is only available for audio-related channels. It features a built-in parametric equalizer with up to 4 bands for each audio channel. NOTE This channel rack is only available in the MixConsole window.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Equalizer Settings You can make equalizer settings for the 4 bands. These have different default frequency values and different Q names. However, they all have the same frequency range (20 Hz to 20 kHz). You can specify different filter types for each individual module. 1 Bypass EQ Click to bypass all EQ bands. 2 Curve display Click on the display in a channel to show a larger version.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 4 Activate/Deactivate Band Click to activate/deactivate an EQ band. Band Settings 1 Activate/Deactivate Band Activates/Deactivates the equalizer band. 2 Gain Sets the amount of cut or boost. The range is ±24 dB. 3 Frequency Sets the center frequency of the frequency range to be cut or boosted. You can set the frequency either in Hz or as a note value. If you enter a note value, the frequency is automatically displayed in Hz.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Channel Strips The Channel Strip rack is only available for audio-related channels. It allows you to load built-in processing modules for separate channels. You can change the position of specific modules in the signal flow via drag and drop. NOTE The Channel Strip rack is only available in the MixConsole window. Noise Gate Allows you to silence audio signals below a set threshold level.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Filter Frequency (50 to 20000 Hz) If the internal side-chain is activated, this parameter sets the filter frequency for the signal detection. Q-Factor (0.001 to 10.000) If the internal side-chain is activated, this parameter sets the resonance of the filter for the signal detection. Listen Filter Allows you to monitor the filtered signal. Compressor This channel strip module reduces the dynamic range of the audio, making softer sounds louder or louder sounds softer, or both.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Tube Compressor The Tube Compressor with integrated tube-simulation allows you to achieve smooth and warm compression effects. The VU meter shows the amount of gain reduction. This compressor features an internal side-chain section that lets you filter the trigger signal. Input Gain (-24.0 to 48.0 dB) Determines the compression amount. The higher the input gain, the more compression is applied. Output Gain (-12.0 to 12.0 dB) Sets the output gain.
MixConsole MixConsole Window RELATED LINKS VintageCompressor - Details View on page 406 EQ You can make equalizer settings for the 4 bands. These have different default frequency values and different Q names. However, they all have the same frequency range (20 Hz to 20 kHz). You can specify different filter types for each individual module. 1 Activate/Deactivate Band Activates/Deactivates the equalizer band. 2 Select EQ Band Type Opens a pop-up menu where you can select an EQ type for the band.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Auto Threshold Automatically and continually chooses an optimum threshold setting independent of the input signal. The Auto Threshold option does not work for low-level signals (<-30 dB peak level). To reduce the sibilants in such a signal, set the threshold manually. Low-Frequency (20 to 12650 Hz) Allows you to set the low frequency band. High-Frequency (30 to 20000 Hz) Allows you to set the high frequency band.
MixConsole MixConsole Window High-Frequency Sets the frequency range of the spectrum band to which the tape effect is applied. To avoid the saturation of very high frequencies, set this parameter to values below 10 kHz. Solo Allows you to hear only the set frequency range including the tape simulation effect. This helps you to determine the appropriate frequency range. HF-Adjust Sets the amount of high frequency content of the saturated signal. HF-Adjust On/Off Activates/Deactivates the HF-Adjust filter.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Limit Allows you to avoid clipping even at high levels. Open the pop-up menu to select between Brickwall Limiter, Maximizer, and Standard Limiter. Brickwall Limiter Brickwall Limiter ensures that the output level never exceeds a set limit. Due to its fast attack time, Brickwall Limiter can reduce even short audio level peaks without creating audible artifacts. However, this channel strip module creates a latency of 1 ms.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Saving/Loading Strip Presets You can save and load strip presets. Strip presets have the file name extension .strippreset. PROCEDURE ● In the top right corner of the Channel Strip rack, open the Presets pop-up menu and perform one of the following actions: ● To save the current settings as a preset, select Save Strip Preset and name your preset. ● To load a preset, select Load Strip Preset and select a preset.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Cue Sends (Cubase Pro only) Cue sends allow you to create discrete cue mixes that performers can listen to during recording. Essentially, cue sends are stereo aux sends that are routed to cue channel outputs in the Control Room. NOTE This channel rack is only available in the MixConsole window. For every cue channel defined in the Audio Connections window, each channel in the MixConsole has a cue send, with level, pan, and pre/post-fader selection.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 3. In the routing selector, select the main output for the selected channels. NOTE We recommend that you choose the same set of destinations for all channels that belong together. The main output should also have the widest channel configuration, since it is used as a reference for all additional output destinations. IMPORTANT The routing of the main output in the first Direct Routing slot defines the channel width.
MixConsole MixConsole Window NOTE To activate this setting for all channels at once use the Link function. 3. Activate all outputs to which you want to route the selected channels. RELATED LINKS Setting up Routing on page 379 Automatic Downmixing The output in the first Direct Routing slot defines the channel width. Since the other destinations are positioned post-panner in the signal path, they have the same channel width to start with, and the signal needs to be converted accordingly by downmixing.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Sl and Sr signals are split to L/R and Ls/Rs respectively, but reduced in volume. Track Quick Controls Track Quick Controls give you instant access to up to 8 different parameters, for example, track, effect, or instrument controls. This saves you from having to click your way through the various windows and sections pertaining to your track. NOTE This channel rack is only available in the MixConsole window. Adding Track Quick Controls in the MixConsole PROCEDURE 1.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Channel Latency Overview The Channel Latencies display the latencies caused by insert effects or channel strip modules for audio-related channels in the MixConsole. ● To show the channel latency display in the fader section of the MixConsole, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activate Channel Latencies. ● To open an overview of the latencies for a specific channel, click Open Channel Latency Overview.
MixConsole MixConsole Window NOTE To separate the channel selection in the Channel Settings window from the channel selection in the MixConsole, open the Functions Menu on the toolbar of the Channel Settings window, and deactivate Follow ‘e’ buttons or selection changes. To separate the channel selection in the Channel Settings window from the track selection in the Project window, deactivate Sync Selection in Project Window and MixConsole in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Project & MixConsole page).
MixConsole MixConsole Window The Direct Routing section allows you to set up 7 routing destinations that are positioned post-fader and post-panner in the signal path. This way, you can switch the destination of channels and create different mix versions in one go. 6 Fader The fader section shows the current channel. The sections are arranged in zones at the left and right of the Channel Settings window.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Left Divider Left Divider Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown. Channel Sources Input Opens the name of the input channel. Go to Input/Select an Input Shows the input channel in the Channel Settings window. Channel Name Channel Name Shows the name of the channel that is shown in the Channel Settings window. Channel Destinations Go to Output/Select an Output Opens the output channel in the Channel Settings window.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Allows you to reload track presets. Channel Functions Functions Menu Opens a pop-up menu where you can select a Channel Settings function. Window Zone Controls Set up Window Layout Allows you to set up the window layout. Set up Toolbar Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which toolbar elements are visible. Channel Settings – Channel Inserts ● To open the Channel Inserts in the Channel Settings window, click Set up Window Layout, and activate Channel Inserts.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Channel Settings – Channel Strip NOTE The Channel Strip/Equalizer section is always available. Bypass Channel Strip Bypasses the channel strip modules for the channel. Channel Strip Allows you to activate and set up channel strip modules for the channel. Preset Management Allows you to load or save strip presets.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Standard Compressor – Details View The Standard Compressor features a details view with more controls and value readouts for the meters. ● To open the details view, click Edit Module . In the details view, the following additional parameters are available: ● Soft Knee/High Ratio ● Hold ● Analysis ● Dry Mix ● Input Gain meter ● Output Gain meter ● Gain Reduction meter You can close the details view by clicking Close Module .
MixConsole MixConsole Window In the details view, the following additional parameters are available: ● Character ● Low/High switch for Ratio ● Side-chain section with Frequency, Filter Type, Q-Factor, and Monitor ● Input Gain meter ● Output Gain meter You can close the details view by clicking Close Module . RELATED LINKS Tube Compressor on page 389 VintageCompressor - Details View The VintageCompressor features a details view with more controls and value readouts for the meters.
MixConsole MixConsole Window In the details view, the following additional parameters are available: ● Mix ● Ratio buttons ● Input Gain meter ● Output Gain meter ● Gain Reduction meter You can close the details view by clicking Close Module RELATED LINKS VintageCompressor on page 389 Channel Settings – Equalizer NOTE The Channel Strip/Equalizer section is always available. 407 .
MixConsole MixConsole Window Bypass Equalizers Bypasses the equalizer settings for the channel. Equalizer display Allows you to make equalizer settings for the 4 bands in a large EQ curve display with several modes. Show/Hide Equalizer Controls Allows you to step through different display modes of the Equalizer section: Show Equalizer Controls, Show Equalizer Knob Controls, or Hide Equalizer Controls. Preset Management Allows you to load or save equalizer presets.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Bypass Sends Bypasses the send effects for the channel. Sends—Destinations Allows you to set up a destination for the send effects for the channel. Sends—Panning Allows you to set up panning for the send effects. Bypass Cue Sends (Cubase Pro only) Bypasses the cue send effects for the channel. Cue Sends (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to add cue send effects for the channel.
MixConsole MixConsole Window The Direct Routing section allows you to set up routing destinations that are positioned postfader and post-panner in the signal path. This way, you can switch the destination of channels and create different mix versions in one go. RELATED LINKS Channel Settings on page 399 Direct Routing (Cubase Pro only) on page 395 Channel Settings – Channel Faders ● To open the Channel Faders in the Channel Settings window, click Set up Window Layout, and activate Channel Faders.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Channel Settings on page 399 Keyboard Focus in the MixConsole The left zone, the channel rack section, and the fader section can be controlled with the computer keyboard. For this to work, the section must have the focus. If a section has the keyboard focus, the border that surrounds it is highlighted in a specific color. Activating Keyboard Focus PROCEDURE 1. Click in an empty area of the section to activate the keyboard focus. 2. Press Tab to activate the next section.
VCA Faders (Cubase Pro only) VCA faders serve as remote controls for groups of channel faders in the MixConsole. VCA stands for Voltage-Controlled Amplifier. VCA faders were originally found on hardware mixing desks. They allowed the user to control the volume levels of several mixer channels with only one fader. To assign channel faders to a VCA fader, the respective channels must be physically connected with the VCA fader. In Cubase, the VCA fader function is based on the same concept.
VCA Faders (Cubase Pro only) VCA Fader Settings 1 Link group number 2 Link group name 3 VCA fader pop-up menu 4 Peak meter that displays the summed up level of all channel meters in the link group 5 Fader cap The VCA fader pop-up menu provides the following options: Edit Link Group Settings Allows you to change the link group settings. VCA Fader Controls Link Group: Shows the link group that the VCA fader controls. You can assign the VCA fader to a different link group.
VCA Faders (Cubase Pro only) Creating VCA Faders in the MixConsole RELATED LINKS VCA Fader Automation on page 416 Creating Smooth Transitions Between Automation Events (Bézier Automation Curves) on page 690 Link Group Settings Dialog (Cubase Pro only) on page 366 Creating VCA Faders in the MixConsole You can create VCA faders in the MixConsole. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > MixConsole. 2. Right-click in the fader section, and select Add VCA Fader.
VCA Faders (Cubase Pro only) Assigning VCA Faders to Link Groups Assigning VCA Faders to Link Groups You can link channels and assign VCA faders to control them. PREREQUISITE You have selected channels. PROCEDURE 1. Click Link on the MixConsole toolbar. 2. In the Link Group Settings dialog, click in the Name field to enter a name for the link group. 3. Activate Use VCA Fader. The Volume parameter is automatically deactivated. 4.
VCA Faders (Cubase Pro only) Nested VCA Faders NOTE You can keep the VCA fader in the fader section. In this case, open the VCA fader pop-up menu, select VCA Fader Controls Link Group: , and select None. This removes only the VCA fader assignment. RELATED LINKS Link Group Settings Dialog (Cubase Pro only) on page 366 Nested VCA Faders VCA faders can control other VCA faders.
VCA Faders (Cubase Pro only) VCA Fader Automation For the channels, the original automation is adjusted by the volume level of the VCA fader track. EXAMPLE The VCA fader track automation affects an existing volume automation of an audio track. The lighter static value line displays the VCA fader automation that has not been written yet. The VCA fader track has a different automation curve that affects the automation of the audio track.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) The Control Room allows you to divide the studio environment into the performing area (studio) and the engineer/producer area (control room). To open the Control Room, you have the following options: ● To open the Control Room in a separate window, select Studio > Control Room. ● To open the Control Room section in the MixConsole window, click Show/Hide Right Zone on the MixConsole toolbar.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Output Routing RESULT The Control Room functions are available for use. If you disable the Control Room, the configuration is saved and will be restored when you reenable the Control Room. Output Routing For the Control Room to function correctly, you must assign the Main Mix bus to the set of outputs that contains the mix that you want to hear. If you only have one output bus, it automatically becomes the Main Mix. All other outputs are not routed through the Control Room.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Control Room Channels Phones Channel You can use the phones channel in the Control Room to listen to cue mixes. You can create 1 phones channel for a stereo configuration. It allows you to listen to the main mix or cue mixes or to external inputs on a pair of headphones. You can also use it for previewing. Cue Channels You can use cue channels for sending cue mixes, also known as headphone mixes, to performers in the studio during recording.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Control Room - Main Tab Control Room - Main Tab The Control Room Main tab displays information and controls for the channels that you define on the Control Room tab in the Audio Connections window. The Control Room Main tab is divided into a number of sections that you open by clicking their header. To open several sections simultaneously, use Ctrl/Cmd-click. External The External section allows you to use external inputs for monitoring external devices.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Control Room - Main Tab Cue Channel The Cue Channel section allows you to set up cue channels for sending cue mixes. 1 Activate Cue Channel Allows you to activate/deactivate the cue channel. 2 Source selectors Allow you to select the source for the cue channel: monitor mix (Mix), external inputs (Ext), or the cue sends (Cues). The signal presence indicators in the upper left corner light up when the source channel is sending data to the cue channel.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Control Room - Main Tab Allows you to listen to all soloed speakers in the center channel. If the center channel is not available, the channels are distributed equally to the left and right. 5 Listen to Surround Channels on Front Channels Allows you to solo the surround channels and route them to the front speakers. 6 Solo LFE Channel Allows you to solo the LFE channel. To open the Main Mix bus in the MixConvert V6 plug-in, double-click the channel display.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Control Room - Main Tab Phones The Phones section allows you to use the phones channel in the Control Room to listen to cue mixes. 1 Activate Phones Channel Allows you to activate/deactivate the phones channel. 2 Activate Metronome Click Activates/Deactivates the metronome click. 3 Source selectors Allow you to select the source for the phones channel: monitor mix (Mix), external inputs (Ext), or the cue sends (Cues).
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Control Room - Main Tab 1 Activate Control Room Channel Allows you to activate/deactivate the Control Room channel. 2 Signal Level Allows you to set the volume for the Control Room output. This does not affect the recording input level or the Main Mix level for exporting mixdowns. Ctrl/Cmd-click to set the level to the reference level specified in the Preferences dialog (VST—Control Room page). 3 Signal meter Shows the volume for the Control Room output.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Control Room - Inserts Tab 1 Click Level/Click Pan Use the Click Level and Click Pan controls to set the volume and the pan position of the metronome click for the Control Room channel. 2 AFL/PFL Allows you to determine whether the signal of a listen-enabled channel is routed to the Control Room channel after applying the fader and pan settings AFL or before applying the fader and pan settings PFL.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Control Room - Inserts Tab Input Gain Setting up the input gain can be useful in the following situations: ● To balance the level of external inputs, for example, CD players and other sources to the Main Mix level, for A/B comparisons.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Setting up a Cue Mix ● To balance the level of your monitor systems, so that switching between sets of speakers does not change the playback volume. Input Phase Reversing the input phase can be useful for external inputs and monitor speaker outputs. Insert Effects Each Control Room channel has a set of insert effect slots. Control Room Channel Inserts For metering and spectral analysis plug-ins.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Adjusting the Overall Cue Send Level Cue Mix Context Menu Change Cue Sends Levels Allows you to adjust multiple send levels at the same time. Use Current Mix Levels Allows you to copy the fader levels of the selected tracks to the cue sends. This sets all cue send levels for the selected tracks to the level of the main channel fader. It also changes the cue send status to pre-fader, so that changes in the main mix do not affect the cue sends.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Adjusting the Overall Cue Send Level The level of all selected cue sends is adjusted by the set amount. 6. Click OK.
Metering and Loudness (Cubase Pro only) Cubase provides a master meter that works as a multichannel true peak meter, and a loudness meter that allows you to measure the loudness in compliance with the loudness recommendation R 128 of the European Broadcasting Union (EBU). Metering Cubase provides a master meter and a loudness meter that can be shown in the right zone of the Project window and the MixConsole, or in a separate window in the Control Room.
Metering and Loudness (Cubase Pro only) Loudness Measurement Allows you to select a scale according to different broadcast standards (Digital, DIN, EBU, British, Nordic, K-20, K-14, or K-12). The headroom is indicated by red lines in the meter scale. 3 Alignment level standards Allows you to select an alignment level (offset) for your scale. This is unavailable for digital and K-System scales. The broadcast meter scales DIN, EBU, Nordic, and British have a default alignment level of -18 dBFS.
Metering and Loudness (Cubase Pro only) Loudness Measurement Loudness Range The loudness range measures the dynamic range over the whole title in LU (Loudness Units). It reports the ratio between the loudest and the quietest non-silent sections. The audio is divided into small blocks. There is one audio block every second, and each block lasts 3 seconds so that the analyzed blocks overlap. The top 10 % of the quiet blocks and the top 5 % of the loud blocks are excluded from the final analysis.
Metering and Loudness (Cubase Pro only) Loudness Measurement 1 Activate Control Room View Shows/Hides the Control Room section. 2 Loudness meter Shows the Integrated value as a triangle in the left meter scale and the Short-Term value as a triangle in the right meter scale. 3 Measure Loudness Activates the loudness measurement. 4 Switch between LU and LUFS Switches the meter scale between LUFS (absolute values) and LU (relative values).
Metering and Loudness (Cubase Pro only) Loudness Measurement Shows the average loudness measured from start to stop. The period of measurement is shown in the Time display. The recommended value for the integrated loudness is -23 LUFS. This absolute value is the reference point for the relative LU scale where -23 LUFS equals 0 LU. 10 Range Shows the dynamic range of the audio measured from start to stop. This value helps you to decide how much dynamic compression you can apply.
Metering and Loudness (Cubase Pro only) Loudness Measurement Allows you to specify a reference value and a tolerance value for the integrated loudness. If higher values are detected, the clipping indicator in the loudness meter turns red. 5 True Peak Allows you to specify a reference value and a tolerance value for the true peak level. If higher values are detected, the clipping indicator in the loudness meter turns red.
Audio Effects Cubase comes with a number of included effect plug-ins that you can use to process audio, group, instrument, and ReWire channels. This chapter contains general details about how to assign, use, and organize effect plug-ins. The effects and their parameters are described in the separate document Plug-in Reference. Insert Effects and Send Effects You can apply effects to audio channels by using insert effects or send effects.
Audio Effects Insert Effects and Send Effects Send Effects Send effects can be added to FX channel tracks, and the audio data to be processed can be routed to the effect. This way, the send effects remain outside the audio channel’s signal path. Each audio channel has 8 sends, each of which can be freely routed to an effect (or to a chain of effects). Use send effects in the following cases: ● To control the balance between the dry and wet sound individually for each channel.
Audio Effects Insert Effects Side-Chain Inputs Several VST 3 effects feature side-chain inputs. These allow you to control the operation of the effect via external signals that are routed to the side-chain input. The effect processing is still applied to the main audio signal. RELATED LINKS Side-Chain Input on page 453 Plug-In Delay Compensation Some audio effects, especially dynamics processors that feature a look-ahead functionality, may take a brief time to process the audio fed into them.
Audio Effects Insert Effects NOTE To show all post-fader slots in the MixConsole, open the Rack Settings and activate Fixed Number of Slots. Use post-fader slots for insert effects where you want the level to remain unchanged after the effect. Dithering and maximizers are typically used as post-fader insert effects for output busses, for example. NOTE If you want to use an effect with identical settings on several channels, set up a group channel and apply your effect as a single insert for this group.
Audio Effects Insert Effects ● Locate the output channel and click Edit Channel Settings to edit the output bus. The Channel Settings window for the selected channel opens. 3. In the Inserts section, click the first insert slot on the Inserts tab, and select an effect from the selector. RESULT The selected insert effect is added to the bus and activated. The effect control panel is opened.
Audio Effects Insert Effects RELATED LINKS Add Track Dialog – Group Channel on page 141 Copying Insert Effects You can add insert effects to audio channels by copying them from other audio channels or from other slots of the same audio channel. PREREQUISITE You have added at least one insert effect to an audio channel. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > MixConsole. 2. In the Inserts rack, locate the insert effect that you want to copy. 3. Hold down Alt, and drag the insert effect on an insert slot.
Audio Effects Insert Effects RESULT The effect is deactivated and all processing is terminated, but the effect is still loaded. Bypassing Insert Effects If you want to listen to the track without having it processed by a particular effect, but do not want to remove this effect completely from the insert slot, you can bypass it. A bypassed effect is still processing in the background. This allows for crackle-free comparison of the original and the processed signal.
Audio Effects Insert Effects Freezing Insert Effects Freezing an audio track and its insert effects allows you to reduce processor power. However, frozen tracks are locked for editing. You cannot edit, remove, or add insert effects for the frozen track. PREREQUISITE You have made all settings for the track and you are sure that you do not need to edit it anymore. PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector for the audio track that you want to freeze, click Freeze Audio Channel. 2.
Audio Effects Insert Effects Routing Insert Effects through Specific Audio Channels If you insert a stereo insert effect on a multichannel track, the first speaker channels of the track are routed through the available effect channels. The other channels remain unprocessed. However, you can route the effect through different speaker channels. PROCEDURE 1. In the track list, click Edit Channel Settings to open the Channel Settings window for the track on which the effect is inserted. 2.
Audio Effects Insert Effects The Routing Editor shows the channels in the current configuration, with signals passing from top to bottom. 1 Outputs The lower squares represent the outputs from the effect plug-in. 2 Effect plug-in The field in the middle represents the effect plug-in. 3 Inputs The upper squares represent the inputs to the effect plug-in. 4 Connections The lines represent the connections. 5 Input channel assignment These buttons allow you to assign the input channels.
Audio Effects VST Effect Selector Broken Connection The audio on the speaker channel is not sent to the output. Cross Connection The audio on the specific channels is processed by the effect and output on other channels. In this example, the audio on the Ls-Rs channels is output on the L-R channels. Since the L-R channels are bypassed, the final L-R output contains both the original L-R signals and the processed Ls-Rs signals.
Audio Effects Send Effects Send Effects Send effects are outside the signal path of an audio channel. The audio data that is to be processed must be sent to the effect. ● You can select an FX channel track as routing destination for a send. ● You can route different sends to different FX channels. ● You can control the amount of signals sent to the FX channel by adjusting the effect send level. To do this, you must create FX channel tracks.
Audio Effects Send Effects 4. Open the Configuration pop-up menu, and select a channel configuration for the FX channel track. 5. Open the Folder Setup pop-up menu, and select if you want to create FX channel tracks inside or outside a dedicated folder. 6. Click Add Track. RESULT The FX channel track is added to the track list and the selected effect is loaded into the first available insert effect slot of the FX channel.
Audio Effects Send Effects RESULT The selected effect is added as an insert effect to the FX channel track. Routing Audio Channels to FX Channels If you route an audio channel send to an FX channel, the audio is routed through the insert effects that you have set up for the FX channel. PROCEDURE 1. Select the audio track. 2. In the track list, click Edit Channel Settings to open the Channel Settings window. 3.
Audio Effects Send Effects The audio channel signal is sent to the FX channel before the audio channel volume fader. ● Post-fader sends The audio channel signal is sent to the FX channel after the audio channel volume fader. ● To move a send to pre-fader position, open the Channel Settings window for the audio channel, right-click a send and select Move to Pre-Fader. The Pre-/Post-Fader button indicates that the send is in pre-fader position.
Audio Effects Send Effects The send panners will then follow the pan for the channel, making the stereo imaging as clear and true as possible. NOTE In the Preferences dialog (VST page), you can set this as a default behavior for all channels. 5. Click and drag the pan control for the send. NOTE You can reset the pan control to the center position by Ctrl/Cmd-clicking on the pan control. RELATED LINKS Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) on page 653 Setting the Level for the Sends PROCEDURE 1.
Audio Effects Side-Chain Input This determines how much of the signal from the audio channel is routed to the FX channel. RESULT The effect level is adjusted according to your settings. NOTE To determine how much of the signal from the FX channel is sent to the output bus, open the Channel Settings window for the FX channel track and adjust the effect return level. Side-Chain Input Many VST 3 effects feature a side-chain input.
Audio Effects Side-Chain Input 2. Select Project > Duplicate Tracks. The events on the duplicated track are only used to reduce the volume of the effect that is added to the original track. 3. Select the original track. 4. In the Inspector, open the Inserts section and select Delay > PingPongDelay, for example. 5. On the effect control panel, make your effect settings, and click Activate Side-Chain. 6. Click Set Up Side-Chain Inputs. 7.
Audio Effects Side-Chain Input 4. On the effect control panel, make your effect settings, and click Activate Side-Chain. 5. On the effect control panel, click Set Up Side-Chain Inputs. 6. Click Add Side-Chain Input, and select the bass drum track from the selector. 7. Optional: Adjust the send level in the Level value field. RESULT You have connected the bass drum track side-chain to the Compressor on the destination track. The bass drum signal triggers the Compressor on the bass guitar track.
Audio Effects Dither Effects Dither Effects Dither effects allow you to control the noise that is produced by quantization errors that can occur when you mix down to a lower bit depth. Dithering adds a special kind of noise at an extremely low level to minimize the effect of quantization errors. This is hardly noticeable and preferable to the distortion that otherwise occurs. Applying Dither Effects PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > MixConsole. 2. Open the Rack Settings and activate Fixed Number of Slots.
Audio Effects Effect Control Panel 1 Activate Effect Activates/Deactivates the effect. 2 Bypass Effect Allows you to bypass the effect. 3 Read Automation/Write Automation Allows you to read/write automation for the effect parameter settings. 4 Switch between A/B Settings Switches to setting B when setting A is active, and to setting A when setting B is active. 5 Copy A to B Copies the effect parameters of effect setting A to effect setting B.
Audio Effects Effect Control Panel Fine-Tuning Effect Settings You can take your effect parameter settings as a starting point for further fine-tuning and then compare the new settings with the original settings. PREREQUISITE You have adjusted the parameters for an effect. PROCEDURE 1. On the control panel for the effect, click Switch between A/B Settings. This copies the initial parameter setting A to setting B. 2. Fine-tune the effect parameters. These parameter settings are now saved as setting B.
Audio Effects Effect Presets NOTE This also closes VST instrument control panels. RESULT The control panels are closed. RELATED LINKS Effect Control Panel on page 456 Effect Presets Effect presets store the parameter settings of an effect. The included effects come with a number of presets that you can load, adjust, and save. The following effect preset types are available: ● VST presets for a plug-in. These are plug-in parameter settings for a specific effect.
Audio Effects Effect Presets Loading Presets for Effects Most VST effect plug-ins come with a number of useful presets that you can instantly select. PREREQUISITE You have loaded an effect, either as a channel insert or into an FX channel, and the effect control panel is open. PROCEDURE 1. Click the preset browser field at the top of the control panel. 2. In the Results section, select a preset from the list. 3. Double-click to load the preset that you want to apply. RESULT The preset is loaded.
Audio Effects Effect Presets 2. Select Save Preset. The Save Preset dialog opens. 3. In the New Preset section, enter a name for the new preset. 4. Optional: Click New Folder to add a subfolder inside the effect preset folder. 5. Optional: Click Show Attribute Inspector in the bottom left corner of the dialog and define attributes for the preset. 6. Click OK. RESULT The effect preset is saved.
Audio Effects Effect Presets Saving Insert Presets You can save the inserts of the inserts effect rack for a channel as an inserts preset, together with all parameter settings. Insert presets can be applied to audio, instrument, FX channel, or group tracks. PREREQUISITE You have loaded a combination of insert effects and the effect parameters are set up for each effect. PROCEDURE 1. Select the track. 2. In the Inspector, open the Inserts section. 3.
Audio Effects System Component Information Window 5. Double-click to apply the preset and close the pane. RESULT The effects of the insert effect preset are loaded and any plug-ins that were previously loaded for the track are removed. Loading Insert Effect Settings from Track Presets You can extract the effects that are used in a track preset and load them into your inserts rack. PROCEDURE 1. Select the track to which you want to apply the new preset. 2. In the Inspector, open the Inserts section.
Audio Effects System Component Information Window Update (only available for MIDI Plug-ins) Re-scans the designated plug-in folders for updated system component information. The following columns are available: Active Allows you to activate or deactivate a plug-in. Instances The number of plug-in instances that are used in Cubase. Name The name of the plug-in. Vendor The manufacturer of the plug-in. File The name of the plug-in, including its file name extension.
Audio Effects System Component Information Window NOTE A plug-in may be in use even if it is not activated in the left column. The left column only determines whether or not the plug-in is visible on the effect selectors. Exporting System Component Information Files You can save system component information as an XML file, for example, for archiving purposes or troubleshooting. ● The system component information file contains information on the installed/available plug-ins, their version, vendor, etc.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing allows you to instantly add plug-in effects (Cubase Pro only) and audio processes to the selected audio events, clips, or ranges, without destructing the original audio. Applying offline effects is common practice in dialogue editing and sound design. Offline processing has several advantages over applying real-time mixer effects: ● The workflow is clip-based. This allows you to apply different effects to events on the same track.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Workflow Direct Offline Processing Workflow on page 467 Direct Offline Processing Window on page 467 Direct Offline Processing Workflow You can perform offline processing operations in the Direct Offline Processing window. The window always shows the processing of the selected audio. For the Direct Offline Processing window, the following applies: ● Only one instance of the window can be open.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window ● Press F7. ● On the Project window toolbar, click Open Direct Offline Processing Window. ● Select Audio > Processes, and from the submenu, select a process. NOTE Processes without adjustable parameter settings, for example, Silence, do not open the Direct Offline Processing window.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window ● 4 Cubase Pro only: The effect parameters for plug-ins are described in the separate document Plug-in Reference. Toolbar Allows you to add audio processing, to audition the audio with the current edits, and to make global settings for offline processing.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window NOTE The Auto Apply function for instant rendering is suited for most workflows. However, if you work with long events or if you use plug-ins that have a learning function, you might want to deactivate it. Left Divider Left Divider Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window NOTE This setting is saved globally. RELATED LINKS Auto Apply (Cubase Pro only) on page 472 Process Range Extension on page 475 Tail (Cubase Pro only) on page 475 Applying Processing You can add processing to one or multiple events, clips, or ranges in the Direct Offline Processing window. This includes plug-in effects (Cubase Pro only), audio processes, and Sample Editor operations, such as Cut, Paste, Delete, and using the Draw tool.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window Applying Processing to Multiple Events Direct Offline Processing allows you to add plug-in effects (Cubase Pro only) or built-in audio processes to multiple events at once. You can also modify or delete processing on multiple events simultaneously. ● To apply plug-ins (Cubase Pro only) or audio processes to multiple events at once, select the audio and add, modify, or delete the processing.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window Noise reduction is not applied at this point but the plug-in keeps the parameter settings for the learned noise spectrum. 9. Select the whole event. 10. In the Direct Offline Processing window, add the noise reduction plug-in and click Apply. Noise reduction is applied with the current parameter settings. RESULT Noise reduction is applied to the whole event.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window PROCEDURE 1. Select one or multiple events. 2. In the Direct Offline Processing window, click a favorite. RESULT The corresponding plug-in, audio process, or process batch is instantly applied to the audio.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window RELATED LINKS Auto Apply (Cubase Pro only) on page 472 Saving Insert Presets on page 462 Track Presets on page 198 Process Range Extension You can extend the process range over the left and right borders of the audio event. This setting allows you to enlarge the event even after applying the processing. ● To extend the process range, click Extend Process Range in ms on the Direct Offline Processing toolbar and specify a value in milliseconds.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window NOTE In the Project window or in the Audio Part Editor, processed events are indicated by a waveform symbol in the upper right corner. ● Select the processed clip in the Pool. NOTE In the Pool, processed clips are indicated by a waveform symbol in the Status column. ● Select the processed range in the Sample Editor. 2. Select Audio > Direct Offline Processing. 3. In the process list, select the process that you want to edit by clicking on it.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window NOTE ● If you activate/deactivate Bypass Process, the complete process chain is recalculated. Depending on the length of the audio and number of processes, this may take some time. In the process list, you get a visual feedback while a process is running. ● The bypass status is saved with the project.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes ● The process list is emptied. ● The event or clip is no longer marked as offline-processed by a waveform symbol. Built-In Audio Processes Cubase provides several built-in audio processes that can be used for Direct Offline Processing. Envelope Envelope allows you to apply a volume envelope to the selected audio.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes Curve Kind buttons Determine whether the corresponding envelope uses Spline Interpolation, Damped Spline Interpolation, or Linear Interpolation. Fade display Shows the shape of the fade curve. The resulting waveform shape is shown in a dark tone, with the current waveform shape in a light tone. ● To add points, click the curve. ● To change the curve shape, click and drag existing points. ● To remove a point from the curve, drag it outside the display.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes Normalize Normalize allows you to raise the level of audio that was recorded at too low an input level. Normalize Allows you to set a maximum level for the audio, between -50 dB and 0 dB. From this maximum level, the current maximum level of the selected audio is subtracted, and the gain is raised or lowered by the resulting amount. Phase Reverse Phase Reverse allows you to reverse the phase of the selected audio.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes Keyboard display Shows a graphic overview of the transposition where the root note is indicated in red and the transposed key is indicated in blue. NOTE The indicated root note has nothing to do with the key or pitch of the original audio, it just provides a way to display transpose intervals. ● To change the root note, use the settings in the Pitch Shift Base section, or hold Alt, and click the keyboard display.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes RELATED LINKS Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms on page 488 Envelope-Based Pitch Shift On the Envelope tab, you can specify an envelope curve as a base for the pitch shift. Curve Kind buttons Determine whether the corresponding envelope uses Spline Interpolation, Damped Spline Interpolation, or Linear Interpolation. Envelope display Shows the shape of the envelope curve over the waveform image of the audio selected for processing.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes Algorithm Settings Time Correction Activate this option to shift the pitch without affecting the length of the audio. If this is deactivated, raising the pitch shortens the audio section and vice versa, much like changing the playback speed on a tape recorder. MPEX 4 Preset Allows you to select an MPEX 4 algorithm. RELATED LINKS MPEX on page 489 Remove DC Offset Option Remove DC Offset allows you to remove any DC offset in the audio selection.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes Reverse Reverse allows you to reverse the audio selection so that it sounds as if you play back a tape backwards. There are no adjustable parameters for this audio process. Silence Silence allows you to replace the selection with silence. There are no adjustable parameters for this audio process. Stereo Flip Stereo Flip allows you to manipulate the left and right channels of stereo audio selections.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes Define Bars You can set the length of the selected audio and the time signature in this section. Bars Allows you to set the length of the selected audio in bars. Beats Allows you to set the length of the selected audio in beats. Signature Allows you to set the time signature. Original Length This section contains information and settings regarding the audio that is selected for processing.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Key Commands Time Stretch Ratio Allows you to set the amount of time stretch as a percentage of the original length. If you use the settings in the Resulting Length section to specify the amount of time stretch, this value changes automatically. RELATED LINKS Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms on page 488 Direct Offline Processing Key Commands You can apply offline processing by using key commands.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Key Commands Option Key command Delete selected item from process list Delete Select all items in process list Ctrl/Cmd-A Cut selected items from process list Ctrl/Cmd-X Copy selected items in process list Ctrl/Cmd-C Paste items to process list Ctrl/Cmd-V Undo Ctrl/Cmd-Z To define key commands for further Direct Offline Processing operations, and for directly adding particular plug-in effects (Cubase Pro only) and audio processes, use the Ke
Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms In Cubase, time-stretching and pitch-shifting algorithms are used for offline processes, in the Sample Editor, or for the Flattening Realtime Processing function. Depending on the feature, élastique, MPEX, or Standard algorithm presets are available.
Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms MPEX MPEX MPEX is an alternative high-quality algorithm. You can choose between the following quality settings: MPEX – Preview Quality For preview purposes. MPEX – Mix Fast A very fast mode for preview. This mode works best with composite music signals (mono or stereo material). MPEX – Solo Fast For single instruments (monophonic material) and voice. MPEX – Solo Musical Higher quality for single instruments (monophonic material) and voice.
Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms Limitations Standard – Mix For pitched material with a less homogenous sound character. This mode preserves the rhythm and minimizes the artifacts. Standard – Custom Allows you to set the time-stretching parameters manually. Standard – Solo For monophonic material like solo woodwind/brass instruments or solo vocals, monophonic synths or string instruments that do not play harmonies. This mode preserves the timbre of the audio.
Audio Functions Cubase offers particular functions for analyzing the audio in your project. RELATED LINKS Detect Silence Dialog on page 491 Spectrum Analyzer Window on page 494 Statistics Window on page 496 Detect Silence Dialog Detect Silence allows you to search for silent sections in events. You can split events and remove the silent parts from the project, or create regions corresponding to the non-silent sections.
Audio Functions Detect Silence Dialog The following options are available: Waveform display Allows you to zoom in on and out of the waveform by using the zoom slider to the right or by clicking in the waveform and moving the mouse up or down. You can scroll the waveform by using the scrollbar, or by using the mouse wheel. You can adjust the Open Threshold and Close Threshold values by moving the squares at the beginning and at the end of the audio file.
Audio Functions Detect Silence Dialog NOTE If your audio contains repeated short sounds, and this results in too many short open sections, try raising this value. Min. Time Closed Determines the minimum time that the function remains closed after the audio level has dropped below the Close Threshold value. Set this to a low value to make sure that you do not remove sounds. Pre-roll Causes the function to open slightly before the audio level exceeds the Open Threshold value.
Audio Functions Spectrum Analyzer Window RELATED LINKS Removing Silent Sections on page 494 Removing Silent Sections The Detect Silence dialog allows you to detect and remove silent sections of your audio. PROCEDURE 1. Select one or multiple audio events with silent sections in the Project window. 2. Select Audio > Advanced > Detect Silence. 3. In the Detect Silence dialog, make your settings. 4. Click Compute to analyze the audio.
Audio Functions Spectrum Analyzer Window Frequency display Shows the frequency graphs for the analyzed audio. If you move the mouse pointer over a certain position, the channel, frequency, note, and level at that position are shown in the value field at the top of the display. Channel selector For multichannel audio, this pop-up menu allows you to select which channels are shown in the frequency display. Zoom slider Allows you to zoom in and out horizontally.
Audio Functions Statistics Window Comparing Level Values You can display the difference in level between two positions on the same or different graphs in the Spectrum Analyzer window. PROCEDURE 1. Move the mouse pointer to the first position and right-click to select it. 2. Move the mouse pointer to the second frequency position. RESULT The difference in level between the positions is displayed as value D in the value field.
Audio Functions Statistics Window The Statistics window shows the following information: Channel Shows the name of the analyzed channel. Min. Sample Value Shows the lowest sample value in dB. Max. Sample Value Shows the highest sample value in dB. Peak Amplitude Shows the largest amplitude in dB. True Peak Shows the maximum absolute level of the audio signal waveform in the continuous time domain. DC Offset Shows the amount of DC offset as a percentage and in dB.
Audio Functions Statistics Window Max. Momentary Loudness (Cubase Pro only) Shows the maximum value of all momentary loudness values, based on a time window of 400 ms. The measurement is not gated. Max. Short-Term Loudness (Cubase Pro only) Shows the maximum value of all short-term loudness values, based on a time window of 3 s. The measurement is not gated.
Sample Editor The Sample Editor provides an overview of the selected audio event. It allows you to view and edit audio by cutting and pasting, removing, or drawing audio data, and by processing audio. Editing is non-destructive so that you can undo modifications at any time. You can open the Sample Editor in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window. This is useful if you want to access the Sample Editor functions from within a fixed zone of the Project window.
Sample Editor The Sample Editor is divided into several sections: 1 Toolbar Contains tools for selecting, manipulating, and playing back audio. 2 Info Line Shows information about the audio. 3 Overview Shows an overview of the whole audio clip and indicates which part of the clip is shown in the waveform display. 4 Inspector Contains audio editing tools and functions. NOTE The Editor Inspector for the lower zone editor is shown in the left zone of the Project window.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Toolbar RELATED LINKS Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone on page 66 Opening the Editor Inspector on page 56 Sample Editor Toolbar on page 501 Info Line on page 505 Overview Line on page 506 Sample Editor Inspector on page 506 Ruler on page 509 Waveform Display on page 510 Regions List on page 516 Sample Editor Toolbar The toolbar contains tools for selecting, editing, and playing back audio.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Toolbar NOTE Use the Currently Edited Audio Event pop-up menu to select the audio event that you want to edit. Currently Edited Audio Event Lists all audio events that are opened in the Sample Editor, and allows you to activate an audio event for editing. Auto-Scroll Auto-Scroll Keeps the project cursor visible during playback. Select Auto-Scroll Settings Allows you to activate Page Scroll or Stationary Cursor and to activate Suspend Auto-Scroll When Editing.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Toolbar Scrub Allows you to locate positions. Time Warp (Cubase Pro only) Adjusts musical positions of events to time positions. Acoustic Feedback Acoustic Feedback (Cubase Pro only) Automatically plays back a VariAudio segment when you modify the pitch. Snap Snap to Zero Crossing Restricts editing to zero crossings, that is, positions where the amplitude is zero. Snap On/Off Restricts horizontal movement and positioning to the specific positions.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Toolbar Allows you to select a color scheme for VariAudio segments. This makes it easier to see which segments belong to which event when working with several audio events. Right Divider Right Divider Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown. Window Zone Controls Open in Separate Window This button is available in the lower zone editor. It opens the editor in a separate window. Open in Lower Zone This button is available in the editor window.
Sample Editor Info Line NOTE You can determine the speed and pitch of the playback by dragging faster or slower. Editing Audio Samples with the Draw Tool You can edit the audio clip at sample level with the Draw tool. This way, you can remove audio clicks manually, for example. PROCEDURE 1. On the audio waveform, locate the sample position that you want to edit and zoom in to the highest zoom level. 2. Select the Draw tool. 3.
Sample Editor Overview Line NOTE Initially, length and position values are displayed in the format specified in the Project Setup dialog. Overview Line The overview line displays the whole clip, and indicates which part of the clip is shown in the waveform display. ● To show or hide the overview line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activate or deactivate the Overview option.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Inspector RELATED LINKS Opening the Editor Inspector on page 56 Definition Section The Definition section allows you to adjust the audio grid and define the musical context of your audio. You can use the available functions to match an audio file or audio loop to the project tempo. ● To open the Definition section, click its tab in the Inspector. AudioWarp Section The AudioWarp section allows you to perform timing settings for your audio.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Inspector RELATED LINKS VariAudio Inspector Section on page 543 Hitpoints Section The Hitpoints section allows you to edit hitpoints to slice your audio. Here you can create groove quantize maps, markers, regions, events, and warp markers based on hitpoints. ● To open the Hitpoints section, click its tab in the Inspector. Range Section The Range section allows you to edit ranges and selections or create a sampler track from the selected range.
Sample Editor Ruler Start Shows the start position of the selection range. End Shows the end position of the selection range. Length Shows the length of the selection range. Zoom Opens a menu with the zoom functions for ranges. Create Sampler Track Allows you to create a sampler track from the range selection. Process Section The Process section regroups the most important audio editing commands from the Audio and Edit menus. ● To open the Process section, click its tab in the Inspector.
Sample Editor Waveform Display Waveform Display The waveform display shows the waveform image of the edited audio clip. 1 Level Scale Indicates the amplitude of the audio. 2 Level Scale options Allow you to select whether the level is shown as a percentage or in dB. 3 Ruler Shows the project tempo grid. 4 Audio waveform Shows the waveform image of the selected audio. 5 Half Level Axis To show the half level axis, open the audio waveform context menu and select Show Half Level Axis.
Sample Editor Waveform Display RESULT The vertical scale changes relative to the height of the Sample Editor. Zooming Horizontally You can zoom in the waveform horizontally. This allows you to zoom in or out on the time scale. PROCEDURE ● Drag the horizontal zoom slider to the right to zoom in or to the left to zoom out. RESULT The horizontal zoom setting is shown on the info line as samples per pixel. You can zoom in horizontally to a scale of less than one sample per pixel.
Sample Editor Range Editing Undo/Redo Zoom Allows you to undo/redo the last zoom operation. Range Editing In the Sample Editor you can edit selection ranges. This option is useful if you want to quickly edit or process a specific section in the audio waveform, or if you want to create a new event or clip. You can only select one range at a time. The selection is indicated in the Selection field on the Info Line. The Range section in the Inspector contains functions for working with regions.
Sample Editor Range Editing Select in Loop Selects the audio between the left and the right locator. Select Event Selects only the audio that is included in the edited event. Cubase Pro only: If the VariAudio section is open and you segmented the audio, all segments that start or end within the event boundaries are selected. Set Locators to Selection Range Sets the locators to encompass the current selection. This option is available if you have selected one or several events or made a selection range.
Sample Editor Range Editing Creating Events from Selection Ranges You can create a new event that contains only the selected range. PROCEDURE 1. Select a range. 2. Drag the selection range to an audio track in the Project window. RELATED LINKS Selecting a Range on page 512 Creating Clips from Selection Ranges You can create a new clip that contains only the selected range. PROCEDURE 1. Select a range. 2. Click the selected range and select Audio > Bounce Selection. 3.
Sample Editor Range Editing NOTE If you edit ranges of events that are shared copies, you are asked whether you want to create a new version of the clip. Select New Version if you want to edit the event, select Continue if all shared copies should be edited. The following options are available: Cut Cuts the selected range from the clip and saves it in the clipboard. The section to the right of the range is moved to the left to fill the gap. Copy Copies the selected range to the clipboard.
Sample Editor Regions List Regions List Regions are sections within an audio clip that allow you to mark important sections in the audio. You can add and edit regions for the selected audio clip in the regions zone. ● To show or hide the Regions, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activate or deactivate Regions. The following controls are available: 1 Region Start/Region End Shows the start and end of the region in the audio waveform.
Sample Editor Regions List A region is created, corresponding to the selected range. 3. Optional: Double-click the region name in the list and enter a new name. RESULT The region is added to the regions list. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Click the region in the regions list to instantly display it in the Sample Editor. RELATED LINKS Creating Regions on page 527 Creating Regions from Hitpoints You can create regions from hitpoints. This is useful to isolate specific sounds.
Sample Editor Snap Point 2. Above the regions list, click Remove Region. RESULT The region is removed from the regions list. Creating Audio Events from Regions You can create new audio events from regions using drag and drop. PREREQUISITE You have clicked Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activated Regions. You have created regions. PROCEDURE 1. Select the region in the regions list. 2. Drag the region to the desired position in the Project window. RESULT An event is created from the region.
Sample Editor Snap Point ● Clip Snap Point This is shown in the Sample Editor if you open a clip from the Pool. NOTE The clip snap point serves as a template for the event snap point. However, it is the event snap point that is taken into account when snapping. IMPORTANT When you set the grid start in the Definition section, the snap point is moved to the grid start.
Sample Editor Snap Point NOTE You can also adjust the snap point by setting the project cursor at the desired position and selecting Audio > Snap Point to Cursor.
Hitpoints Hitpoints mark musically relevant positions in audio files. Cubase can detect these positions and create hitpoints automatically by analyzing onsets and melodic changes of the audio. NOTE All hitpoint operations can be performed in the Sample Editor window and in the lower zone editor. When you add an audio file to your project by recording or by importing, Cubase automatically detects hitpoints.
Hitpoints Calculating Hitpoints NOTE If your audio file is very long, this may take a while. 2. Select the audio event in the Project window and make sure the zoom factor is high enough. RESULT The calculated hitpoints for the selected event are shown in the Project window. NOTE You can disable automatic hitpoint detection by deactivating Enable Automatic Hitpoint Detection in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page).
Hitpoints Calculating Hitpoints PROCEDURE 1. In the Hitpoints section in the Inspector, activate the Edit Hitpoints tool. 2. Move the mouse to the waveform display and click between two hitpoints. The mouse pointer changes to a speaker icon and the tooltip Play back Slice is shown. The slice is played back from the beginning to the end. 3. To disable a hitpoint that you do not need, press Shift and click on the line that represents the hitpoint.
Hitpoints Locating to Hitpoints in the Project Window 7. To make sure that a hitpoint is not accidentally filtered out, lock it by pointing at it and clicking. The tooltip Lock Hitpoint is shown. RESULT The hitpoints are edited according to your settings. NOTE To reset a hitpoint to its original state, press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt until the tooltip Enable/Unlock Hitpoints is shown and click.
Hitpoints Slices Slicing Audio Slicing audio is useful if you want to change tempo and timing of the audio without affecting its pitch and quality. PREREQUISITE The audio event is opened in the Sample Editor and the hitpoints are set at the correct positions. NOTE When slicing audio, all events referring to the edited clip are also replaced. PROCEDURE ● Perform one of the following actions: ● In the Hitpoints section in the Inspector, click Create Slices.
Hitpoints Slices Slices and the Project Tempo The project tempo affects how the sliced audio is played back. NOTE To ensure that the loop follows any further tempo changes, activate Musical Mode.
Hitpoints Creating a Groove Quantize Map Creating a Groove Quantize Map You can use hitpoints to create a groove quantize map. PREREQUISITE The audio event from which you want to extract the timing is opened in the Sample Editor, and the hitpoints are set at the correct positions. PROCEDURE ● In the Hitpoints section in the Inspector, click Create Groove. RESULT The groove is extracted from the audio event and automatically selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu on the Project window toolbar.
Hitpoints Creating Events Creating Events You can create events at hitpoint positions. PREREQUISITE The audio event from which you want to create events is opened in the Sample Editor, and the hitpoints are set at the correct positions. PROCEDURE ● In the Hitpoints section in the Inspector, click Create Events. RESULT Events are created between two hitpoint positions. Creating Warp Markers You can create warp markers at hitpoint positions. This allows you to quantize audio based on hitpoint positions.
Hitpoints Creating MIDI Notes AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Assign a VST instrument to the MIDI track, and select a sound to enrich the audio. Convert Hitpoints to MIDI Notes Dialog When creating MIDI notes from hitpoints, you can specify how hitpoints should be converted.
Tempo Matching Audio Cubase offers several functions that allow you to match the tempo of audio in your project. You can perform the following tempo matching operations in the Sample Editor window and in the lower zone editor: ● Stretch to Project Tempo Stretches the selected event to match the project tempo. ● Musical Mode Applies realtime time stretching to audio clips, so that they match the project tempo. ● Auto Adjust Extracts a definition grid from your audio.
Tempo Matching Audio Stretching Audio Events to the Project Tempo The algorithm preset affects warp changes in Musical Mode, FreeWarp, and Swing. Cubase Pro only: For the VariAudio warping and pitching features Standard – Solo is applied automatically. RELATED LINKS Algorithm Presets on page 530 Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms on page 488 Stretching Audio Events to the Project Tempo You can stretch audio loops to the project tempo. PROCEDURE 1.
Tempo Matching Audio Musical Mode Matching Audio to the Project Tempo You can use Musical Mode to adjust audio loops to the project tempo. Loops are short audio files that have a defined number of bars. PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Import > Audio File, and select an audio loop in the file dialog. 2. In the Project window, double-click the imported audio loop to open it in the Sample Editor. 3. Open the Definition section and verify the rulers.
Tempo Matching Audio Auto Adjust 3. Move the Swing fader to the right. RESULT This offsets the grid positions and creates a swing or shuffle feel. If you selected 1/2, every second position in the grid is offset. Auto Adjust The Auto Adjust function is useful if you do not know the tempo of your audio file, or if the beat is not straight. It allows you to extract a definition grid from your audio. After that, you can tempo match the file to the project tempo with the Musical Mode.
Tempo Matching Audio Manual Adjust RESULT The definition grid is calculated for the selected section. The snap point moves to the start of the selected range. The audio tempo definition ruler changes to reflect your edits, and bars and beats positions are marked with vertical lines. Manual Adjust The Manual Adjust function is useful if you need to manually modify the grid and tempo of your audio file.
Tempo Matching Audio Free Warp 7. In the lower part of the waveform, move the mouse pointer over the grid lines. The tooltip Set Bar Position (Move Following Bars) and a green vertical line are shown. 8. For incorrect bar positions, click and drag the green vertical line to the position of the first downbeat of the following bar and release the mouse button. This also moves the bars to the right. The area to the left remains unaffected. 9. Move the mouse pointer over the grid lines for single beats.
Tempo Matching Audio Free Warp A stretch factor higher than 1.0 indicates that the audio preceding the warp marker is stretched, a stretch factor lower than 1.0 indicates that the audio is compressed. NOTE The Free Warp tool snaps to hitpoint positions and warp markers. Correcting the Timing with the Free Warp Tool PROCEDURE 1. Double-click the audio clip or event in the Project window to open it in the Sample Editor. 2. On the toolbar, activate Snap to Zero Crossing.
Tempo Matching Audio Audio Alignment A tooltip is shown to indicate that you can drag to correct the warp marker position. RESULT The warp marker moves to the new position and the audio is stretched or compressed accordingly. Deleting Warp Markers PROCEDURE 1. In the AudioWarp section, activate Free Warp. 2. Hold down Alt and click the warp marker you want to delete. NOTE To delete several markers, draw a selection rectangle. RESULT The warp marker is removed from the waveform.
Tempo Matching Audio Audio Alignment The Prefer Time Shifting option is especially suited for audio that results from the same recording, for example, in case of a multiple microphone recording. It avoids time stretching if possible. However, if necessary, time stretching is still used. NOTE ● If time stretching is necessary, Audio Alignment uses the warping algorithm that is selected in the Sample Editor.
Tempo Matching Audio Audio Alignment Audio Alignment Settings Allow you to activate/deactivate options for analyzing and aligning. ● The Match Words option analyzes phonemes and syllables and allows for an exact word-to-word synchronization. This option provides best results if the wording on the aligned events is identical. ● The Prefer Time Shifting option is especially suited for aligning audio that results from the same recording, for example, in case of a multiple microphone recording.
Tempo Matching Audio Flattening Realtime Processing RESULT The audio of the target events is aligned with the reference event within the time range where the events overlap. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK To visualize the result of the alignment in the Sample Editor, select the reference and target events and activate Show All Selected Audio Events in the Sample Editor toolbar.
Tempo Matching Audio Unstretching Audio Files PROCEDURE 1. Select the audio event that you want to unstretch. 2. Select Audio > Realtime Processing > Unstretch Audio. RESULT All realtime time stretching is removed.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) The VariAudio features in Cubase allow you to edit pitch, and correct the timing and intonation of individual notes in monophonic vocal recordings. All VariAudio operations can be performed in the Sample Editor window and in the lower zone editor. Any modifications to the audio material can be undone. NOTE The VariAudio features are optimized for monophonic recordings of vocals. It may work well for other monophonic recordings, such as saxophone, as well.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) VariAudio Inspector Section VariAudio Inspector Section The VariAudio section allows you to edit individual notes of your audio file, change their pitch or timing, and to extract MIDI from your audio. Bypass VariAudio Changes Bypasses pitch, formant shift, and volume changes so that you can compare the changes to the original audio. Edit VariAudio Activates the audio analysis, splits the audio into segments that are shown in the waveform image, and enables VariAudio editing.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Smart Controls RELATED LINKS VariAudio Section (Cubase Pro only) on page 507 Smart Controls on page 544 Pitch Snap Mode on page 552 MIDI Input Modes on page 554 Quantizing Pitches on page 554 Straightening Pitch Curves on page 557 Formant Shifting on page 560 Showing MIDI Reference Tracks on page 559 Editing Volume on page 561 Functions Menu on page 561 Smart Controls Each segment has smart controls that allow you to change the start and end points of the segment and to perform
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Smart Controls This smart control is only shown if you select All in the Smart Controls pop-up menu in the Inspector. By default, the entire pitch curve is straightened. These smart controls allow you to set a range for Straighten Pitch Curve. Use this smart control for several selected segments to set the same range for all selected segments. 5 Warp Start/Correct Segment Start This smart control is shown by default. Allows you to warp the segment start.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Segmenting Monophonic Audio Segmenting Monophonic Audio To be able to edit the pitch and correct the timing of monophonic recordings, Cubase must analyze the audio and split it into segments. PROCEDURE 1. 2. In the Project window, double-click the monophonic vocal recording to open the Sample Editor. In the Sample Editor Inspector, click VariAudio to open the VariAudio section. A waveform image of the audio is shown. 3. Activate Edit VariAudio.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Segments and Gaps Segments and Gaps Cubase automatically analyzes the audio and splits it into segments. The following concepts are crucial to understand the segmentation: 1 Pitch Position The pitch position of the segments is displayed on the piano keyboard to the left of the waveform. If you move the mouse pointer over a segment, the pitch of that segment is also shown on the segment. Pitches represent the perceived fundamental frequency of the note.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Auditioning VariAudio Segment Colors Menu You can select a color scheme for VariAudio segments. If you work with several audio events, this makes it easier to see which segments belong to which event. The following options are available: Auto Segments that belong to the same voice get the same color. Event Segments get the same color as the corresponding event in the Project window. Pitch Segments get colors depending on their pitches.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Segment Editing Segment Editing Segment editing might be necessary if the original audio contains non-tonal portions of the analyzed audio, that is, signals or sections with unclear pitch information, such as consonants or effect sounds. Non-tonal portions of the analyzed audio might not be included in a segment. If this is the case, pitch changes, volume editing, formant shifting, or timing modifications affect only the tonal portions.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Segment Editing AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK If cutting the segment results in a wrong pitch, move the segment vertically. RELATED LINKS Segmenting Monophonic Audio on page 546 Smart Controls on page 544 Glueing Segments If a single sound is spread over multiple segments, you can glue these segments. PREREQUISITE You have opened the audio in the Sample Editor, and activated Edit VariAudio in the VariAudio section. PROCEDURE 1.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Pitch Changes RELATED LINKS Segmenting Monophonic Audio on page 546 Changing the Start and End Point of Segments If the start or end point of a segment does not match the associated audio, you can change it. PREREQUISITE You have opened the audio in the Sample Editor and activated Edit VariAudio in the VariAudio section. PROCEDURE 1. Select one or several segments. 2. On the Sample Editor toolbar, activate Audition to audition the segments. 3.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Pitch Changes To change the pitch of audio segments, you can use the VariAudio section in the Inspector, or the smart controls. RELATED LINKS VariAudio Inspector Section on page 543 Smart Controls on page 544 Pitch Snap Mode The Pitch Snap Mode defines how a segment snaps to a certain pitch. ● You can set the Pitch Snap Mode in the VariAudio section of the Inspector. The following modes are available: Absolute Segments snap to the next semitone.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Pitch Changes NOTE You can change the Pitch Snap Mode on the fly. Use Shift to enter Off mode, Ctrl/Cmd to enter Absolute mode, and Alt to enter Relative mode. RESULT The Solo algorithm is selected automatically and the segment pitch is raised or lowered according to your settings. NOTE The more the pitch deviates from the original pitch, the less likely it is that your audio sounds natural.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Pitch Changes ● Use the On-Screen Keyboard to change the pitch. NOTE The more the pitch deviates from the original pitch, the less likely it is that your audio sounds natural. You cannot choose pitches above C5 and below E0. RESULT The Solo algorithm is selected automatically, and the segment pitch is raised or lowered according to the note you play.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Pitch Changes NOTE If you hold down Shift and double-click a segment, all following segments of the same pitch are selected. 2. In the VariAudio section of the Inspector, move the Quantize Pitch slider to the right. NOTE You can also quantize the pitch by dragging the Quantize Pitch smart control in the middle of the bottom edge of the segment upwards or downwards. RESULT The Solo algorithm is selected automatically, and the segment pitch is quantized iteratively.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Pitch Changes ● Straightening the pitch curve This allows you to reduce the degree of fluctuation or vibrato for individual segments.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Pitch Changes ● To tilt the end of the curve, drag the smart control for Tilt in the upper right corner of the segment upwards or downwards. RESULT The Solo algorithm is selected automatically, and the pitch curve is tilted according to your settings. RELATED LINKS Smart Controls on page 544 Setting Tilt/Rotate Anchors on page 556 Rotating a Pitch Curve You can rotate the pitch curve to correct pitch deviations of individual segments.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Timing Modifications ● In the Inspector, move the Straighten Curve slider to the right. RESULT The Solo algorithm is selected automatically, and the pitch curves are straightened. RELATED LINKS Smart Controls on page 544 Straightening Ranges of Pitch Curves on page 558 Straightening Ranges of Pitch Curves You can restrict the straightening of pitch curves to specific ranges of segments.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Showing MIDI Reference Tracks PROCEDURE ● Do one of the following: ● Drag the smart control for Warp Start to the left or to the right. ● Drag the smart control for Warp End to the left or to the right. RESULT The Solo algorithm is selected automatically. The timing of the segment and the adjacent segments is changed according to your settings. Warp markers are shown below the ruler to indicate which portions of the audio are stretched.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Formant Shifting RESULT The events of the selected MIDI track are shown in the Sample Editor event display as lines. Their color adapts to the VariAudio Segment Colors setting. You can use the Pitch or the Chord Track option, for example, to associate the pitches of audio and MIDI. The MIDI reference track selection applies to all Sample Editors in a project. It is saved with the project. NOTE ● You cannot edit MIDI data that is shown from within the Sample Editor.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Editing Volume NOTE If Smart Controls is set to All, you can also shift the formant by dragging the smart control in the lower left corner of the segment upwards or downwards. RESULT The Solo algorithm is selected automatically, and the formant is shifted. RELATED LINKS Smart Controls on page 544 Editing Volume You can raise or lower the volume of the audio for a segment or mute it. PREREQUISITE ● The audio file is segmented and the segments are correct.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Functions Menu Flatten Realtime Processing Opens the Flatten Realtime Processing dialog that allows you to select an algorithm preset for the flattening of VariAudio and warp modifications. The entire audio event is taken into account. Reset Pitch Changes/Reset Pitch Changes for Selection Resets all segment pitches. If you select specific segments, only their pitches are reset. Reset Pitch Curve Changes/Reset Pitch Curve Changes for Selection Resets all pitch curves.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Functions Menu Extract MIDI Dialog The Extract MIDI dialog allows you to specify which audio data is used when creating a MIDI part with the Extract MIDI function. ● To open the Extract MIDI dialog, open the VariAudio section of the Sample Editor Inspector, activate Edit VariAudio in the VariAudio section, and in the Functions menu, click Extract MIDI.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Functions Menu NOTE This works only with a connected VST instrument that is compatible with Note Expression. Volume Mode Allows you to specify how volume information from the audio is extracted. The following options are available: Fixed Velocity Assigns the same velocity to all created MIDI notes. In the Velocity field you can specify a velocity value. Dynamic Velocity Assigns an individual velocity value to each created MIDI note according to the amplitude of the audio signal.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Harmony Voices for Audio Flattening Realtime Processing You can flatten VariAudio and AudioWarp modifications. This is useful if you want to reduce the CPU load, optimize the sound quality of the processing, or apply any offline processing. PROCEDURE 1. Optional: Select the segments that you want to flatten. If you do not select anything, all segments are flattened. 2. In the VariAudio section, open the Functions menu, and select Flatten Realtime Processing. 3.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Harmony Voices for Audio 5. Specify the number of voices that you want to create, enter a value for the vibrato reduction, and click OK. RESULT The audio event is analyzed and VariAudio segments are created automatically. A copy of the event with altered pitches is created for every voice and placed on a newly created track. NOTE ● If you added a chord track, the pitches of the resulting voices follow the soprano, alto, tenor, and bass voices from the chord track voicing.
Audio Part Editor The Audio Part Editor provides an overview of the selected audio parts. It allows you to view, audition and edit parts by cutting and pasting, crossfading, drawing level curves, or by processing parts. Editing is non-destructive so that you can undo modifications at any time. You can open the Audio Part Editor in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window.
Audio Part Editor The Audio Part Editor in the lower zone of the Project window: 1 Toolbar Contains tools for selecting, editing, and playing back audio parts. 2 Info Line Displays information on the audio parts. 3 Ruler Displays the timeline and the display format of the project.
Audio Part Editor Audio Part Editor Toolbar Opening the Editor Inspector on page 56 Ruler on page 51 Info Line on page 52 Audio Part Editor Toolbar on page 569 Audio Part Editor Toolbar The toolbar contains tools for selecting, editing, and playing back audio parts. ● To show or hide the toolbar elements, right-click the toolbar and activate or deactivate the elements. The following options are available: Info/Solo Solo Editor Solos the selected audio during playback.
Audio Part Editor Audio Part Editor Toolbar Loops the playback until you deactivate Audition. Audition Volume Allows you to adjust the volume. Tool Buttons Object Selection Selects audio parts. Range Selection Selects ranges. Zoom Zooms in. Hold Alt and click to zoom out. Erase Deletes audio parts. Split Splits audio parts. Mute Mutes audio parts. Lane Comping Assembles takes. Draw Draws a volume curve.
Audio Part Editor Audio Part Editor Toolbar Multiple Part Controls Show Part Borders Shows/Hides part borders for the active audio part, within the left and right locators. Edit Active Part Only Restricts editing operations to the active part. Currently Edited Part Lists all parts that were selected when you opened the editor, and allows you to activate a part. Nudge Palette Trim Start Left Increases the length of the selected element by moving its start to the left.
Audio Part Editor Audio Part Editor Toolbar Grid Grid Type Allows you to select a grid type. The options depend on the display format that is selected for the ruler. If you select Seconds as ruler format, time-based grid options are available. If you select Bars+Beats as ruler format, musical grid options are available. Quantize Iterative Quantize On/Off Activates/Deactivates iterative quantize. AudioWarp Quantize On/Off Activates/Deactivates AudioWarp quantize.
Audio Part Editor Info Line Window Zone Controls Open in Separate Window This button is available in the lower zone editor. It opens the editor in a separate window. Open in Lower Zone This button is available in the editor window. It opens the editor in the lower zone of the Project window. Show/Hide Info Allows you to activate/deactivate the info line. Set up Toolbar Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which toolbar elements are visible.
Audio Part Editor Lanes Lanes Lanes can make it easier to work with several audio events in a part. Moving some of the events to another lane can make selecting and editing much easier. If Snap is deactivated and you want to move an event to another lane without accidentally moving it horizontally, press Ctrl/Cmd while dragging it up or down. RELATED LINKS Track Handling on page 170 Operations All operations can be performed in the Audio Part Editor window and in the lower zone editor.
Audio Part Editor Operations 2. ● To play back the section between the first and last selected event, select the events with the Object Selection tool. ● To play back a range, select a range with the Range Selection tool. ● To start playback from the current cursor position, set the project cursor to that position. On the toolbar, click Audition. NOTE If you activate Audition Loop, playback continues until you deactivate Audition.
Audio Part Editor Operations 2. Ctrl/Cmd-click in the ruler to set the start and Alt-click to set the end of the loop. NOTE You can also edit the loop start and end positions numerically in the fields next to the Loop button. RESULT The loop is indicated in blue in the ruler. NOTE The events are looped as long as the Loop button is activated and the Audio Part Editor is open.
Audio Part Editor Operations ● It is possible to cycle between parts, making them active using key commands. In the Key Commands dialog, there are two functions in the Edit category: Activate Next Part and Activate Previous Part. If you assign key commands to these, you can use them to cycle between parts.
Sampler Tracks The sampler track features allow you to chromatically play back any audio from your audio sample library via MIDI. You can create and edit new sounds based on specific samples, and integrate them into an existing project. The sampler track features include: ● A sampler track that allows you to control the playback of the audio sample that is loaded in Sampler Control. ● Sampler Control that allows you to load and edit audio samples.
Sampler Tracks Loading MIDI Parts into Sampler Control Loading MIDI Parts into Sampler Control You can load MIDI parts from instrument tracks or MIDI tracks into Sampler Control by dragging. NOTE For this to work, the instrument track or the MIDI track must be routed to a VST instrument. ● To load a MIDI part, drag it from the MediaBay, the Project window event display, or the File Explorer/macOS Finder and drop it in Sampler Control. IMPORTANT If Sampler Control already contains MIDI, it is overwritten.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Sampler Control If the sampler track is selected, Sampler Control is available in the lower zone of the Project window. Sampler Control allows you to view, edit, and play back samples or specific sections of the samples. 1 Toolbar Contains tools that allow you to select and edit the audio sample, to organize track presets, and to transfer the sample with its settings to an instrument.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Allows you to write track automation. Switch between A/B Settings Allows you to switch between different parameter settings. Event Received Indicator This LED indicates incoming MIDI messages via the selected MIDI input. The LED lights up on receiving note-on and controller messages. This way, you can check if Cubase and your MIDI keyboard are connected to the same MIDI device input.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control ● If this is set to Continuous, the sample is played in a continuous loop. ● If this is set to Alternate, the sample is played back in a loop that alternates forward and backward. ● If this is set to Once, the sample is looped once. ● If this is set to Until Release, the sample is looped repeatedly until you release the key on the keyboard. ● If this is set to Alternate Until Release, the loop alternates forward and backward for as long as you hold the key.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control RELATED LINKS Setting the Root Key Manually on page 589 Setting up Loops for Audio Samples on page 589 Transferring Samples from Sampler Control to VST Instruments on page 591 Waveform Display The waveform display shows the waveform of your audio sample. It allows you to define the start and end of the audio sample, of the loop, and of the fade-in/-out. Sample Start Defines the sample start. On playback, all audio before the sample start is ignored.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Sound Parameter Section In the sound parameter section you can make settings for time stretching and formant shifting (AudioWarp section), tuning and pitch modulation (Pitch section), filtering (Filter section), or level and panorama (Amp section). AudioWarp Section In the AudioWarp section, you can apply time stretching and formant shifting to your samples. ● To activate the AudioWarp settings, click Activate/Deactivate AudioWarp.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control NOTE This parameter is only available in Solo and in Music mode. In Music mode, the lower limit of the playback speed adjustment is 12.5 %. Values below this limit have no further effect. Formant Allows you to adjust formant shifting. Formant shifting allows you to avoid so-called Mickey Mouse effects when pitch-shifting a sample. This is especially useful with samples of human voices or acoustic instruments. This parameter is only available in Solo mode.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Drive Determines the level of the input signal and thus the amount of saturation. Show/Hide Filter Envelope Shows the filter envelope editor. RELATED LINKS Envelope Editors on page 586 Amp Section In the Amp section, you can set the volume and the pan of the sample. The amplifier envelope allows you to shape the volume over time. Volume Sets the level of the sample. Pan Sets the position of the sample in the stereo panorama.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Envelope display Shows the envelope curve. You can adjust it by adding, moving, and deleting nodes. The nodes for attack (A), sustain (S), and release (R) are always shown and cannot be deleted. Next to the release node, the release time of the envelope is shown. Mode Determines how the envelope is played back when it is triggered. ● Select Sustain to play the envelope from the first node to the sustain node. The sustain level is held for as long as you play the note.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Adding and Removing Nodes You can add up to 128 nodes to an envelope curve. ● To add a node, double-click at the position where you want to add the node. ● To remove a node, double-click it. ● To delete several selected nodes, press Delete or Backspace. NOTE ● You cannot remove the attack (A), the sustain (S), or the release node (R). ● All nodes added after the sustain node always affect the release phase of the envelope.
Sampler Tracks Sample Editing and Playback Functions Sample Editing and Playback Functions All sample editing in Sampler Control is non-destructive. Setting Sample Start and End By setting the sample start and end, you can define what range of the sample is played back when you press a key on your MIDI keyboard. PROCEDURE 1. Drag the Set Sample Start handle to the right to adjust the sample start point. 2. Drag the Set Sample End handle to the left to adjust the sample end point.
Sampler Tracks Sample Editing and Playback Functions Setting the Key Range You can determine the key range for the sample. This is useful for samples that only sound good within a certain key range. PROCEDURE ● In the keyboard section, adjust the key range by dragging the range handles above the keyboard display. RESULT Only keys within the determined key range play a sound when triggered.
Sampler Tracks Transferring Samples from Sampler Control to VST Instruments Transferring Samples from Sampler Control to VST Instruments You can transfer audio samples with all settings that you have made in Sampler Control to specific Steinberg VST instruments. Transferring audio samples from Sampler Control to a VST instrument creates a new instrument track in the track list. This new track is added below the sampler track. The audio sample and all its settings are loaded in the VST instrument.
Pool Every time that you record on an audio track, a file is created on your hard disk. A reference to this file, a clip, is added to the Pool. The following rules apply to the Pool: ● All audio and video clips that belong to a project are listed in the Pool. ● Every project has a separate Pool. The way the Pool displays folders and their contents is similar to the way the File Explorer/macOS Finder displays folders and file lists.
Pool Pool Window The content of the Pool is divided into the following folders: Audio folder Contains all audio clips and regions that are in the project. If the project contains one or more sampler tracks, a dedicated Sampler Track subfolder is created in the Audio folder. This subfolder contains all clips of samples that you have loaded into Sampler Control. Video folder Contains all video clips that are in the project.
Pool Pool Window Pool Window Columns The Pool window columns display information about the clips and regions. The following columns are available: Media Contains the Audio, Video, and Trash folders. If the folders are opened, the clip or region names are shown and can be edited. Used Displays how many times a clip is used in the project. If there is no entry in this column, the corresponding clip is not used. Status Displays various icons that relate to the current Pool and clip status.
Pool Pool Window Tempo Displays the tempo of audio files if available. If no tempo has been specified, the column displays “???”. Sign. Displays the time signature, for example, “4/4”. Key Displays the root key if one has been specified for the file. Algorithm Displays the algorithm preset that is used if the audio file is processed. ● To change the default preset, click the preset name and select another preset from the pop-up menu.
Pool Pool Window Audition Plays back the selected audio. Audition Loop Loops the playback until you deactivate Audition. Audition Volume Allows you to adjust the volume. View/Attributes Allows you to activate/deactivate the attributes that are displayed in the Pool window. +/- All Opens/Closes all folders. Import Allows you to import media files to the Pool. Search Allows you to search the Pool and connected disks for media files. Project Folder Displays the path to the folder of the active project.
Pool Working with the Pool Working with the Pool NOTE Most of the Pool-related main menu functions are also available on the Pool context menu. Renaming Clips or Regions in the Pool IMPORTANT Renaming clips or regions in the Pool also renames the referenced files on disk. It is recommended to rename clips or regions in the Pool. Otherwise, the reference from the clip to the file may get lost. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select a clip or region, and click the existing name. 2.
Pool Working with the Pool NOTE The clips are positioned so that their snap points are aligned with the selected insert position. If you want to adjust the snap point before inserting a clip, double-click a clip to open the Sample Editor. Here, you can adjust the snap position and then perform the insert options. RESULT The clip is inserted on the selected track or on a new audio track. If several tracks are selected, the clip will be inserted on the first selected track.
Pool Working with the Pool Deleting Files from the Hard Disk You can delete clips from the Pool by deleting the corresponding file from the hard disk. To delete a file permanently from the hard disk, you must first move the corresponding clips to the Trash folder in the Pool. IMPORTANT Make sure that the audio files that you want to delete are not used in other projects. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select the clips that you want to delete from the hard disk, and select Edit > Delete.
Pool Working with the Pool Locating Events and Clips You can quickly display to which clips the selected events belong and to which events the selected clips belong. Locating Events via Clips in the Pool You can find out which events in the project refer to a particular clip in the Pool. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select one or more clips. 2. Select Media > Select in Project. RESULT All events that refer to the selected clips are now selected in the Project window.
Pool Working with the Pool NOTE Folders that you have recently selected using the Select Search Path function appear on the pop-up menu, so that you can quickly select them again. 4. Click Search. The search is started and Search is labeled Stop. ● To cancel the search, click Stop. When the search is finished, the files that are found are listed on the right. 5. ● To audition a file, select it in the list and use the playback controls to the left (Play, Stop, Pause, and Loop).
Pool Working with the Pool Find Media Window The Find Media window is a stand-alone window that offers the same functionality as the Search option in the Pool. ● To open the Find Media window, select Media > Search Media. ● To insert a clip or region into the project from the Find Media window, select it in the list, select Media > Insert into Project, and select one of the insert options.
Pool Working with the Pool PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, locate the clips for which files are missing. 2. Check the Status column. If the status of the files is “Reconstructible”, the files can be reconstructed by Cubase. 3. Select the reconstructible clips and select Media > Reconstruct. RESULT The editing is performed and the edit files are recreated. Removing Missing Files from the Pool If the Pool contains audio files that cannot be found or reconstructed, you may want to remove these.
Pool Working with the Pool Opening Clips in the Sample Editor The Sample Editor allows you to perform detailed editing on the clip. ● To open a clip in the Sample Editor, double-click a clip waveform icon or a clip name in the Media column. ● To open a certain region of a clip in the Sample Editor, double-click a region in the Pool. You can use this to set a snap point for a clip, for example.
Pool Working with the Pool Importing Audio CDs into the Pool You can import tracks or sections of tracks from an audio CD directly into the Pool. This opens a dialog in which you can specify which tracks are copied from the CD, converted to audio files, and added to the Pool. ● To import an audio CD to the Pool, select Media > Import Audio CD.
Pool Working with the Pool Exporting Regions as Audio Files If you have created regions within an audio clip, these can be exported as separate audio files. If you have two clips that refer to the same audio file, you can create a separate audio file for each clip. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select the region that you want to export. 2. Select Audio > Bounce Selection. 3. Select the folder in which you want the new file to be created and click OK. 4.
Pool Working with the Pool Organizing Clips and Folders If you accumulate a large number of clips in the Pool, it can be difficult to quickly find specific items. Organizing clips in new subfolders with names that reflect the content can be a solution. For example, you could put all sound effects in one folder, all lead vocals in another, etc. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select the folder for which you want to create a subfolder. NOTE You cannot put audio clips in a video folder and vice versa. 2.
Pool Working with the Pool IMPORTANT This operation permanently changes the selected audio files in the Pool. This cannot be undone. If you only want to create the minimized audio files as a copy, leaving the original project untouched, you can use the Back up Project option. NOTE Minimizing files clears the entire edit history. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select the files that you want to minimize. 2. Select Media > Minimize File. 3. Click Minimize.
Pool Working with the Pool You must specify a project folder for the new library in which media files will be stored. The library appears as a separate Pool window. ● To open a library, select File > Open Library. ● To save a library, select File > Save Library. Converting Files In the Pool, you can convert files to another format. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select the files that you want to convert. 2. Select Media > Convert Files. 3.
Pool Working with the Pool refer to the converted file, but want to keep the original file on disk, for example, if the file is used in other projects. Conforming Files You can align the file attributes with the project attributes. This is useful if the attributes of the selected files are different from the project attributes. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select the clips that you want to conform. 2. Select Media > Conform Files. 3.
MediaBay and Media Rack You can manage media files on your computer as well as presets from multiple sources from within the MediaBay or the Media rack. The MediaBay window offers advanced functions for working with media files and managing database items. To show the media files on your computer in the MediaBay, you must scan the folders or volumes that contain the files so that these are added to the database.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone The following tiles are available: VST Instruments Shows VST instruments and instrument presets. VST Effects Shows VST effects and effect presets. Loops & Samples Shows audio loops, MIDI loops, or instrument sounds ordered by content set. Presets Shows track presets, strip presets, pattern banks, FX chain presets, and VST FX presets.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone RELATED LINKS Loading Instrument Presets on page 647 Loading Loops and Samples on page 646 Loading Track Presets on page 647 Loading Effect Plug-In Presets on page 648 Loading FX Chain Presets on page 648 Loading Strip Presets on page 648 Loading Pattern Banks on page 649 Adding Favorites Using the Favorites Page on page 620 Adding Favorites Using the File Browser Page on page 621 Favorites Page The Favorites page allows you to add your own favorite folders
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone The following options are available: 1 Media Rack navigation controls Allow you to navigate to specific folders and filter the Results list. 2 Attribute filter Allows you to view and edit some of the standard file attributes found in your media files. 3 Results list Shows all media files that are found in the selected folder and allows you to select a media file. 4 Previewer Allows you to preview the selected media file.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone The following options are available: 1 Media Rack navigation controls Allow you to navigate to specific folders and filter the Results list. 2 Add Favorite Allows you to add the selected folder as a favorite folder. 3 Back/Forward/Up Up navigates to the parent folder. Back navigates to the previously used folder. Forward navigates to the most recent folder. 4 File browser Allows you to browse selected folders.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone VST Instruments Page The VST Instruments page shows all VST instruments of the selected collection. ● To open the VST Instruments page, go to the Home page of the Media rack, and click VST Instruments. The following options are available: 1 Media Rack navigation controls 2 Expand All Allow you to navigate to specific folders and filter the Results list. Expands all results. 3 Collapse All Collapses all results.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone Adding Pictures of VST Instruments to the Media Rack on page 621 VST Effects Page The VST Effects page shows all VST effects of the selected collection. ● To open the VST Effects page, go to the Home page of the Media rack, and click VST Effects. The following options are available: 1 Media Rack navigation controls Allow you to navigate to specific folders and filter the Results list. 2 Expand All Expands all results.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone 6 Plug-in list Shows the plug-ins of the selected collection. RELATED LINKS VST Plug-in Manager Window on page 726 Adding Pictures of VST Effects to the Media Rack on page 622 Media Rack Navigation Controls The navigation controls allow you to navigate to files and folders in the Media rack. The following controls allow you to perform a text search, and to show all results on the current page.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone RELATED LINKS Home Page on page 611 Results Page on page 613 Media File Attributes on page 639 Working with the Media Rack The Media rack in the right zone of the Project window allows you to search for supported media files and included VST instruments, and add them to your project. The controls on the different pages of the Media rack allow you to browse, filter, select, and to preview your media files.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone ● To add the effect to an audio-related channel, drag the effect from the Media rack, and drop it in the Inserts or Sends section of the MixConsole in the lower zone of the Project window, or the Channel Settings window. RELATED LINKS Loading Effect Plug-In Presets on page 648 Applying Track Presets You can use the Media rack to add track presets to your project. PROCEDURE 1. In the Media rack, click the Presets tile. 2. Click Track Presets. 3.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone Adding Favorites Using the File Browser Page You can add favorite folders using the File Browser page. This allows you to directly access media files in specific folders. PROCEDURE 1. In the Media rack, click the File Browser tile. 2. In the File Browser, navigate to the folder that you want to add as a favorite and select it. 3. Do one of the following: ● At the top left of the page, click Add Favorite.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Adding Pictures of VST Effects to the Media Rack Pictures of VST effects from other vendors are not loaded by default. However, you can add them to the Media rack manually. PREREQUISITE You have added a VST effect from another vendor. PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector for the track or in the MixConsole, open the Inserts section, locate the VST effect, and double-click the effect slot. The VST effect control panel opens. 2.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Allows you to scan specific folders in your file system, and to add favorites. 2 Toolbar Contains tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MediaBay, and allows you to switch between the previously defined favorite locations. Favorites in the MediaBay window are not automatically scanned. 3 Filters Allows you to filter the Results list using a logical or an attribute filter. 4 Results Displays all supported media files.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Include Folders and Subfolders Activate this to show the content of folders and subfolders. Left Divider Left Divider Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown. Text Search Search Allows you to search media files by name or by attribute. Media Types Filter Select Media Types Allows you to select the media types that are displayed on the Results page. Rating Filter Rating Filter Filters files according to their rating.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown. MediaBay Settings MediaBay Settings Opens the MediaBay settings. Window Zone Controls Show/Hide Left Zone Shows/Hides the left zone of the window. Show/Hide Lower Zone Shows/Hides the lower zone of the window. Show/Hide Right Zone Shows/Hides the right zone of the window. Set up Window Layout Allows you to set up the window layout.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window To show the supported media files in the Results section of the MediaBay, you must scan all folders that you want to include in the search. You can also add favorite folders. All media files contained in a Favorite are automatically scanned. RELATED LINKS Scanning Folders on page 626 Adding Favorites on page 627 Scanning Folders To include specific folders in the MediaBay search, you must scan them. PROCEDURE 1.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Adding Favorites You can add favorite folders using the File Browser section. PROCEDURE 1. In the File Browser section, navigate to the folder that you want to add as a favorite, and select it. 2. Right-click the folder or the volume, and from the context menu, select Add Favorite. 3. In the Set Name dialog that opens, enter a name for the folder. 4. Click OK.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window NOTE You can set the maximum number of files that are displayed in the Results list in the MediaBay Settings. Setting up the Results List Columns For each media type, or for combinations of media types, you can specify the attribute columns that are displayed in the Results list. PROCEDURE 1. In the Results section, select the media types for which you want to make settings. 2. Click Set up Result Columns and activate or deactivate the options on the submenus.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window IMPORTANT If you delete a file using the File Explorer/macOS Finder, it is still displayed in the Results list, although it is no longer available to the program. To remedy this, rescan the corresponding folder. Shuffling the Results List You can display the Results list entries in a random order. ● To shuffle the Results list, click Shuffle Results in the MediaBay toolbar.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Show Media Types Selector You can activate the media types that you want to be displayed in the Results list. The following media types are available: Audio Files Shows all audio files. The supported formats are .wav, .w64, .aiff, .aifc, .rex, .rx2, .mp3, .mp2, .ogg, .wma (Windows only). MIDI Files Shows all MIDI files (file name extension .mid). MIDI Loops Shows all MIDI loops (file name extension .midiloop).
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window RELATED LINKS Pattern Banks Previewer on page 637 Track Presets on page 198 Saving/Loading Strip Presets on page 394 Saving/Loading EQ Presets on page 386 Saving/Loading FX Chain Presets on page 383 Video File Compatibility on page 1054 Filtering According to Rating With the Rating Filter, you can filter files according to their rating. NOTE The Rating Filter is not available in the Media rack in the right zone.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window When entering strings separated by “and” (or a plus sign), all files are found that contain both a and b. [And] is the default setting when no boolean operator is used, for example, you can also enter [a b]. Or [,] [a or b] When entering strings separated by “or” (or a comma), files are found that contain either a or b, or both. Not [-] [not b] When entering text preceded by “not” (or a minus sign), all files not containing b are found.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Audio Files Previewer The Previewer for audio files allows you to listen to audio files before you use them in your project. 1 Transport controls Start, stop, pause, and cycle the preview. 2 Preview Level fader Specifies the preview level. 3 Auto Play New Results Selection Automatically plays back the selected file. 4 Align Beats to Project Plays back the selected file in sync with the project, starting at the project cursor position.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window ● To deselect the range, drag both handles all the way to the left. MIDI Files Previewer The Previewer for MIDI files allows you to listen to MIDI files before you use them in your project. ● To preview a MIDI file, load a VST instrument, and select it as output device from the Select MIDI Output pop-up menu. 1 Transport controls Start and stop the preview. 2 Preview Level fader Specifies the preview level. 3 Output Allows you to select the output device.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window 3 Auto Play New Results Selection Automatically plays back the selected file. 4 Link Playback to Chord Track Transposes the events of the MIDI loop to play back in context with the chord track. Note that you need a chord track with chord events for this. If this option is activated, and you insert a MIDI loop into the project, Follow Chord Track is automatically activated for the track.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Previewing Presets Via MIDI Input MIDI input is always active. For example, when a MIDI keyboard is connected to your computer and set up properly, you can directly start playing the notes to preview the selected preset. Previewing Presets Using a MIDI File PROCEDURE 1. 2. On the Previewer Sequence Mode pop-up menu, select Load MIDI File. In the file dialog that opens, select a MIDI file and click Open. The name of the MIDI file is displayed on the pop-up menu. 3.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window 2. Play some notes on the computer keyboard. Pattern Banks Previewer The Previewer for pattern banks allows you to listen to pattern banks before you use them in your project. 1 Transport controls Start and stop the preview. 2 Preview Level fader Specifies the preview level. 3 Keyboard The keyboard allows you to preview the selected pattern bank. In the Previewer section, choose a subbank (the number at the top) and pattern (a key), and click Play.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window contains The search result must contain the text or number specified in the text field to the right. matches words The search result must match the words specified in the text field to the right. omits The search result must not contain the text or number specified in the text field to the right. equals The search result must correspond exactly to the text or number specified in the text field to the right, including any file extension.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window 6. Enter the text or number that you want to find in the field to the right. NOTE If you enter 2 or more strings or filter lines, the files that are found match all strings or filter lines. ● To add more than one string in the text field, enter a Space between them. ● To add another filter line, click + to the right of the text field. You can add up to seven filter lines in which you can define further search conditions. ● To remove a filter line, click -.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window RELATED LINKS Attribute Inspector on page 641 Attribute Filter Assigning attribute values to your files facilitates organizing your media files. The Attribute filter allows you to view and edit some of the standard file attributes that are found in your media files. If you click Attribute, the Filters section displays all values that have been specified for the displayed attribute categories.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Performing a Context Menu Search You can search for other files that have the same attribute as the selected file. This allows you to find all the files that have a value in common, for example, if you want to view all the files that were created on the same day. ● In the Results list or the Attribute Inspector, right-click a file and select the attribute value for which you want to search from the Search for submenu.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Dynamic Displays all available values for the selected files. Defined Displays a configured set of attributes for the selected media type regardless of whether corresponding values are available for the selected files. Configure Defined Attributes Activates the configuration mode, in which you can set up the attributes that are displayed in the Attribute Inspector. Configuration Mode When you click Configure Defined Attributes, the configuration mode is enabled.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Precision Shows the number of decimals displayed for number attributes. RELATED LINKS Media File Attributes on page 639 Managing Attribute Lists on page 645 Editing Attributes The search functions, especially the attribute filter, are a powerful media management tool when making extensive use of tagging, that is, when adding and editing attributes.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Editing Attributes in the Results List You can edit attributes directly in the Results list. This allows you to assign attributes to a number of loop files, for example. PREREQUISITE Allow Editing in Results List is activated in the MediaBay Settings. PROCEDURE 1. In the Results list, select the files for which you want to make settings. You can make settings for several files simultaneously, except for the attribute name, which must be unique for every file. 2.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window ● To set or remove the write protection attribute for a file, right-click the file in the Results list and select Set Write Protection/Remove Write Protection. This is only possible if the file type allows write operations and if you have the necessary operating system permission. ● When you specify attribute values for a file that is write-protected, this is reflected in the Pending Tags column next to the Write Protection column in the Results list.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window 2. Click Configure Defined Attributes to enter configuration mode. 3. Click +. 4. In the Add User Attribute dialog, specify the Attribute Type and the Display Name. The display name must be unique in the attribute list. The Database Name field indicates if a certain name is valid or not. 5. Click OK. RESULT The new attribute is added to the list of available attributes and is displayed in the Attribute Inspector and the Results list.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window RESULT The media file is inserted on the new track or at the insert position. RELATED LINKS Show Media Types Selector on page 630 Loading Track Presets PROCEDURE 1. 2. Do one of the following: ● In the MediaBay, open the media types selector, click Track Presets, and select a preset. ● In the Media rack in the right zone, click Presets > Track Presets, and click the following tiles until you can select the preset in the Results list.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Loading Effect Plug-In Presets PROCEDURE 1. 2. Do one of the following: ● In the MediaBay, open the media types selector, click Plug-in Presets, and select a preset. ● In the Media rack in the right zone, click Presets > VST FX Presets, and click the following tiles until you can select the preset in the Results list. Do one of the following: ● Drag the plug-in preset to an audio track or its Inserts section in the Inspector.
MediaBay and Media Rack Working with Volume Databases ● In the Media rack in the right zone, click Presets > Strip Presets, and click the following tiles until you can select the preset in the Results list. 2. In the Project window, select an audio track. 3. Drag the preset from the MediaBay or Media rack and drop it on the open Strip section of the Inspector. RESULT The strip preset is applied to the track, and all settings of the preset are loaded.
MediaBay and Media Rack Working with Volume Databases NOTE When you launch Cubase, all available volume databases are automatically mounted. Databases that are made available while the program is running have to be mounted manually. Rescanning Volume Databases If you have modified the data on your external volume on a different system, you must rescan the MediaBay.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Settings need a separate volume database for it. Any data on this drive can be included in the local database file again, by removing the extra database file. PROCEDURE ● In the File Browser section, right-click the volume database and select Remove Volume Database. RESULT The metadata is integrated in the local MediaBay database file, and the volume database file is deleted. NOTE If the drive contains a large amount of data, this process may take some time.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Settings Show File Extensions in Results List Shows file name extensions in the Results list. Scan Unknown File Types When scanning for media files, the MediaBay ignores files with an unknown file extension. If this option is activated, the MediaBay tries to open and scan any file in the search location and ignores those files that cannot be recognized.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Cubase provides integrated surround sound features with support for several formats. All audiorelated channels and busses can handle multichannel speaker configurations. A channel in the MixConsole can contain either complete surround mixes or an individual speaker channel which is part of a surround setup. Cubase offers the following surround-related features: ● You can route audio-related tracks, that is, audio, instrument, and sampler tracks, to surround channels.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Deliverables Deliverables A surround mix in Cubase can be sent as multichannel audio from the surround output bus to a recorder, or can be exported to audio files on your hard disk. Exported surround mixes can either be split to one mono file per speaker channel, or interleaved to a single file containing all the surround channels.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Preparations for Creating Surround Mixes Quadro+LFE This is the same format as Quadro but with an additional LFE channel. LRS This format uses the channels left, right, and surround. The surround channel is positioned at center-rear. LRC+LFE This is the same format as LRC but with an additional LFE channel. LRS+LFE This is the same format as LRS but with an additional LFE channel.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Preparations for Creating Surround Mixes Output bus in 5.1 channel configuration with stereo child bus RELATED LINKS Adding Child Busses (Cubase Pro only) on page 28 Surround Routing The processing format of VST MultiPanner depends on the channel routing. You can use the Routing and the Direct Routing racks in the MixConsole to route audio-related tracks to output busses or group channels with a surround configuration.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Preparations for Creating Surround Mixes NOTE If a stereo audio channel is routed directly to a speaker channel, the left and the right channels are mixed to mono. The pan control for the audio channel determines the balance between the left and the right channel in the resulting mono mix. Center pan produces a mix of equal proportion.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) VST MultiPanner ● You have prepared surround premixes, for example, stems, that you want to record on a new audio track with a surround configuration. RELATED LINKS Audio File Import on page 283 Adding Input and Output Busses on page 28 VST MultiPanner The VST MultiPanner plug-in allows you to position a sound source in the surround field or to modify existing premixes. The plug-in distributes the incoming audio in various proportions to the output surround channels.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) VST MultiPanner The following settings and options are available: Movement restriction buttons Allow you to restrict the movement to one axis when moving the sound source with the mouse. NOTE ● The movement restriction buttons do not affect the controls in the positioning section below the pan area. Reset Parameters Alt-click this button to reset all panner parameters to their default values. Input level meter Shows the input level for all speaker channels.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) VST MultiPanner Speaker channel buttons The speaker buttons around the pan area represent the output configuration. The buttons allow you to solo, mute, and disable the corresponding channels. NOTE You cannot automate the soloing of output channels. Output level meter Shows the output level for all speaker channels. The numeric values above the meters indicate the peak levels registered for the channels. Left-Right Pan Sets the position of the signal on the x-axis.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) VST MultiPanner LFE Level Sets the signal amount that is sent to the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) channel. NOTE The LFE channel is used as a full-range channel, no low-pass filtering is applied.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) VST MultiPanner In the miniature views, the following applies: ● To move the signal source in the surround field, click and drag. ● In the Inspector miniature view, you can also solo, mute, and disable channels. NOTE In all miniature panner views, you can hold Shift while moving the sound source to allow for more accurate positioning.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) VST MultiPanner Position of the Sound Source The pan area of the VST MultiPanner plug-in shows you the position of the sound source and allows you to move it. In the pan area, the virtual position of the sound source is shown as a circle. The left and right stereo channels are shown in yellow and red. Mono channels are shown in blue.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) VST MultiPanner Movement Restriction Modes VST MultiPanner allows you to restrict the movement within the pan area. This way, you can move the sound source along a specific axis, for example, from bottom left to top right. The following positioning modes and modifier keys are available: Standard Positioning Mode Mouse movements are not restricted. Fine-Scaled Positioning Mode Mouse movements are scaled to allow very fine movements.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) VST MultiPanner IMPORTANT ● If Position Left/Right Channels Independently is activated, automation data is written for several parameters. Due to this, specific automation rules apply. ● Automation data for the independent positioning mode is always written for the complete sound source, not for individual channels. This means it is not possible to record automation for one stereo channel and then add automation for the other stereo channel in a second go, for example.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) VST MultiPanner 1 Acoustically effective positions of the left and right channel within the pan area 2 Theoretical positions of the left and right panning ball outside the pan area 3 Positioning handle outside the pan area Pan Controls Left-Right Pan and Rear-Front Pan allow you to pan the sound source on the x-axis and on the y-axis. NOTE The panning controls are not affected by the movement restriction buttons.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) VST MultiPanner Orbit Controls The orbit controls allow you to rotate the sound source, including all input channels, around the center of the surround field. 1 Orbit Center 2 Radius Orbit Center This is the main control that allows you to perform the rotation. Radius If you use Orbit Center, Radius allows you to control the distance of the sound source from the center of the surround field without changing the angle.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) VST MultiPanner Divergence Controls Front Divergence, Front/Rear Divergence, and Rear Divergence determine the attenuation curves used when positioning sound sources for x-axis front, y-axis front/rear, and x-axis rear. If all divergence controls are set to 0 %, positioning a sound source on a speaker sets all other speakers to level zero. With higher values, the other speakers receive a percentage of the sound source.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) VST MultiPanner Soloed, Muted, and Disabled Speaker Channels The speaker buttons around the pan area represent the output configuration and allow you to disable, solo, or mute channels. The speaker buttons around the Top View and the Rear View represent the output configuration and allow you to disable, solo, or mute channels. Enabled speaker This channel is enabled. Disabled speaker This channel is disabled. Its signal is distributed to the other channels instead.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) MixConvert V6 Remote Controlling VST MultiPanner You can control the VST MultiPanner plug-in remotely with several control devices. To control all panner functions, you may need updated software for your device. Yamaha Nuage Avid The parameters of VST MultiPanner are mapped on the following devices: ● System 5-MC ● S6 ● Artist Series Panning with a Joystick You can use a joystick to remote-control Rear-Front Pan and Left-Right Pan in VST MultiPanner.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) MixConvert V6 NOTE There is one exception to this behavior. If a stereo channel is routed to a mono destination through the channel routing or a cue send routing, a normal stereo panner is inserted. However, this stereo panner controls the balance of the left and right channels as they are blended into the mono destination. The center position blends both channels together by equal amounts.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) MixConvert V6 RELATED LINKS MixConvert V6 Plug-in Panel on page 672 VST MultiPanner on page 658 Input and Output Channel Configurations on page 673 Miniature Views on page 661 MixConvert V6 Plug-in Panel The MixConvert V6 plug-in panel allows you to set the levels of the surround channels, and to solo or mute channels for input and output channels. ● To show/hide the Input or Output sections, click the corresponding arrow button.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) MixConvert V6 Listen to Surround Channels on Front Channels Solos all surround channels, including the side channels, and routes or downmixes them to the front speakers. Center Level Sets the level of the front center channel. LFE Fader Level Sets the level of the LFE channel. Surround Level Sets the level of the surround channels. The level of the surround channels cannot be adjusted individually. Global Gain Level Sets the level of all output channels.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Surround Mix Export ● To solo the LFE channel, click the corresponding cross-hair icon in the center of the channel display. NOTE Alternatively, click the Solo Input/Output LFE Channel button in the center section. ● To mute a channel, Shift-click the corresponding speaker icon. RELATED LINKS MixConvert V6 Plug-in Panel on page 672 Surround Mix Export Cubase allows you to export a surround mix using the Export Audio Mixdown function.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) 3D Mixes for Ambisonics NOTE Not every editing operation is suited for Ambisonics audio. For example, avoid operations that change the phase and levels of the audio signals against each other. ● You can use VST MultiPanner to create Ambisonics mixes from mono, stereo, or multichannel sources. To use VST MultiPanner in Ambisonics mode, you must set an output bus in Ambisonics format as Main Mix.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) 3D Mixes for Ambisonics VST MultiPanner Plug-in Panel in Ambisonics Mode The VST MultiPanner plug-in panel offers additional settings and parameters for Ambisonics mixing. ● To use VST MultiPanner in Ambisonics mode for an audio channel, you must route the channel to an output bus in Ambisonics format. Top View/Rear View Shows the sound field from the top and the rear, and allows you to position the sound source by dragging the panning balls.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) 3D Mixes for Ambisonics Playback of Ambisonics Audio Cubase allows you to decode Ambisonics audio for monitoring via headphones or multi-channel speaker setups. For decoding, you can use VST AmbiDecoder or suited third-party decoder plugins. The following applies: ● In the Control Room Phones channel, you can use VST AmbiDecoder or suited third-party decoder plug-ins. ● In the Control Room Main channel, VST AmbiDecoder is automatically used for decoding Ambisonics audio.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) 3D Mixes for Ambisonics Input Format > Output Format Shows the audio formats of the input and output signals. HRTF Mode Allows you to set the head-related transfer function (HRTF) mode for binaural playback. The following HRTF modes are available: ● Standard mode uses the standard HRTF algorithm of Cubase. ● SOFA mode allows you to use an HRTF saved in SOFA file format. This mode is only available if you have loaded a SOFA file.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) 3D Mixes for Ambisonics NOTE For this to work, you must connect the VR player to Cubase and activate Send HeadTracking Data in the GoPro VR Player Remote window.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) 3D Mixes for Ambisonics Calibrate Yaw Defines the current yaw rotation angle as center. Monitoring Ambisonics Audio Binaurally via the Phones Channel The Control Room Phones channel allows you to listen to Ambisonics audio binaurally via headphones, automatically using VST AmbiDecoder for decoding. PREREQUISITE ● In the Audio Connections window, you have set an Ambisonics output bus as main mix, and enabled the Control Room.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) 3D Mixes for Ambisonics PROCEDURE 1. In the MixConsole, route your audio tracks to the Ambisonics output bus. 2. In the Downmix Presets section of the Control Room, select a preset with the same Ambisonics format as the main mix. 3. In the Channels section, disable Head Tracking on the miniature view of VST AmbiDecoder. 4. In the Main channel of the Control Room, insert the Ambisonics decoder plug-in.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) 3D Mixes for Ambisonics Monitoring a Head-Locked Signal in VST AmbiDecoder You may not want some audio, for example, background music tracks, to be affected by head movements. VST AmbiDecoder allows you to bypass tracking by sending a head-locked signal via side-chain. PREREQUISITE In the Audio Connections window, you have set an Ambisonics output bus as main mix, and enabled the Control Room. PROCEDURE 1.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) 3D Mixes for Ambisonics GoPro VR Player Remote Window GoPro VR Player Remote allows Cubase to control the transport and viewing angle of GoPro VR Player. ● To open the GoPro VR Player Remote window, select Project > GoPro VR Player Remote. Video File Shows the selected video file for playback in GoPro VR Player. Select Video File Allows you to select a video file. Video Stereoscopy Allows you to select the stereoscopy format of the selected video file.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) 3D Mixes for Ambisonics 8. Select the Video Stereoscopy format of the selected video file. 9. Enter the IP Address/Port of the computer where the GoPro VR Player is running. By default, IP Address/Port is set to the local computer. 10. Activate Send Head-Tracking Data. This sends the head-tracking information of a connected VR controller to GoPro VR Player. 11. Activate Connect to sync the transport of GoPro VR Player with Cubase.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) 3D Mixes for Ambisonics VST AmbiConverter Panel When working with Ambisonics audio, Cubase supports AmbiX format only. The VST AmbiConverter plug-in allows you to convert Ambisonics audio between Furse-Malham (FuMa) and AmbiX format. Input level meter Shows the input level for all speaker channels. Ambisonics format display Shows the order of the Ambisonics audio format. Output level meter Shows the output level for all speaker channels.
Automation In essence, automation means recording the values for a particular MixConsole or effect parameter. When you create your final mix, Cubase can adjust this particular parameter control. Automation Curves Within a Cubase project, the changes in a parameter value over time are reflected as curves on automation tracks.
Automation Writing Automation Data NOTE R is automatically enabled when you enable W. This allows Cubase to read existing automation data at any time. You can separately deactivate W if you only want to read existing data. There are also global read and write indicator buttons Activate/Deactivate Read/Write for All Tracks on the Project window toolbar and the MixConsole toolbar. These buttons light up as soon as there is an enabled R or W button on any channel/track within your project.
Automation Writing Automation Data RESULT All actions that you recorded are reproduced exactly. When you drag a plug-in to a different insert slot on the same channel, any existing automation data moves with the plug-in. When you drag it to an insert slot on a different channel, any existing automation data is not transferred to the new channel. Manual Writing of Automation Data You can add automation events manually by drawing automation curves on an automation track. PROCEDURE 1.
Automation Editing Automation Events The following Line tool modes are available: Line If you click on the automation track and drag with the Line tool in Line mode, you can create automation events in a line. This is a quick way to create linear fades, etc. Parabola If you click and drag on the automation track with the Line tool in Parabola mode, you can create more natural curves and fades. NOTE The result depends on the direction from which you draw the parabolic curve.
Automation Editing Automation Events Creating Smooth Transitions Between Automation Events (Bézier Automation Curves) Cubase supports bézier automation curves that allow you to create smooth transitions between automation events. This way, you can edit linear ramp curves with much more precision, flexibility, and intuition. PREREQUISITE The Object Selection tool is active. PROCEDURE 1. Move the mouse pointer on the linear ramp curve segment that you want to edit. A handle is shown on the curve segment.
Automation Editing Automation Events ● To select multiple events, drag a selection rectangle with the Object Selection tool or Shift-click the events. ● To select multiple events, select a range with the Range Selection tool or Shift-click the events. ● To select all automation events on an automation track, right-click the automation track and select Select All Events from the context menu. Selected events are indicated by a dark color.
Automation Editing Automation Events If you click in the middle of the upper border of the editor, you can scale the curve vertically. This allows you to raise or lower the event values of the curve in percent. 4 Move Vertically If you click on the upper border of the editor, you can move the entire curve vertically. This allows you to raise or lower the values of the event values of the curve.
Automation Editing Automation Events 3. When you are satisfied with the result, release the mouse button. RESULT The curve segment between the two automation events is scaled. Moving Automation Events Moving Single Automation Events ● To move a selected automation event, click it and drag to the left or to the right. ● To restrict the direction of the movement, press Ctrl/Cmd and drag. NOTE Snap is taken into account when you move automation curves horizontally.
Automation Automation Tracks Automation Tracks Most of the tracks in your project have automation tracks, one for each automated parameter. To show automation tracks, you must open them. Showing/Hiding Automation Tracks ● Position the mouse pointer over the lower left corner of the track and click the arrow icon (Show/Hide Automation) that appears. ● Right-click the track in the track list and select Show/Hide Automation from the context menu.
Automation Virgin Territory vs. Initial Value (Cubase Pro only) Muting Automation Tracks By muting an automation track, you turn off automation for a single parameter. ● To mute individual automation tracks, click Mute Automation in the track list. Virgin Territory vs. Initial Value (Cubase Pro only) For parameter automation, Cubase works either with an initial value or with virgin territory.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) The Automation Panel is a floating window, similar to the MixConsole and Transport panel, and can be left open while you work. To show the Automation Panel, do one of the following: ● Select Project > Automation Panel. ● On the Project window toolbar, click Open Automation Panel ● Press F6. . Read/Write Buttons The Read and Write buttons in the upper part of the Automation Panel are global for all tracks.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) The current automation pass always punches out as soon as one of the following conditions is met, independent of which automation mode is selected: ● If you disable Write. ● If you stop playback. ● If you activate Fast Forward/Rewind. ● If the project cursor reaches the right locator in Cycle mode. ● If you click in the ruler to move the project cursor. This is user-definable and can be controlled via the Automation Panel.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) Auto-Latch Auto-Latch is useful in situations where you want to keep a value over a longer period of time – for example when making EQ settings for a particular scene. In Auto-Latch mode, there is no specific punch out condition other than those that are valid in all modes. ● Once your pass has started, the writing of automation data continues for as long as playback lasts or Write is enabled.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) ● When you re-touch the fader and move it towards the original value, punch out occurs automatically as soon as you cross the original curve. RELATED LINKS Automation Settings on page 704 Trim Trim allows you to modify the automation curve from a previous pass. If you activate Trim, a trim curve is positioned in the middle of the automation track. NOTE Trim works for channel volume and cue send level adjustments.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) Freeze Trim You can freeze your trim curve automatically or manually. This renders all trim data into a single automation curve. ● To freeze your trim curve automatically whenever a write operation is finished, open the Settings page of the Automation Panel, and select On Pass End in the Freeze Trim popup menu.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) Fill Options The Fill options define what happens in a specific section of your project when you punch out of a running automation pass. The Fill options write one particular value across a defined section of your automation track. Any previously created data within this section is overwritten. You can also combine the various Fill options. Activating To Punch PROCEDURE 1. On the Automation Panel, activate Touch, and activate To Punch as Fill option. 2.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) The found value is set within the range that is defined by the left and right locators. Activating Gaps PREREQUISITE You have set up virgin territories. NOTE When Trim is active, Gap has no effect. This is because Trim only modifies already existing data. PROCEDURE 1. On the Automation Panel, activate Touch, and activate Gaps as Fill option. 2. Start playback. 3.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) Suspend Options This section on the Automation Panel allows you to exclude specific parameters from the reading or writing of automation data. This way, you have full manual control of these parameters. Suspend Read Suspending the reading for a specific parameter during automation gives you full manual control of it. ● To suspend the reading of automation data for a specific parameter, click the corresponding parameter.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) Show Options The Show options allow you to open all automation tracks for a specific parameter. This gives you an overview of the automated parameter. ● To open the volume, pan, EQ, sends, or inserts automation tracks for all tracks, click the corresponding parameter. The automation tracks are opened even if no automation data was recorded on these tracks.
Automation MIDI Controller Automation A reduction level value of 0 % removes repeated automation points only. A reduction level value between 1 to 100 % smoothens the automation curve. The default value of 50 % should reduce the automation data amount significantly without touching the sound result of the existing automation. Spike Detection Range Defines a period of time in which sudden changes in the automated parameter are considered to be unwanted spikes. You can set values from 0 to 200 ms.
Automation MIDI Controller Automation Modulation In this mode, the automation track curve modulates the existing part automation, with higher curve points emphasizing the automation values and lower curve points reducing the automation values even further. NOTE The settings that you make for a controller are applied to all MIDI tracks that use this controller.
Automation MIDI Controller Automation Controller list Lists all MIDI controllers for which you can specify the record destination and the merge mode for automation separately. This gives you full control over the MIDI automation (destination as well as merge mode) in your project. Record Destination Click in the Record Destination column for a MIDI controller to open a pop-up menu where you can choose where you want recorded data of this particular MIDI controller to be saved.
VST Instruments VST instruments are software synthesizers or other sound sources that are contained within Cubase. They are played internally via MIDI. You can add effects or EQ to VST instruments. Cubase allows you to make use of VST instruments in the following ways: ● By adding a VST instrument and assigning one or several MIDI tracks to it. ● By creating an instrument track. This is a combination of a VST instrument, an instrument channel, and a MIDI track.
VST Instruments VST Instrument Control Panel VST Instrument Control Panel The VST instrument control panel allows you to set up the parameters of the selected instrument. The contents, design, and layout of the control panel depend on the selected instrument. The following controls are available: 1 Activate Instrument Activates/Deactivates the instrument. 2 Read Automation/Write Automation Allows you to read/write automation for the instrument parameter settings.
VST Instruments VST Instrument Control Panel Opens a pop-up menu that allows you to save, rename, or remove a preset. 10 Add VST Plug-in Picture to Media Rack Adds a picture of the VST plug-in to the Media rack. This is only available for plug-ins of other vendors. 11 VST Instrument context menu Opens a menu with specific functions and settings.
VST Instruments VST Instrument Selector VST Instrument Selector The VST instrument selector allows you to select VST instruments of the active collection. To open the VST instrument selector, do one of the following: ● Select Studio > VST Instruments, and click Add Rack Instrument. ● Select Studio > VST Instruments, click Add Track Instrument, and open the Instrument pop-up menu. The following controls are available: 1 Expand Tree/Collapse Tree Expands/Collapses the tree.
VST Instruments VST Instruments Window NOTE The VST Instruments in the right zone are just another representation of the VST Instruments window. All features are the same. RELATED LINKS Showing/Hiding Zones on page 39 Project Window Toolbar on page 40 VST Instruments Window The VST Instruments window allows you to add VST instruments for MIDI and instrument tracks. All instruments that are used in your project are shown. You can access up to 8 quick controls for each added instrument.
VST Instruments VST Instrument Controls Find Instruments Opens a selector that allows you to find a loaded instrument. Set Remote-Control Focus for VST Quick Controls to Previous Instrument Allows you to set the remote-control focus to the previous instrument. Set Remote-Control Focus for VST Quick Controls to Next Instrument Allows you to set the remote-control focus to the next instrument. Show/Hide all VST Quick Controls Shows/Hides the default quick controls for all loaded instruments.
VST Instruments VST Instrument Controls This lights up when MIDI data is received by the instrument. Click this button to open a pop-up menu that allows you to select, mute/unmute, and solo/unsolo for tracks that send MIDI to the instrument (inputs). NOTE If you resize the VST Instruments window, you can access this option by using an Input/ Output Options pop-up menu. 7 Activate Outputs This control is only available if the instrument provides more than one output.
VST Instruments Presets for Instruments NOTE This option is only available for VST 3 instruments that support side-chaining. Remote Control Editor Opens the Remote Control Editor. RELATED LINKS Side-Chain Input for VST Instruments on page 722 Presets for Instruments You can load and save presets for instruments. These contain all the settings that are required for the sound that you want.
VST Instruments Presets for Instruments ● In the VST Instruments window, click Preset Browser for the instrument, and select Save Preset. ● In the control panel for the VST instrument, click Preset Browser, and select Save Preset. 2. In the Save Preset dialog, enter a name for the preset. 3. Optional: Click Show Attribute Inspector and define attributes for the preset. 4. Click OK to save the preset and close the dialog.
VST Instruments Playing Back VST Instruments Presets Presets contain the settings of the entire plug-in. For multitimbral instruments, this includes the settings for all sound slots as well as the global settings. Programs Programs contain only the settings for one program. For multitimbral instruments, this includes only the settings for one sound slot. Saving Track Presets You can save your settings on instrument tracks as track presets for further use. PROCEDURE 1.
VST Instruments Playing Back VST Instruments Freezing Instruments If you are using a moderately powerful computer or a large number of VST instruments, your computer may not be able to play back all instruments in real time. At this point, you can freeze instruments. PROCEDURE 1. Do one of the following: ● Select Studio > VST Instruments. ● Select the instrument track and open the top Inspector section. 2. Click Freeze. 3. In the Freeze Instrument Options dialog, make your settings. 4. Click OK.
VST Instruments Latency Latency The term latency stands for the time it takes for the instrument to produce a sound when you press a key on your MIDI controller. It can be an issue when using VST instruments in real time. Latency depends on your audio hardware and its ASIO driver. In the Studio Setup dialog (VST Audio System page), the input and output latency values should ideally be a few milliseconds.
VST Instruments Import and Export Options 3. In the Results list, select a MIDI loop and drag it to an empty section in the Project window. RESULT An instrument track is created and the instrument part is inserted at the position where you dragged the file. The Inspector reflects all settings that are saved in the MIDI loop, for example, the VST instrument that was used, applied insert effects, track parameters, etc. NOTE You can also drag MIDI loops onto existing instrument or MIDI tracks.
VST Instruments VST Quick Controls The default folder cannot be changed. However, you can create subfolders within this folder to organize your MIDI loops. To create a subfolder, click New Folder in the Save MIDI Loop dialog. Exporting Instrument Tracks as MIDI Files You can export instrument tracks as standard MIDI files. PROCEDURE 1. Select an instrument track. 2. Select File > Export > MIDI File. 3. In the Export MIDI File dialog, select a location and enter a name for the MIDI file. 4.
VST Instruments Side-Chain Input for VST Instruments RELATED LINKS Remote Controlling Cubase on page 738 Connecting VST Quick Controls with Remote Controllers on page 722 Activating Pick-up Mode for Hardware Controls on page 737 Connecting VST Quick Controls with Remote Controllers VST Quick Controls become powerful if you use them together with a remote controller. PREREQUISITE The MIDI output on your remote unit is connected to a MIDI input on your MIDI interface. PROCEDURE 1.
VST Instruments Side-Chain Input for VST Instruments ● To process the audio signal completely through the instrument, route the output of the audio track to the side-chain input of an instrument. ● To use both the clean audio signal and the signal processed by the instrument, route a send to the instrument side-chain. NOTE To hear the audio played through the instrument, you must trigger a note, either by playing MIDI events or by playing notes on your external MIDI keyboard.
VST Instruments External Instruments (Cubase Pro only) NOTE For detailed information about Retrologue and its parameters, see the separate document Retrologue. External Instruments (Cubase Pro only) An external instrument bus is an input (return) to your audio hardware, along with a MIDI connection via Cubase and additional settings. External instrument busses are created in the Audio Connections window.
Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins Cubase supports the VST 2 and VST 3 plug-in standards. You can install effects and instruments that comply with these formats. NOTE Cubase only supports 64-bit plug-ins. A plug-in is a piece of software that adds a specific functionality to Cubase. The audio effects and instruments that are used in Cubase are VST plug-ins. VST effect or VST instrument plug-ins normally have their own installation application.
Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins Plug-ins and Collections VST Plug-in Manager Window You can manage VST effects and VST instruments in the VST Plug-in Manager window. ● To open the VST Plug-in Manager window, select Studio > VST Plug-in Manager. The VST Plug-in Manager is divided into the following sections: 1 VST Effects Lists all VST effects that are loaded in Cubase. To sort the list by a specific attribute, click the corresponding column header.
Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins Plug-ins and Collections VST Audio System Page on page 13 VST Plug-in Manager Toolbar on page 727 VST 2 Plug-in Path Settings on page 728 Hiding Plug-ins on page 729 Reactivating Plug-ins from the Blacklist on page 729 VST Plug-in Manager Toolbar Shows tools and shortcuts for functions in the VST Plug-in Manager. ● To open the VST Plug-in Manager window, select Studio > VST Plug-in Manager.
Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins Adding New Plug-in Collections VST 2 Plug-in Path Settings Shows information about the selected VST 2 plug-in path. ● To open the VST 2 Plug-in Path Settings, select Studio > VST Plug-in Manager, and click VST 2 Plug-in Path Settings. 1 VST 2 Plug-in path list Shows all VST 2 plug-in paths. 2 Add Path Allows you to add a new VST 2 plug-in path. 3 Delete Path Deletes the selected VST 2 plug-in path. 4 Reset Resets the list to default.
Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins Hiding Plug-ins RESULT The new collection is saved. If you select it, its plug-ins are shown in the plug-in selectors. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK To remove a plug-in from a collection, select it and click Remove. RELATED LINKS Plug-ins and Collections on page 725 VST Plug-in Manager Window on page 726 Hiding Plug-ins You can hide plug-ins from all collections. This is useful if you have plug-ins installed on your computer that you do not want to use in Cubase.
Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins Reactivating Plug-ins from the Blacklist AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK If you want to move the plug-in back to the blacklist, click Rescan All in the VST 2 Plug-in Path Settings, and restart Cubase.
Track Quick Controls Cubase allows you to set up 8 different track parameters or settings as Track Quick Controls for quick access.
Track Quick Controls Parameter Assignment Track Quick Controls rack in the MixConsole Quick Controls assignments are saved with the project. You can assign Track Quick Controls to an external remote control device. For this to work, you must connect Track Quick Controls with your remote controller. You can automate parameter settings in the Quick Controls section using the Read/Write buttons (R and W).
Track Quick Controls Parameter Assignment The parameter name and its value are displayed in the slot. You can change the value by dragging the slider. 4. Repeat these steps for all slots for which you want to assign track parameters. RESULT You can now control the track parameters via the Quick Controls section in the Inspector or via the Track Quick Controls rack in the MixConsole. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can rename a Quick Control by double-clicking on the name and entering a new one.
Track Quick Controls Parameter Assignment Assigning MixConsole Parameters to Quick Controls You can assign MixConsole parameters to Quick Controls. PROCEDURE ● In the MixConsole, right-click the parameter that you want to assign to a Quick Control. ● Select Add “x” to Quick Controls (where x is the name of the parameter) to assign the parameter to the next empty slot.
Track Quick Controls Quick Controls and Automatable Parameters Saving Track Quick Control Assignments as Presets You can save Quick Control assignments as track presets. PREREQUISITE You have assigned track parameters to Quick Controls. PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector for your track, open the Quick Controls section. 2. In the Quick Controls section, click Preset Management . 3. Click Save Preset. 4. Enter a name in the Type In Preset Name dialog. 5. Click OK.
Track Quick Controls Connecting Track Quick Controls with Remote Controllers The selector lists all automatable parameters. 3. Open the VST Mixer folder. The selector lists all channels that are available in the MixConsole of your project. 4. Assign a parameter of one particular channel to Quick Control 1, and another parameter of another channel to Quick Control 2. RESULT The Quick Controls section now allows you to control automatable parameters on different tracks.
Track Quick Controls Connecting Track Quick Controls with Remote Controllers 2. In the Devices list, select Track Quick Controls. 3. Open the MIDI Input pop-up menu, and select a MIDI input. 4. Optional: Open the MIDI Output pop-up menu, and select a MIDI output. 5. Click Apply. 6. Activate Learn. 7. In the Control Name column, select QuickControl 1. 8. On your MIDI device, move the control that you want to connect with the first quick control. 9.
Remote Controlling Cubase You can control Cubase via MIDI with a connected MIDI device. The supported devices are described in the separate document Remote Control Devices. You can also use a generic MIDI controller to remote-control Cubase. NOTE Most remote-control devices are able to control both MIDI and audio channels in Cubase, but the parameter setup may be different. Audio-specific controls such as EQ are disregarded when controlling MIDI channels.
Remote Controlling Cubase Setting up Remote Devices 3. In the table on the right, deactivate In ‘All MIDI Inputs’ for the MIDI input to which you have connected the MIDI remote unit. The State column reads Inactive. 4. Click OK. RESULT The remote unit input is removed from the All MIDI Inputs group. RELATED LINKS MIDI Port Setup Page on page 19 Setting up Remote Devices PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Studio Setup. 2.
Remote Controlling Cubase Setting up Remote Devices A bright stripe in the Project window and in the MixConsole indicates which channels are linked to the remote-control device. You can open a panel for the added device by selecting Studio > More Options. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Depending on your external MIDI control device, you might need to configure the parameters.
Remote Controlling Cubase Remote Devices and Automation MIDI Input Allows you to select a MIDI input. MIDI Output Allows you to select a MIDI output. User Commands Lists the controls or buttons of your remote device. Smart Switch Delay Allows you to specify a delay for the smart switch function. Functions that support the smart switch behavior are activated for as long as the button is pressed.
Remote Controlling Cubase Generic Remote Page 3. Click in the Category column for the control to which you want to assign a Cubase command, and select the category from the pop-up menu. The categories correspond to the categories in the Key Commands dialog. 4. Click in the Command column, and select the Cubase command from the pop-up menu. The available items on the pop-up menu depend on the selected category. 5. Click Apply.
Remote Controlling Cubase Generic Remote Page The following options are available: MIDI Input Allows you to select the MIDI input port to which your remote device is connected. MIDI Output Allows you to select the MIDI output port to which your remote device is connected. MIDI Remote Control Configuration The upper table shows the MIDI remote-control configuration of your remote device. Cubase Control Assignment The lower table allows you to assign Cubase controls to your remote device.
Remote Controlling Cubase Generic Remote Page The following options are available in the upper table: Control Name Double-click this field to change the name for the control, and enter the one written on the console, for example. This name is automatically reflected in the lower table. MIDI Status Allows you to specify the type of MIDI message sent by the control. MIDI Channel Allows you to select the MIDI channel on which the controller is transmitted.
Remote Controlling Cubase Generic Remote Page Delete Deletes the selected control from the table. Learn Allows you to assign MIDI messages by learning. Cubase Control Assignment Section You can specify the Cubase control assignment section in the lower table of the Generic Remote setup page. Each row in the table is assigned to the controller in the corresponding row in the MIDI remote-control configuration table.
Remote Controlling Cubase Generic Remote Page Bank pop-up menu Allows you to switch banks. This is necessary if your MIDI control device has 16 volume faders, and you are using 32 MixConsole channels in Cubase, for example. Rename Allows you to rename the selected bank. Add Adds banks to the pop-up menu. Delete Deletes the selected bank from the pop-up menu.
Remote Controlling Cubase Remote Control Editor VST Mixer Allows you to control MixConsole functions. If you select one of the available channels or Selected in the Channel/Category column, and one of the options in the Value/Action column, you can control that function of that specific channel or of the selected channel using your MIDI device. VST Control Room Allows you to control the functions of the Control Room.
Remote Controlling Cubase Remote Control Editor 1 Inspector Contains the settings and the parameter assignment for the selected cell. The upper section contains settings for the text label. The lower section contains settings for the knob and the switches. 2 Layout Selection Shows the name of the layout. Click to select a different layout.
Remote Controlling Cubase Remote Control Editor Remote Control Editor Toolbar Shows tools for setting up the layout. Remove All Assignments Removes all parameter assignments. Get Default Factory Layout/Copy Layout from Other Tab Reverts to the default settings for the current layout or copies the settings of one layout page to another. Activate/Deactivate Learn Mode Activates/Deactivates Learn mode for the Remote Control Editor.
Remote Controlling Cubase Remote Control Editor LED Ring An LED ring around the knob. The setting increases clockwise. LED Ring (counter-clockwise) An LED ring around the knob. The setting increases counter-clockwise. Center Width An LED ring that starts at the top center position, and when the settings increase, an LED is shown growing in both directions. Center Neutral A dial that starts at the top center position and can be moved left or right, like a pan control, for example.
Remote Controlling Cubase Remote Control Editor Assigning Parameters to Controls PROCEDURE 1. On the Remote Control Editor toolbar, click Activate/Deactivate Learn Mode. 2. Select the control that you want to assign to a plug-in parameter. 3. Do one of the following: 4. ● Click a parameter on the plug-in panel. ● Double-click on a control in the Remote Control Editor, and select a parameter from the list of available plug-in parameters. Press Esc to end Learn mode.
Remote Controlling Cubase Joysticks NOTE This is useful if your hardware devices have value fields that only display a limited number of characters, for example. Joysticks You can use a joystick to remote-control panning operations in Cubase. This can be useful, for example, for creating smooth automation curves. ● To use a joystick for remote-controlling, connect it to your computer and restart Cubase. After restarting the application, the joystick is automatically activated.
Remote Controlling Cubase Track Quick Controls Control list Lists the Apple Remote controls. Open the pop-up menu to select the Cubase parameter that you want to assign to that control. Disable when application is not in front Activate this if you do not want the Apple Remote to control Cubase when it does not have the focus. By default, the Apple Remote always controls the application that has the focus on your Macintosh computer, provided that this application supports the Apple Remote.
Remote Controlling Cubase VST Quick Controls VST Quick Controls If you have an external remote control device, you can control up to 8 parameters of a VST instrument, using the VST Quick Controls feature in Cubase.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI realtime means that you can change or transform MIDI events on MIDI or instrument tracks before they are sent to the MIDI outputs. This allows you to change the way MIDI data is played back. The actual MIDI events on the track are not affected. Therefore, MIDI realtime changes are not reflected in any MIDI editor.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Track Parameters Use the Input Transformer for the following purposes: ● Set up split keyboard combinations for recording left and right hands separately. ● Convert a controller, such as a foot pedal, into MIDI notes (for playing bass drum the right way). ● Filter out a specific type of MIDI data on one MIDI channel only. ● Turn aftertouch into any controller and vice versa. ● Invert velocity or pitch.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Modifiers 4 Action list Allows you to specify any changes that are made to the found events. 5 Function pop-up menu Allows you to select between Filter and Transform as a basic type of editing to be performed. Specifying Filter Conditions PROCEDURE 1. Select a MIDI or instrument track. 2. Perform one of the following actions: 3.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Modifiers MIDI Modifiers Section ● To open the MIDI Modifiers section, select a MIDI track, and in the Inspector, click MIDI Modifiers. NOTE If you want to compare the result of your modifier settings with the unprocessed MIDI, you can use the bypass button in the MIDI modifiers section. If this button is activated, the MIDI modifiers settings are temporarily disabled. Transpose Allows you to transpose all notes on the track in semitones.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Modifiers Range Allows you to specify a pitch or velocity range and either force all notes to fit within this range, or exclude all notes outside this range from playback. HMT: Follow Activate this option to apply Hermode tuning to the notes played on this track. HMT: Use for Analysis Activate this option to use the notes you played on this track to calculate retuning.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Modifiers Range Modes On the Range pop-up menu, you can select different range modes. Values are shown as numbers, from 0 to 127, for the velocity modes and as note numbers, from C-2 to G8, for the pitch modes. Vel. Limit Allows you to force all velocity values to fit within the range that you specify with the min and max values. Values below the lower limit are set to the min value, velocity values above the higher setting are set to the max value. Vel.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Modifiers RELATED LINKS Hermode Tuning on page 761 Hermode Tuning You can select different Hermode tuning types. ● To select a Hermode tuning type, select Project > Project Setup and select an option from the HMT Type pop-up menu. The following options are available: None No tuning is applied. Reference (pure 3/5) Tunes pure thirds and fifths. Classic (pure 3/5 equalized) Tunes pure thirds and fifths. In conflict situations, a slight equalization is applied.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Effects RELATED LINKS MIDI Track Inspector on page 128 MIDI Effects MIDI effects allow you to transform the MIDI data played back from the track in real time. You can add new events by using MIDI effects, or change MIDI event properties like pitches, for example. NOTE The included MIDI effect plug-ins are described in the separate document Plug-in Reference. MIDI Inserts MIDI insert effects are inserted in the signal chain of MIDI channels.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Effects Applying a MIDI Insert Effect You can apply MIDI insert effects to a MIDI track. PROCEDURE 1. Select the MIDI track. 2. In the Inspector, open the MIDI Inserts section. 3. Click Select Effect Type to open the MIDI effect pop-up menu. 4. Select a MIDI effect from the pop-up menu. RESULT The effect is automatically activated and its control panel is opened, allowing you to make settings for the effect.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Effects effect. Note that the effect can send its processed MIDI data to any MIDI output, not necessarily to the one used by the track. ● To open the MIDI Sends section, select a MIDI track, and in the Inspector, click MIDI Sends. You can add up to four MIDI send effects. Bypass Allows you to bypass all send effects for the track. Activate Send Allows you to activate/deactivate the selected effect.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects Transpose and Velocity on the Info Line Presets Some of the MIDI effects come with a number of presets for instant use. 1 MIDI In/MIDI Out Activity Indicates if the plug-in receives or transmits MIDI data. 2 Save Preset/Remove Preset Allows you to save your settings as a preset or to remove saved presets. Saved presets are available in the Select Preset pop-up menu for all instances of that MIDI plug-in, and in all projects.
Using MIDI Devices The MIDI Device Manager allows you to work with MIDI devices, that is, representations of external MIDI hardware. You can install preset MIDI devices or define new ones. This is useful for global control and patch selection. You can create MIDI device panels (Cubase Pro only), and create device maps where every parameter of an external device or a VST instrument can be controlled and automated from inside Cubase.
Using MIDI Devices Patch Banks The MIDI Device Manager allows you to specify which MIDI devices you are using, and to select to which device each MIDI track is routed. This allows you to select patches by name in the track list or Inspector. RELATED LINKS MIDI Device Manager on page 767 Patch Banks The Patch Banks list can have two or more main banks, depending on the selected device. This is due to the fact that different types of patches are handled differently in the instruments.
Using MIDI Devices MIDI Device Manager MIDI Device Manager in Cubase Pro. MIDI Device Manager in Cubase Artist. Installed Devices list Lists the connected MIDI devices and the imported device setups. Install Device Allows you to install a preset device. These presets are simple patch name scripts that do not include any device mapping of parameters and controls and no graphic panels. For more information about patch name scripts, see the separate document MIDI Devices.
Using MIDI Devices MIDI Device Manager Commands (Cubase Artist only) Allows you to edit the selected device. The patch structure for the selected device is shown to the left. MIDI Messages (Cubase Artist only) Shows which MIDI messages are sent out to select the patch that is highlighted in the list to the left. RELATED LINKS Device Panels (Cubase Pro only) on page 773 Commands for Patches In the MIDI Device Manager, patches can be structured in banks, folders, and presets.
Using MIDI Devices MIDI Device Manager Add Multiple Presets Allows you to set up a range of presets and add them to the selected bank or folder. NOTE You can remove banks, folders, and presets by selecting them and pressing Backspace. IMPORTANT For details on which MIDI events are used for selecting patches in the MIDI device, consult its documentation.
Using MIDI Devices MIDI Device Manager Installing Preset MIDI Devices You can install preset MIDI devices, that is, patch name scripts that do not include device mapping. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > More Options > MIDI Device Manager. 2. Click Install Device. 3. In the Add MIDI Device dialog, do one of the following: ● Select the script of the device in the list.
Using MIDI Devices MIDI Device Manager 4. Select an entry in the list. RESULT The corresponding MIDI message is sent to the device. Renaming Patches in Devices If you have replaced some of the factory presets with your own patches, you can modify the device so that the patch name list matches the actual device. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > More Options > MIDI Device Manager. 2. Select the device in the Installed Devices list. 3. Cubase Pro only: Click Open Device. 4.
Using MIDI Devices Device Panels (Cubase Pro only) 10. Activate Enable Edit and use the Commands pop-up menu to organize the patch structure of the new device. Defining New MIDI Devices (Cubase Artist only) You can define new MIDI devices. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > More Options > MIDI Device Manager. 2. Click Install Device. 3. In the Add MIDI Device dialog, select Define New. 4. Click OK. 5.
Using MIDI Devices Device Panels (Cubase Pro only) Opening Device Panels PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > More Options > MIDI Device Manager. 2. In the Installed Devices list, select the device. 3. From the Output pop-up menu, select the correct MIDI output. 4. Click Open Device. RESULT The device panel opens in a separate window. To edit the panel, click the Edit button, see the separate document MIDI Devices. Showing Device Panels in the Inspector PROCEDURE 1.
Using MIDI Devices Device Panels (Cubase Pro only) NOTE Note that Ctrl/Cmd-clicking the Open Device Panels button allows you to open a subpanel via the panel browser pop-up menu. Showing Device Panels in the MixConsole PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > MixConsole. 2. Click Racks to open the rack selector and activate Device Panels. 3. Click the arrow button to the right of the Panel header. A Panels folder is shown with the selected device in a node structure below it. 4. Select a panel from the list.
MIDI Functions MIDI functions allow you to permanently edit MIDI events or MIDI parts in the Project window or from within a MIDI editor. Which events are affected when you use a MIDI function depends on the function, the active window, and the current selection: ● In the Project window, the MIDI functions apply to all selected parts, affecting all events of the relevant types in them. ● In the MIDI editors, MIDI functions apply to all selected events.
MIDI Functions Merging MIDI Events into a New Part Scale Correction Transposes the selected notes to the closest note of a specific scale type. This allows you to change the key and the tonality. ● Select a root note and a scale type for the current scale in the Current Scale pop-up menus. ● Select a root note and a scale type for the new scale in the New Scale pop-up menus. NOTE If the new root note differs from the current root note, this leads to an entirely different key.
MIDI Functions Merging MIDI Events into a New Part RESULT A new part is created between the locators on the destination track, containing the processed MIDI events. RELATED LINKS MIDI Merge Options Dialog on page 778 Freezing MIDI Modifiers on page 761 MIDI Merge Options Dialog ● To open the MIDI Merge Options dialog, select a MIDI part, and select MIDI > Merge MIDI in Loop. The following options are available: Include Inserts Applies MIDI insert effects and MIDI modifiers.
MIDI Functions Dissolve Part Dialog Dissolve Part Dialog You can separate MIDI events in a part according to channels or pitches and dissolve the part to different tracks or lanes. ● To open the Dissolve Part dialog, select the MIDI part you want to dissolve and select MIDI > Dissolve Part. The following settings are available: Separate Channels Separates MIDI events according to their channel. This is useful for MIDI parts on MIDI channel Any that contain events on different MIDI channels.
MIDI Functions Bouncing MIDI Parts ● When you have imported a MIDI file of Type 0. MIDI files of Type 0 contain only one track, with notes on up to 16 different MIDI channels. If you were to set this track to a specific MIDI channel, all notes in the MIDI file would be played back with the same sound. Setting the track to Any causes the imported file to play back as intended.
MIDI Functions Repeating MIDI Events of Independent Track Loops RESULT The selected MIDI parts are combined to one part. Any muted parts are removed. Transpose and velocity values that are set for the parts are taken into account. Repeating MIDI Events of Independent Track Loops You can repeat the MIDI events inside an independent track loop to fill up a MIDI part. This is useful if you want to convert the events of an independent track loop to actual MIDI events.
MIDI Functions Fixing MIDI Note Velocities PROCEDURE 1. In the Key Editor toolbar, open the Length Quantize pop-up menu and select the desired note length. 2. Select the note events that you want to fix. 3. Select MIDI > Functions > Fixed Lengths. RESULT The selected note events are set to the specified Length Quantize value. RELATED LINKS Key Editor Toolbar on page 805 Fixing MIDI Note Velocities You can set the velocity of selected MIDI notes to the Note Insert Velocity value.
MIDI Functions Deleting Overlaps Deleting Overlaps You can delete overlaps of notes that have the same or different pitches. This is useful if your MIDI instruments cannot handle overlapping events. PROCEDURE 1. Select the note events. 2. Do one of the following: ● Select MIDI > Functions > Delete Overlaps (mono). ● Select MIDI > Functions > Delete Overlaps (poly). RESULT The overlapping MIDI notes are shortened, so that no note begins before another ends.
MIDI Functions Deleting Double Notes After compression, you can add a velocity amount to maintain the average velocity level. ● To expand the dynamic range, use ratio values above 100 %. Before expansion, you can adjust the velocity to the middle of the range. Limit Limits the velocity values so that they stay between the Lower and the Upper values. Deleting Double Notes You can delete double notes of the same pitch on the exact same position from selected MIDI parts.
MIDI Functions Thinning Out Controller Data 2. Select MIDI > Functions > Restrict Polyphony. 3. Specify how many voices you want to use. 4. Click OK. RESULT The notes are shortened as required, so that they end before the next note starts. Thinning Out Controller Data You can thin out controller data in selected MIDI parts. Use this to ease the load on your external MIDI devices if you have recorded very dense controller curves. PROCEDURE 1.
MIDI Functions Reversing the Playback Order of MIDI Events Reversing the Playback Order of MIDI Events You can invert the order of the selected events or of all events in selected part rhythmically. This causes the MIDI to play backwards. However, this is different from reversing an audio recording. The individual MIDI notes still play as usual, but the playback order changes. PROCEDURE 1. Select the MIDI events or the MIDI part. 2. Select MIDI > Functions > Reverse.
MIDI Editors There are several ways to edit MIDI in Cubase. You can use the tools and functions in the Project window for large-scale editing or the functions on the MIDI menu to process MIDI parts in various ways. To manually edit your MIDI data on a graphical interface, you can use the MIDI editors. ● The Key Editor presents notes graphically in a piano roll-style grid. The Key Editor also allows for detailed editing of non-note events such as MIDI controllers.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions Zooming in MIDI Editors The MIDI editors provide several zooming options: ● The zoom sliders. ● The Zoom tool. ● The Zoom submenu in the Edit menu. When you use the Zoom tool for zooming, you can determine if you want to zoom horizontal only or horizontal and vertical at a time. ● To activate/deactivate the corresponding option, activate/deactivate Zoom Tool Standard Mode: Horizontal Zooming Only in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Tools page).
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions Velocity The note events get different colors depending on their velocity values. Pitch The note events get different colors depending on their pitch. Channel The note events get different colors depending on their MIDI channel value. Part The note events get the same color as their corresponding part in the Project window. Use this option if you are working with 2 or more tracks in an editor, to see which note events belong to which track.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions Select Submenu for Note Events The Select submenu offers you several options to select note events. ● To open the Select submenu for a note event, select the note event, and select Edit > Select. All Selects all note events in the edited part. None Deselects all note events. Invert Inverts the selection. All selected note events are deselected and all notes that were not selected are selected instead.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions ● To unmute a note event, click it or enclose it with the Mute tool. You can also select a note event and select Edit > Unmute. Muted notes are dimmed in the note display. Toggle Selections ● To toggle selected elements within a selection rectangle, press Ctrl/Cmd and enclose the same elements within a new selection rectangle. Once you release the mouse button, the previous selection is deselected and vice versa.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions You can also press Alt and drag the right edge of the note events to the right to create copies of the note events. Finding Exact Positions with Snap The Snap function restricts horizontal movement and positioning to certain positions. This helps you find exact positions in the note display when editing note events in a MIDI editor. Affected operations include moving, duplicating, drawing, sizing, etc. ● To activate/deactivate snap, click Snap.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions The part borders display the name of the active part. NOTE If the part that you open for editing is a shared copy, any editing that you perform affects all shared copies of this part. In the Project window, shared copies are indicated by an equal sign in the top right corner of the part. Looping MIDI Parts The Independent Track Loop function allows you to loop a MIDI part independent of the project playback.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions The controller display with lanes. ● To add a controller lane, click Create Controller Lane or open the Controller Selection and Functions menu and select Create Controller Lane. ● To remove a controller lane, open the Controller Selection and Functions pop-up menu and select Remove this Lane. This hides the lane from view. It does not affect the events in any way. If you remove all lanes, the controller display is hidden.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions Setting up Available Continuous Controllers In the MIDI Controller Setup dialog, you can specify which continuous controllers are available for selection. NOTE The MIDI Controller Setup dialog can be opened from different areas in the program. The settings are global, that is, the setup you choose here affects all areas of the program where MIDI controllers can be selected. PROCEDURE 1. Select Controller Selection and Functions > Setup. 2.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions NOTE In the Key Editor, you can also add modulation controller events (CC1) by copying note events from the event display and pasting them on the controller lane. Editing Events in the Controller Display All controller values can be edited with the Draw tool or the Line tool. If you have selected more than one controller event on a controller lane, the controller lane editor is displayed.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions Editing Events in the Controller Display Using the Line Tool You can draw and edit events in the controller display with the Line tool. Line Mode In Line mode, you can draw events in a straight line. ● To draw a straight line in the controller display, click where you want the ramp to start and drag the cursor to where you want the ramp to end. NOTE If Snap is activated, the Length Quantize value determines the density of created controller curves.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions NOTE If Length Quantize is set to Quantize Link and you enter data in Sine, Triangle or Square mode, the density of the events depends on the zoom factor. You can use modifier keys to determine the shape of the curve. ● To change the phase of the beginning of the curve, press Ctrl/Cmd. ● To change the position of the whole curve, press Alt-Ctrl/Cmd.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions ● To step through the available dynamics symbols, use the mouse wheel or the One down and One up key commands. If several events are selected, they all change in increments, that is, relative to the original values. ● To modify the settings for the dynamics symbols, open the Controller Selection and Functions pop-up menu and select Dynamics Mapping Setup. Moving and copying dynamics events is identical to working with other events on the controller lane.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions 1 The controller curve before the part starts. This curve depends on the existing controller data and on the selected merge mode. 2 Controller curve entered on the controller lane. 3 Resulting controller curve if controller automation was also recorded on a track. These values depend on the selected automation merge mode. On the controller lane, you can also see the controller curve that is applied before the part starts.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions Controller Event Editor The controller event editor allows you to perform additional scaling operations for selection ranges on existing controller curves. ● To open the controller event editor, activate the Object Selection tool and drag a selection rectangle on the controller lane.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions Editing in the Controller Lane Editor The controller lane editor allows you to perform additional scaling operations for selection ranges on controller curves. ● To open the controller lane editor, use the Object Selection tool to create a selection rectangle on the controller lane, encompassing the controller events that you want to edit. For velocity lanes, press Alt to get the Object Selection tool.
MIDI Editors Key Editor You can also delete notes by deleting their velocity bars in the controller display. If there is more than one note at the same position, there may still only be one velocity bar visible. Make sure that you delete only the desired notes. Selecting Controllers within the Note Range A note range lasts until the start of the next note or the end of the part. Selected controllers for notes are moved when the corresponding notes are moved.
MIDI Editors Key Editor The Key Editor in the lower zone of the Project window: The Key Editor is divided into several sections: 1 Toolbar Contains tools and settings. 2 Status line Informs about the mouse time position, the mouse note position, and the current chord. 3 Info line Displays note event information about a selected MIDI note.
MIDI Editors Key Editor 4 Ruler Displays the timeline. 5 Inspector Contains tools and functions for working with MIDI data. 6 Note display Contains a grid in which MIDI notes are displayed as boxes. 7 Controller display The area below the note display consists of one or multiple controller lanes. NOTE You can activate/deactivate the status line, the info line, and the controller lanes by clicking Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activating/deactivating the corresponding options.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Auto-Scroll Keeps the project cursor visible during playback. Select Auto-Scroll Settings Allows you to activate Page Scroll or Stationary Cursor and to activate Suspend Auto-Scroll When Editing. Acoustic Feedback Acoustic Feedback Automatically plays back events when you move or transpose them, or when you create them by drawing. Tool Buttons Object Selection Selects events and parts. Draw Draws events. Erase Deletes events. Trim Trims events. Split Splits events.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Line Creates a series of contiguous events. Auto Select Controllers Auto Select Controllers Automatically selects controller data of the selected MIDI notes. Independent Track Loop Independent Track Loop Activates/Deactivates the independent track loop. NOTE If you activate Independent Track Loop, the Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors function is automatically deactivated in the lower zone editor.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Moves the selected event to the right. Trim End Left Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the left. Trim End Right Increases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the right. Transpose Palette Move Up Transposes the selected event up by a half note. Move Down Transposes the selected event down by a half note. Move Up More Transposes the selected event up by an octave. Move Down More Transposes the selected event down by an octave.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Grid Type Allows you to select one of the following grid types: ● Use Quantize activates a grid where events snap to the value that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu. ● Adapt to Zoom activates a grid where events snap to the zoom level. Quantize Apply Quantize Applies the quantize settings. Quantize Presets Allows you to select a quantize or a groove preset. Iterative Quantize On/Off Activates/Deactivates iterative quantize.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Activates/Deactivates MIDI input and note expression MIDI input. Move Insert Mode Moves all note events to the right of the step input position to the right to make room for the inserted event when you insert notes. NOTE This only works if Step Input is activated. Record Pitch Includes the pitch when you insert notes. Record NoteOn Velocity Includes the NoteOn velocity when you insert notes. Record NoteOff Velocity Includes the NoteOff velocity when you insert notes.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Set up Window Layout Allows you to set up the window layout. Set up Toolbar Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which toolbar elements are visible. RELATED LINKS Zooming in MIDI Editors on page 788 Status Line The status line shows information about the mouse time position, the mouse note position, and the current chord. ● To show the status line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate Status Line.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Key Editor Inspector In a MIDI editor, the Inspector is located left of the note display. The Inspector contains tools and functions for working with MIDI data. Expression Map (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to load an expression map. Expression maps are useful for working with articulations. Note Expression (Cubase Pro only) Contains functions and settings related to Note Expression. Chord Editing Allows you to enter chords instead of single notes.
MIDI Editors Key Editor RELATED LINKS Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) on page 873 Note Expression Inspector Section on page 891 Quantize Panel on page 297 Transpose Functions on page 327 Opening the Editor Inspector on page 56 Note Display The note display is the main area in the Key Editor. It contains a grid in which note events are shown as boxes. The width of a box corresponds to the note length.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations Events other than velocity values are shown as blocks. The block corresponds to the event values. The beginning of an event is marked by a curve point. NOTE Unlike note events, controller events have no length. The value of a controller event in the display is valid until the beginning of the next controller event. Key Editor Operations This section describes the principal editing operations within the Key Editor.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations ● To draw a note, click in the note display. The note event has the length that is set on the Length Quantize pop-up menu. ● To draw longer note events, click and drag in the note display. The length of the note event is a multiple of the Length Quantize value. If Length Quantize is set to Quantize Link, the note value is determined by the quantize grid. The Snap function is taken into account.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations Line Tool Modes The Line tool allows you to create a series of contiguous note events along different line shapes. You can also edit multiple controller events simultaneously. ● To open the Line tool modes, click Line. The following line modes are available: Line If this option is activated, you can click and drag to insert note events in the note display along a straight line in any angle.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations RELATED LINKS Transpose Setup Dialog on page 776 Resizing Note Events Do one of the following: ● To resize the note event, position the Object Selection tool at the start or the end of a note event and drag the mouse cursor to the left or right.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations If several notes are selected, they are all split at the same position. The snap setting is taken into account. ● To split all notes that are intersected by the project cursor position, select Edit > Functions > Split at Cursor. ● To split all notes that are intersected by the left or right locator at the locator positions, select Edit > Functions > Split Loop. Gluing Note Events You can glue together note events of the same pitch.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations Chord Editing Section The Chord Editing section in the Inspector allows you to insert and edit chords, and change voicings. Chord Type Shows the chord type of the selected chords. Add to Chord Track Adds the chord indicated in the Chord Type field to the chord track. The chord event is inserted at the position on the chord track that corresponds to the position of the MIDI notes. Any existing chord events at this position are overwritten.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations Drop Notes - Move the third highest note an octave lower Moves the third highest note of a chord down by one octave. Drop Notes - Move the second and fourth highest notes an octave lower Moves the second and fourth highest notes of a chord down by one octave. Create Chord Symbols Performs a chord analysis of the selected notes. If nothing is selected, the whole MIDI part is analyzed.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations ● In the note event if the zoom factor is high enough. ● When dragging a note event. Expression Map Handling (Cubase Pro only) When an expression map is assigned to a MIDI track, the musical articulations that are defined for that map are displayed in the following locations of the Key Editor: ● On the info line in the Articulations field. ● On the controller lane. ● In the note event if the vertical zoom factor is high enough.
MIDI Editors Basic Score Editor (Cubase Artist only) For example, you can include the note-on velocity and/or note-off velocity of the played notes. You can also deactivate the pitch property, in which case all notes get a pitch C3, no matter what you play. 3. Click anywhere in the note display to set the start position of the first note event or chord. The step input position is shown as a vertical line in the note display. 4.
MIDI Editors Basic Score Editor (Cubase Artist only) NOTE If you select MIDI > Set up Editor Preferences, the Preferences dialog opens on the Editors page. Make your settings to specify if you want editors to open in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window. The Score Editor window: The Score Editor in the lower zone of the Project window: The Score Editor is divided into several sections: 1 Toolbar Contains tools and settings.
MIDI Editors Basic Score Editor (Cubase Artist only) 4 Extended toolbar Contains note value buttons and enharmonic shift buttons. ● To open one or several parts in the Score Editor, select one or several tracks or any number of parts, and select MIDI > Open Score Editor. If you have selected parts on several tracks, you get one staff for each track. The staves are tied together by barlines and placed in the order of the tracks in the Project window.
MIDI Editors Basic Score Editor (Cubase Artist only) Inserts notes. Erase Deletes events. Split Splits events. Glue Glues together events of the same pitch. Insert Text Inserts text. Insert Velocity Note Insert Velocity Allows you to specify a velocity value for new notes. Snap Snap Type Allows you to select one of the following snap types: ● Grid snaps events to the grid that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu. ● Grid Relative keeps the relative positions when snapping events to the grid.
MIDI Editors Basic Score Editor (Cubase Artist only) Length Quantize Length Quantize Allows you to set a value for quantizing event lengths. Step/MIDI Input Computer Keyboard Input Activates/Deactivates computer keyboard input. Step Input Activates/Deactivates MIDI step input. MIDI Input Activates/Deactivates MIDI input and note expression MIDI input. Move Insert Mode Moves all note events to the right of the step input position to the right to make room for the inserted event when you insert notes.
MIDI Editors Basic Score Editor (Cubase Artist only) Open in Lower Zone This button is available in the editor window. It opens the editor in the lower zone of the Project window. Show/Hide Left Zone Shows/Hides the left zone. Set up Window Layout Allows you to set up the window layout. Set up Toolbar Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which toolbar elements are visible. Status Line The status line is displayed below the toolbar.
MIDI Editors Basic Score Editor (Cubase Artist only) RELATED LINKS Changing the Ruler Display Format on page 787 Score Editor Extended Toolbar The extended toolbar contains note value buttons and enharmonic shift buttons. ● To show the extended toolbar, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate Tools. Note Value Buttons Allows you to select a note value for input. The dotted note values.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations (Cubase Artist only) ● To change the active staff, click on the staff that you want to activate. Score Editor Operations (Cubase Artist only) This section describes the principal editing operations within the Score Editor. Improving the Score Display When you open the Score Editor for a part that was recorded in real time, the score may not look as legible as you expect. The Score Editor can ignore the minor time variances in performance and make a neater score.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations (Cubase Artist only) ● In Split mode, the part is split on the screen into a bass and treble clef, as in a piano score. The Split Point value determines where you want the split to occur. Notes above and including the split note appear on the upper staff, and notes below the split note appear on the lower staff. Display Quantize This section allows you to change the way Cubase displays scores.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations (Cubase Artist only) Auto Clef If this option is activated, Cubase attempts to guess the correct clef, judging from the pitch of the music. Display Transpose In this section, you can specify a separate display transpose setting for each staff (track). This transposes the notes in the score without affecting how the notes are played back. This allows you to record and play back a multi staff arrangement and still score each instrument according to its own transposition.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations (Cubase Artist only) Quantize Value When you move the mouse pointer over the score, the Mouse Time Position field on the status line tracks your movement and shows the current position in bars, beats, 16th notes, and ticks. The quantize value controls the positioning on screen. If you set the value to 1/8, you can only insert and move notes to 8th note positions, at quarter notes, at half bars, or at bar positions.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations (Cubase Artist only) Moving and Transposing Notes PROCEDURE 1. Open the Quantize Presets pop-up menu on the toolbar and select a quantize value. 2. If you want to hear the pitch of the note while moving, activate Acoustic Feedback on the toolbar. 3. Select the notes that you want to move. 4. Click one of the selected notes and drag it to a new position and/or pitch. The horizontal movement of the note snaps to the current quantize value.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations (Cubase Artist only) Enharmonic Shift You can perform an enharmonic shift on notes that are not displayed with the accidentals you wish. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes that you want to shift. 2. Click one of the enharmonic shift buttons on the extended toolbar. RELATED LINKS Score Editor Extended Toolbar on page 828 Flipping Stems The direction of the note stems is automatically selected according to the note pitches. However, you can change this manually.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations (Cubase Artist only) Changing the Text Font, Size, and Style You can change the font, size, and style of the text that you have added to the score display. PROCEDURE 1. Do one of the following: ● To change the settings for a specific text block, click on the text with the Object Selection tool. ● To set the default settings for all new text blocks, unselect any selected text block and change the settings. 2. Select MIDI > Scores > Set Font. 3.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor IMPORTANT If you change your setting for paper size, scale, and margins now, the score may change its look. 3. Click OK. 4. Select File > Print. 5. In the Print dialog, make your settings. 6. Click Print. Drum Editor The Drum Editor is the editor to use when you are editing drum or percussion parts. You can open the Drum Editor in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor The Drum Editor in the lower zone of the Project window: The Drum Editor is divided into several sections: 1 Toolbar Contains tools and settings. 2 Status line Informs about the mouse time position and the mouse note position.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor 3 Info line Displays information about the selected event. 4 Inspector Contains tools and functions for working with MIDI data. 5 Drum sound list Lists all drum sounds. 6 Drum map Lets you select the drum map for the edited track or a list of drum sound names. 7 Ruler Displays the time line. 8 Note display Contains a grid in which notes are displayed. 9 Controller display The area below the note display consists of one or multiple controller lanes.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Allows you to use the left divider. Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown. Drum Sound Visibility Drum Visibility Agents Allows you to determine which drum sounds are displayed in the drum sound list. Auto-Scroll Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors Links timelines, cursors, and zoom factors of the lower zone editor and the Project window. NOTE You cannot activate Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors if Independent Track Loop is active.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Zoom Zooms in. Hold Alt and click to zoom out. Time Warp (Cubase Pro only) Adjusts musical positions of events to time positions. Line Creates a series of contiguous events. Auto Select Controllers Auto Select Controllers Automatically selects controller data of the selected MIDI notes. Independent Track Loop Independent Track Loop Activates/Deactivates the independent track loop.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Transpose Palette Move Up Transposes the selected event up by a half note. Move Down Transposes the selected event down by a half note. Move Up More Transposes the selected event up by an octave. Move Down More Transposes the selected event down by an octave. Insert Velocity Note Insert Velocity Allows you to specify a velocity value for new notes. Notes Length Insert Length Allows you to determine a length for newly created notes.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor ● Events + Cursor snaps events to the start or end of other events, or to the cursor position. ● Grid + Events + Cursor snaps events to the quantize grid that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu, to the start or end of other events or to the cursor position. Grid Type Allows you to select one of the following grid types: ● Use Quantize activates a grid where events snap to the value that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Step/MIDI Input Step Input Activates/Deactivates MIDI step input. MIDI Input/Note Expression MIDI Input Activates/Deactivates MIDI input and note expression MIDI input. Move Insert Mode Moves all note events to the right of the step input position to the right to make room for the inserted event when you insert notes. NOTE This only works if Step Input is activated. Record Pitch Includes the pitch when you insert notes.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Show/Hide Left Zone Shows/Hides the left zone. Show/Hide Controller Lanes Shows/Hides the controller lanes. Set up Window Layout Allows you to set up the window layout. Set up Toolbar Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which toolbar elements are visible. RELATED LINKS Zooming in MIDI Editors on page 788 Status Line The status line is displayed below the toolbar. It displays important mouse information.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Length and position values are displayed in the selected ruler display format. The on/off status of the info line in the Drum Editor window and in the lower zone editor are independent of each other. RELATED LINKS Editing Note Events on the Info Line on page 791 Drum Editor Inspector The Inspector is located to the left of the note display. The Inspector contains tools and functions for working with MIDI data. Expression Map (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to load an expression map.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Transpose Functions on page 327 Opening the Editor Inspector on page 56 Note Display The note display of the Drum Editor contains a grid in which note events are shown. The notes are displayed as diamond symbols. If you activate Show Note Length On/Off on the toolbar, notes are displayed as boxes and show the note length. The vertical position of the notes corresponds to the drum sound list to the left, while the horizontal position corresponds to the note’s position in time.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Events other than velocity values are shown as blocks. The block corresponds to the event values. The beginning of an event is marked by a curve point. When you select a line in the drum sound list, only the velocity controller events that belong to the note events on this line are displayed in the controller display. If you select more than one line in the drum sound list, the controller lane shows all velocity controller events for all notes on the selected lines.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor NOTE The number of columns in the list depends on whether a drum map is selected for the track or not. Pitch Note number of the drum sound. Instrument Name of the drum sound. Snap This is used when entering and editing notes. Mute Allows you to mute drum sounds. I-Note Input note for the drum sound. When you play this note, it is mapped to the corresponding drum sound and automatically transposed according to the Pitch setting for the sound.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Operations Drum Map and Names Menus Below the drum sound list are pop-up menus that are used for selecting a drum map for the edited track or, if no drum map is selected, a list of drum sound names. RELATED LINKS Drum Maps on page 852 Drum Editor Operations This section describes the general editing operations within the Drum Editor. Inserting Note Events You can insert note events with the Object Selection tool or the Drumstick tool.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Operations NOTE If you want to snap positions according to the Quantize Presets setting on the toolbar, activate Use Quantize. PROCEDURE ● Perform one of the following actions: ● On the toolbar, select the Object Selection tool, double-click in the event display and drag to the right. ● On the toolbar, select the Drumstick tool, click in the event display and drag to the right. RESULT The note events are inserted.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Operations RESULT The note length is changed. Snap is taken into account. Deleting Note Events PROCEDURE ● Perform one of the following actions: ● Select the Erase tool and click the event. ● Select the Object Selection tool and double-click the event. ● Select the Drumstick tool and click the event. RESULT The note event is deleted. Deleting Multiple Note Events You can delete multiple note events of the same pitch with the Object Selection tool or the Drumstick tool.
MIDI Editors Drum Maps RELATED LINKS Selecting a Drum Map for a Track on page 855 Drum Maps A drum kit in a MIDI instrument is most often a set of different drum sounds with each sound placed on a separate key. For example, the different sounds are assigned to different MIDI note numbers. One key plays a bass drum sound, another a snare, and so on. Different MIDI instruments often use different key assignments.
MIDI Editors Drum Maps The list on the left shows the loaded drum maps. The sounds and settings of the selected drum map are displayed on the right. NOTE The settings for the drum sounds are the same as in the Drum Editor. Use Head Pairs (Cubase Pro only) If this option is activated, 2 head symbols for each drum sound are displayed in the drum sound list. Edit in Scores (Cubase Pro only) If this option is activated, you can change the settings for the score drum map directly in the score.
MIDI Editors Drum Maps Drum Map Settings A drum map consists of settings for 128 drum sounds, one for each MIDI note number. ● To get an overview of the drum map settings, open the Drum Editor and use the Map pop-up menu below the drum sound list to select the GM Map drum map. The GM map is set up according to the General MIDI standard. You can change all drum map settings except the pitch directly in the drum sound list or in the Drum Map Setup dialog.
MIDI Editors Drum Maps ● To make a drum sound use the channel of the track, set the channel in the drum map to Any. ● To make the sound use the MIDI output that is selected for the track, set the MIDI output for a sound in a drum map to Default. ● To send the sound to a specific MIDI output, select any other option. ● To select the same MIDI channel or MIDI device for all sounds in a drum map, click in the Channel column, press Ctrl/Cmd, and select a channel or output.
MIDI Editors List Editor O-Notes (Output Notes) The next step is the output. This is what happens when you play back the recorded note, or when the note you play is sent back out to a MIDI instrument in real time (MIDI Thru): The program checks the drum map and finds the drum sound with the pitch of the note. In our case, this is a C1 note and the drum sound is the bass drum.
MIDI Editors List Editor The List Editor is divided into several sections: 1 Toolbar 2 Status line 3 Event list 4 Filters bar 5 Ruler 6 Event display 7 Value display NOTE The filters, the status line, and the value display can be activated/deactivated by clicking Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activating/deactivating the corresponding options. List Editor Toolbar The toolbar contains tools and various settings for the List Editor.
MIDI Editors List Editor Record in Editor Enables the recording of MIDI data in the editor if the editor has the focus. NOTE This only works if MIDI Record Mode is set to Merge or Replace. Auto-Scroll Auto-Scroll Keeps the project cursor visible during playback. Select Auto-Scroll Settings Allows you to activate Page Scroll or Stationary Cursor and to activate Suspend Auto-Scroll When Editing.
MIDI Editors List Editor Independent Track Loop Independent Track Loop Activates/Deactivates the independent track loop. Insert Type Insert Event Type Allows you to determine an event type for newly created events. Insert Velocity Note Insert Velocity Allows you to specify a velocity value for new notes. Nudge Palette Trim Start Left Increases the length of the selected event by moving its start to the left. Trim Start Right Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its start to the right.
MIDI Editors List Editor ● Grid snaps events to the grid that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu. ● Grid Relative keeps the relative positions when snapping events to the grid. ● Events snaps events to the start or end of other events. ● Shuffle changes the order of events if you drag one event to the left or right of other events. ● Cursor snaps events to the cursor position.
MIDI Editors List Editor Step/MIDI Input Step Input Activates/Deactivates MIDI step input. MIDI Input/Note Expression MIDI Input Activates/Deactivates MIDI input and note expression MIDI input. Move Insert Mode Moves all note events to the right of the step input position to the right to make room for the inserted event when you insert notes. NOTE This only works if Step Input is activated. Record Pitch Includes the pitch when you insert notes.
MIDI Editors List Editor Show/Hide Right Zone Shows/Hides the right zone. Set up Window Layout Allows you to set up the window layout. Set up Toolbar Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which toolbar elements are visible. RELATED LINKS Setup Options on page 1095 Status Line The status line is displayed below the toolbar. It displays important information about the mouse position. ● To show the status line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate Status Line.
MIDI Editors List Editor Event Types Only events of the same event type as the selected type will be shown. This is the same as activating event types in the Hide section. Event Types and Data 1 Only events of the same event type as the selected type and with the same Data 1 value are shown. For example, if a note event is selected, only notes with the same pitch are shown. If a controller event is selected, only controllers of the same type are shown.
MIDI Editors List Editor End Allows you to view and edit the end position of a note event. Editing resizes the note event. Length Displays the length of the note event. Changing this resizes the note event and automatically changes the End value. Data 1 Data 1 or Value 1 property of the event. Its content depends on the event type. For notes, this is the pitch, for example. Where applicable, the values are displayed in the most relevant form.
MIDI Editors List Editor Operations Value Display The value display to the right of the event display is a tool for quick viewing and editing of multiple values, for example, velocities or controller amounts. The values are shown as horizontal bars, with the bar length corresponding to the value. ● To show the value display, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate Value Display. The value that is displayed for an event depends on the event type.
MIDI Editors List Editor Operations ● To change the event type that you want to draw, select it from the Insert Event Type popup menu. ● To draw an event, click in the event display. The note event gets the length that is set on the Length Quantize pop-up menu. Notes get the insert velocity value set in the Note Insert Velocity field on the toolbar. ● To draw longer note events, click and drag in the event display. The length of the event is a multiple of the Length Quantize value.
MIDI Editors List Editor Operations NOTE When you trim the beginning of a note in the List Editor, the note may move to a different position in the list, since other events may begin earlier than the edited event. RELATED LINKS SysEx Messages on page 867 Editing in the Event Display The event display allows you to edit the events graphically using the tools on the toolbar. You can edit single events as well as several selected events simultaneously. ● To move an event, drag it to a new position.
MIDI Editors List Editor Operations Bulk Dumps In any programmable device, the settings are saved as numbers in computer memory. If you change these numbers, you will change the settings. Normally, MIDI devices allow you to dump (transmit) all or some settings in the device’s memory in the form of MIDI SysEx messages. A dump is therefore, among other things, a way of making backup copies of the settings of your instrument: sending such a dump back to the MIDI device restores the settings.
MIDI Editors List Editor Operations ● If the dump is very short, for example, a single sound, you can put the dump in the middle of the project to quickly re-program a device. However, you can achieve the same effect by using Program Change. This is preferable, since less MIDI data is sent and recorded. Some devices may be set up to dump the settings for a sound as soon as you select it on the front panel. ● If you create parts with useful SysEx dumps, you can put these on a special muted track.
MIDI Editors In-Place Editor 0-7 Shows the entire message in hexadecimal format. SysEx messages always begin with F0 and end with F7 and a number of arbitrary bytes in between. If the message contains more bytes, so that they do not entirely fit on one line, it continues on the next line. You can edit all values except for the first (F0) and the last ones (F7). ASCII Shows the selected value in ASCII format. Adding and Deleting Bytes ● To add a byte, open the MIDI SysEx Editor and click Insert.
MIDI Editors In-Place Editor The In-Place Editor expands the MIDI track to show a miniature Key Editor. When you select a MIDI note, the Project window info line shows the same information about the note as the info line in the Key Editor. You can perform the same editing here as in the Key Editor. RELATED LINKS Editing Note Events on the Info Line on page 791 Opening the In-Place Editor ● To open the In-Place Editor for the selected tracks, select MIDI > Open In-Place Editor.
MIDI Editors In-Place Editor Allows you to display the transposed pitches of MIDI notes. Auto Select Controllers Auto Select Controllers Automatically selects controller data of the selected MIDI notes. Insert Velocity Note Insert Velocity Allows you to specify a velocity value for new notes. Length Quantize Length Quantize Allows you to set a value for quantizing event lengths. Event Colors Event Colors Allows you to select event colors.
Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) Expression maps allow you to set up a map for all your articulations. This allows you to audition a project including articulations. You can select expression maps in the Inspector for MIDI or instrument tracks, and specify the sound mapping and characteristics for all your articulations. If you select an expression map for a MIDI or instrument track, the articulations defined in the map are automatically applied during playback.
Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) Articulations Articulations Musical articulations define how specific notes are sung or performed on a given instrument. They can also define the relative volume of notes or the changes in pitch. The following articulation types are available: ● Directions Directions, such as pizzicato, are valid for all notes from their insert position, to the insert position of the next direction. They are applied to a continuous range of notes, or even an entire piece of music.
Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) Creating and Editing Expression Maps 2 Sound Slots Shows the sound slots that correspond to the expression map that is selected in the Expression Maps section. 3 Output Mapping Shows the output mapping that corresponds to the sound slot that is selected in the Sound Slots section. 4 Articulations Allows you to organize articulations in groups. 5 Remote Settings Allows you to set up remote keys for triggering articulations via a MIDI input device.
Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) Creating and Editing Expression Maps The Expression Map Setup opens. 4. In the Expression Maps section, click Add Map to create a new map. 5. Optional: Click the name to enter a custom name for the expression map. Adding Sound Slots You must create sound slots for each articulation that you want to add. PREREQUISITE The Expression Map Setup window is open and an expression map is selected in the Expression Maps section. PROCEDURE 1. 2.
Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) Creating and Editing Expression Maps 5. Click the Remote column for the sound slot and specify the key on your external device that triggers this sound slot. 6. Optional: Click the Col column to assign a color to the sound slot. When working in the MIDI editors, you can color your events according to the color of the sound slots. RESULT The sound slots are added and the articulations are available. You can create as many sound slots as you need.
Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) Creating and Editing Expression Maps which matches most criteria. If two sounds are found which have the same articulation in group 1, the sound that also matches group 2 is preferred and so on. Output Mapping Section The Output Mapping section allows you to map sound slots to specific sound characters of an instrument. The available sounds depend on the instrument that is selected for the MIDI or instrument track.
Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) Creating and Editing Expression Maps Min. Velocity/Max. Velocity Allows you to specify a minimum and a maximum velocity for the selected sound slot, to make sure that the sample mapped to a particular range is used. This way, you can use instruments that have different velocity ranges on the same key. Remote Settings Section The remote settings allow you to specify key switches or program change messages to trigger specific sound slots.
Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) Creating and Editing Expression Maps Set Remote Keys Dialog The Set Remote Keys dialog allows you to assign a range of keys on your external device to the sound slots in the expression map. ● To open the Set Remote Keys dialog, click the Set Remote Keys button in the Expression Map Setup dialog. The following options are available: Start Key Allows you to specify the first key on the MIDI input device that you want to trigger a sound slot.
Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) Creating and Editing Expression Maps 6. Make your settings, enter a name for the map, and click Save. RESULT The expression map is saved and you can load it from the Select Expression Map for the track pop-up menu in the Expression Map section of the Inspector. RELATED LINKS Creating Expression Maps on page 875 Track Presets on page 198 Saving Expression Maps If you have created and set up your expression map, you must save it. PROCEDURE 1.
Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) Inserting Articulations 4. In the file dialog, locate and select the expression map that you want to load, and click Open. The expression map is now available in the Expression Maps section. 5. Repeat the steps for all the maps that you want to make available, and close the dialog. RESULT All loaded maps are available on the Expression Map pop-up menu in the Inspector.
Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) Inserting Articulations Inserting Articulations in the Score Editor You can insert articulation symbols in the Score Editor. PROCEDURE 1. Select the MIDI part. 2. Select Scores > Open Score Editor. 3. In the Symbols Inspector, open the Expression Map section. 4. Activate the articulation symbol, and click at the desired position in the note display. IMPORTANT When you insert articulation symbols, make sure that they do not conflict with other articulations.
Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) Inserting Articulations Inserting Articulations in the List Editor You can insert articulation symbols via the comment column of the List Editor. This only works if your MIDI part already contains some articulation symbols. PROCEDURE 1. Select a MIDI note in the event display of the List Editor. 2. Click the Comment column to open a pop-up menu with all note attributes that are available in the expression map, and select the desired attribute.
Note Expression Note expression allows you to edit MIDI notes and their expressions as one unit. Note expression allows you to associate expression events with MIDI notes, so that they are treated as a unit. When you quantize, move, copy, duplicate, or delete MIDI notes, all their associated controller information follows. This allows for an intuitive and accurate editing of note-related data.
Note Expression VST Note Expressions VST Note Expressions VST note expressions are note-specific. They are suitable for polyphonic contexts, as they allow you to edit the expression of each individual note in a chord. VST note expressions are provided by VST instruments. To be able to work with VST note expressions, you need a VST instrument that supports them, such as HALion Sonic SE. Which VST note expressions are available depends on the instrument.
Note Expression MIDI Controllers notes. In this scenario, MIDI channel 1 controls all notes whereas the other 15 MIDI channels can control individual notes. NOTE To use MIDI controllers to control individual notes, you must set the MIDI channel of the track to Any.
Note Expression MIDI Controllers Cubase allows you to capture three dimensions of input movements polyphonically. The Note Expression Input Device page provides the sections Pressure, Horizontal/X, and Vertical/Y that allow you to view, and if needed, edit which MIDI messages are used for these three dimensions of control. The following options are available: MIDI Input Allows you to select the MIDI input port to which your input device is connected.
Note Expression MIDI Controllers Transmits the absolute position. This corresponds to the following initial values: Absolute: On (Sensel Morph), Relative: Off (LinnStrument). ● Center (64) Transmits the center value first. Input movements cause the value to increase or decrease. This corresponds to the following initial values: Absolute: Off (Sensel Morph), Relative: On (LinnStrument).
Note Expression MIDI Controllers Multi-Channel Input Mode Allows you to choose a multichannel input mode. The following options are available: ● MPE Mode Activates MPE mode, and sets channel 1 as base channel. ● Channel Rotation Activates channel rotation, and assigns individual MIDI channels to incoming MIDI notes and their controller messages. This allows a 16-voice polyphony. For this to work, your input controller must support channel rotation.
Note Expression Note Expression Inspector Section As Recommended by Instrument Automatically assigns all note expressions to input movements according to the recommendations of the instrument, if available. Volume Assigns the note expression Volume to an input movement. Pan Assigns the note expression Pan to an input movement. Tuning Assigns the note expression Tuning to an input movement. MIDI PolyPressure Assigns the note expression MIDI PolyPressure to an input movement.
Note Expression Note Expression Inspector Section The following sections are available: 1 Section header/Bypass button Shows the section name. The bypass button allows you to bypass all note expression data for the track. 2 Expression section Lists the available VST note expressions, MIDI controllers, pitchbend, aftertouch and polypressure. 3 Expression settings section Allows you to make settings for the expression that is selected in the expression section.
Note Expression Note Expression Inspector Section 1 In Shows the abbreviation of the MIDI control change message or the input movement that is mapped to the expression for recording. 2 Expression filter Allows you to filter the list of expressions. 3 Visibility Shows/Hides the expression in the note expression event editor and in the event display. 4 VST note expressions Lists the available VST note expressions. 5 MIDI controllers Lists the available MIDI controllers.
Note Expression Note Expression Tools Expression Settings Section In this section, you can make settings for the expression that is selected in the expression section, for example, set up the input assignment. The expression settings are available in the Note Expression section of the Inspector. ● To open the Note Expression section, select a MIDI or an instrument track, and click Note Expression in the Inspector. 1 Color selector Allows you to specify a color for the selected expression.
Note Expression Controller Mapping Note Expression MIDI Input This button is available in the Step/MIDI Input section of the Key Editor toolbar. It allows you to record note expression data via MIDI input. Acoustic Feedback This button is available in the Acoustic Feedback section of the Key Editor toolbar. It gives you an acoustic feedback of the controller events that are present at the mouse position while you enter or change note expression data.
Note Expression Recording In the In column in the Inspector, the number of the assigned MIDI controller message, or PB for pitchbend, or AT for aftertouch is shown if the mapping is active. RELATED LINKS Global Settings Section on page 894 Mapping Controllers via MIDI Learn The MIDI Learn function allows you to assign the knobs and faders of your MIDI device to controllers. PROCEDURE 1. In the expression section, select the expression to which you want to assign a MIDI controller. 2.
Note Expression Recording Recording and the Sustain Pedal If you hold the sustain pedal (MIDI CC 64) of the connected MIDI device during recording, the following applies: ● When a note-off event is received (when the key on the connected keyboard is released), this message is not sent to the VST 3 instrument but is instead created by the program when the sustain pedal is released. This makes it possible for the VST 3 instrument to play back control change messages that are sent after a key was released.
Note Expression Recording PROCEDURE 1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Track . 2. Click Instrument. 3. Open the Instrument pop-up menu and select HALion Sonic SE, for example. 4. Click Add Track. The instrument track is added to the track list, and the control panel of the selected VST instrument is opened. 5. In the top section of the Inspector for the instrument track, open the Input Routing popup menu, and select your MPE input device from the list.
Note Expression Note Expression Event Editor Starting Overdub Recording at Specific Controller Values When you record note expression data by overdubbing, you can activate a Latch Buffer. This is useful if you want to start recording at predefined initial knob or fader settings. When Cubase receives controller data from an external MIDI device, the setting of the faders and knobs on the device is automatically written to the Latch Buffer. This data is then added to the notes during playback. PROCEDURE 1.
Note Expression Note Expression Event Editor NOTE If you select several notes in the Key Editor, and you double-click any of them, the note expression event editor opens for all these notes. In this case, any editing affects all the notes that are present at the time position where you perform the editing. ● To close the editor, click in the event display.
Note Expression Note Expression Event Editor Shows the selected parameter. Click this to open a pop-up menu with all the parameters that are used for the note. To make more parameters available, select them in the Inspector. Smart Controls The note expression event editor features the following smart controls for specific editing modes: 1 Tilt Left If you click in the upper left corner of the editor, you can tilt the left part of the curve.
Note Expression Note Expression Event Editor ● To navigate to the next/previous note, use the Left Arrow/Right Arrow keys. ● To step through the notes, press Tab and Shift-Tab. Adding Note Expression Events PROCEDURE 1. Double-click a note in the event display to open the note expression event editor. 2. Do one of the following to select the parameter that you want to make settings for: 3.
Note Expression Note Expression Event Editor 2. Select the note expression events that you want to copy. 3. Select Edit > Copy. 4. Select the note to which you want to paste the note expression events. 5. Press the key command that you assigned to the Paste Note Expression command. RESULT All copied note expression events are pasted to the selected note.
Note Expression Note Expression Event Editor RESULT The selected events are copied. Moving Note Expression Events PROCEDURE 1. Double-click the note that contains the note expression events to open the note expression event editor. 2. Open the Expression pop-up menu, and select the corresponding note expression from the list. 3. Do one of the following: ● Click the note expression event curve and drag to move all events.
Note Expression Trimming Note Expression Data Trimming Note Expression Data You can trim note expression data to automatically match the note length. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes that contain note expression data. 2. Select MIDI > Note Expression > Trim Note Expression to Note Length. RESULT The note expression data is trimmed to the note length, and any data present after the end of the release phase is deleted.
Note Expression Note Expression MIDI Setup Dialog The following options are available: Controller Activates MIDI control change messages. Specify the MIDI control change messages that you want to use in the list below. NOTE MIDI controller data for deactivated MIDI control change messages will end up on the controller lane. Pitchbend Activates pitchbend data. Aftertouch Activates aftertouch data. Poly Pressure Activates poly pressure data.
Note Expression Note Expression MIDI Setup Dialog Recording MIDI Control Change Messages as Note Expression Data You can record MIDI control change messages as note expression data. PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector, open the Note Expression section and activate MIDI as Note Expression. 2. Optional: Set the MIDI track to Any channel. MIDI control change messages, with the exception of poly pressure, are channel-specific.
Note Expression Note Expression MIDI Setup Dialog Adding Release Phases to Notes on page 904 Consolidating Note Expression Overlaps If you move or quantize notes so that they overlap, and if these overlapping notes contain data for the same control change message, you might need to consolidate the note expression overlaps. PROCEDURE ● Select MIDI > Note Expression > Consolidate Note Expression Overlaps.
Chord Functions The chord functions provide you with many possibilities for working with chords. The chord functions allow you to: ● Build chord progressions by adding chord events to the chord track. ● Convert chord events to MIDI. ● Use the chord track to control audio playback (Cubase Pro only) or MIDI playback. ● Use the chord track voicing to change the pitches of your MIDI. ● Extract chord events from MIDI data to get an overview of the harmonic structure of a MIDI file.
Chord Functions Chord Events RELATED LINKS Chord Track on page 160 Chord Events Chord events are representations of chords that control or transpose playback on MIDI, instrument, and audio tracks (Cubase Pro only). Chord events alter the pitches of MIDI notes and VariAudio segments (Cubase Pro only) if their tracks are set up to follow the chord track. Chord events have a specific start position. Their end, however, is determined by the start of the next chord event.
Chord Functions Chord Events NOTE This works only if the last chord event on the chord track is selected. 3 Chord definition buttons Activate these buttons to define a root note, a chord type, a tension, and a bass note for your chord event. NOTE If you do not select a separate bass note, the setting is linked to the root note, so that no extra bass note is heard. 4 Keyboard display Shows the notes of the chord event, considering the current voicing settings.
Chord Functions Chord Events ● Define a chord extension, for example, 7, 9, or 13. NOTE If you have activated Solfège in the Note Name pop-up menu in the Preferences dialog (Event Display—Chords&Pitches page), you can also enter chords in this format. You must capitalize the first letter and write “Re” instead of “re”, for example. Otherwise, the chord is not recognized. 4. Press Tab to add a new undefined chord and define it.
Chord Functions Chord Events 1 Go to Previous Chord/Go to Next Chord Allow you to select the previous/next chord on the chord track for editing. 2 Add Chord Adds a new undefined chord event on the chord track. NOTE This works only if the last chord event on the chord track is selected. 3 Suggestions list Shows suggestions for the next chord. Click a chord suggestion to select it. 4 Complexity filter Allows you to increase the complexity and thus the number of suggestions.
Chord Functions Chord Events 8 Chord Assistant tabs Click the tabs to open one of the chord assistant modes. Chord Assistant – Proximity (Cubase Pro only) The Proximity mode of the Chord Assistant takes a set of harmonic rules into account to offer suggestions that match the origin chord. If you open the Chord Assistant for a chord event, the previous event is set as origin chord. This is shown in the bottom center of the Chord Assistant.
Chord Functions Chord Events ● 5. To display the suggestions in a graphic, click the Proximity tab. Click a suggestion to select it. RESULT The suggested chord is added as a chord event to the chord track. Repeat the steps above to create as many chord events as required by your harmonic structure. Chord Assistant – Circle of Fifths The Circle of Fifths mode of the Chord Assistant shows the chords in an interactive visualization of the circle of fifths.
Chord Functions Chord Events ● To play a chord and assign it to the selected chord event, click it. The last 3 chords that you clicked are shown in bold. ● To define a new key, right-click the chord in the Chord Assistant and select Use as Origin, or use the Rotate Left/Rotate Right controls. ● To select the parallel minor chord and define it as key, click Major/Minor.
Chord Functions Scale Events RELATED LINKS Chord Track on page 160 Add Track Dialog – Instrument on page 112 Changing How Chord Events Are Displayed You can change how chord events are displayed. This is useful if chord events overlap each other at low zoom levels or if you do not like the font type. PROCEDURE 1. On the chord track, activate Resolve Display Conflicts. 2. In the Preferences dialog, select Event Display > Chords&Pitches, and set up the chord font.
Chord Functions Voicings ● Double-click the scale event, and in the keyboard that appears, select a Root Key and Type of the scale. The keys that correspond to the scale are highlighted. Voicings Voicings determine how chord events are set up. They define the vertical spacing and order of the pitches in a chord, but also the instrumentation and genre of a musical piece. For example, a C chord can be spread over a wide range of pitches, and a pianist will choose different notes than a guitarist.
Chord Functions Voicings Activate this to let Cubase set the voicings automatically. This prevents the individual voices from jumping too much. 5 Automatic Scales Activate this to let Cubase set the scales automatically. 6 Mapping Offset If you enter a negative number of ticks, the chord events will affect the MIDI notes that have been triggered too early.
Chord Functions Converting Chord Events to MIDI Lowest Note Sets the limit for the lowest note, except the root note. Highest Note Sets the limit for the highest note, except the root note. In the Style section for Guitar voicings, you can set up the following parameters: Triads Sets a triad with 4, 5 or 6 voices. 4-Note Chords Sets a 4-note chord with 4, 5 or 6 voices without tensions. 3-String Triads Sets a 3-string triad.
Chord Functions Controlling MIDI or Audio Playback Using the Chord Track PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector for the MIDI or instrument track, open the MIDI Inserts section. 2. Click an insert slot and select Chorder from the Effect Type pop-up menu. The Chorder effect is activated, and its control panel opens. 3. On the chord track, select the chord events and drag them to the Chorder control panel. The drop position determines the velocity area and the position of the first chord event.
Chord Functions Controlling MIDI or Audio Playback Using the Chord Track Using Follow Chord Track This allows you to match an existing recording to a chord progression on the chord track. PROCEDURE 1. Select the track that you want to match to the chord track. 2. In the Inspector, click Chords. 3. Open the Follow Chord Track pop-up menu and select a mode. NOTE If this is the first time that you open this pop-up menu for the track, the Follow Chord Track dialog opens. 4.
Chord Functions Controlling MIDI or Audio Playback Using the Chord Track Scales This transposes MIDI notes to match the current scale. This allows a bigger variety of notes and a more natural performance. Root Notes This transposes MIDI notes to match the root note of the chord event. The effect corresponds to using the transpose track. This option is suitable for bass tracks. Voicings This transposes MIDI notes to match the voices of the selected voicing library.
Chord Functions Assigning Voices to Notes Using Map to Chord Track This allows you to match individual parts or events to a chord progression on the chord track. PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, select the events or parts that you want to map to the chord track. 2. Select Project > Chord Track > Map to Chord Track. 3. From the Mapping Mode pop-up menu, select a mapping mode. NOTE If you select Voicings and no voices are found, Auto mode is used instead. 4. Click OK.
Chord Functions Extracting Chord Events from MIDI Extracting Chord Events from MIDI You can extract chords from MIDI notes, parts, or tracks. This is useful if you have a MIDI file and want to show its harmonic structure, and use this file as starting point for further experimenting. PREREQUISITE Add the chord track and create MIDI notes that can be interpreted as chords. Drums, monophonic bass, or lead tracks are not suitable. PROCEDURE 1.
Chord Functions Recording Chord Events with a MIDI Keyboard Ignore Notes Shorter Than Allows you to determine the minimum length of the MIDI events that are taken into account. Recording Chord Events with a MIDI Keyboard You can use a MIDI keyboard to record chord events on the chord track. PREREQUISITE Your project contains an instrument track with Record Enable or Monitor activated. PROCEDURE 1. On the chord track, activate Record Enable. 2. On the Transport panel, activate Record. 3.
Chord Pads Chord pads allow you to play with chords, and to change their voicings and tensions. In terms of harmonies and rhythms, they allow for a more playful and spontaneous approach to composition than the chord track functions. You can: ● Perform with chords in real time via a MIDI keyboard. ● Record your performance as MIDI events on a MIDI or instrument track or even on the chord track. NOTE We assume that you have a MIDI keyboard connected and set up.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Zone 1 Chord Pad Output Mode Activate this to send chord data to all tracks that are monitored or record-enabled. Deactivate this to send chord data exclusively to tracks that are monitored or recordenabled and where Input Routing is set to Chord Pads. NOTE If Record-Enable allows MIDI Thru is deactivated in the Preferences dialog (Record— MIDI page), you must activate Monitor to use the chord pads.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Zone NOTE The section remote range is only shown if Player Modes is set to Sections. 9 Set up Chord Pads Opens the Chord Pads Setup dialog. 10 Functions Menu Opens a menu with specific functions and settings for the chord pads. 11 Chord Pads Presets Allows you to save and load presets for chord pads and players. 12 Show/Hide Chord Assistant Shows/Hides the Chord Assistant window that shows suggestions of chords that match the chord that you specified as the origin chord.
Chord Pads Functions Menu All chord pads follow the adaptive voicing. This is indicated by AV. If you change the voicing for a pad manually, however, adaptive voicing is deactivated. An L indicates that the chord pad is locked for editing. 6 Voicing Allows you to set another voicing for the chord pad. 7 Tensions Allows you to add/remove tensions for the chord. Chord Pad Context Menu ● To open the chord pad context menu, right-click a chord pad.
Chord Pads Chord Assistant Assign Pads from Chord Track Assigns the chord events from the chord track to the chord pads in the same order as they appear on the chord track. Chord events that have more than one occurrence are only assigned once. Snap Playback to Musical Grid Allows you to delay the playback of a triggered chord pad to the next defined musical position. This is useful if you work with an arpeggiator or if you set the Player Modes to Pattern.
Chord Pads Chord Assistant You must define an origin chord as follows: ● Right-click the chord pad with the chord you want to use as origin and select Use X as Origin for Chord Assistant. The Chord Assistant window shows suggestions for follow-on chords that you can assign to the chord pads. Chord Assistant – Proximity Mode (Cubase Pro only) The proximity mode of the Chord Assistant window uses a set of harmonic rules to offer suggestions that match the origin chord.
Chord Pads Chord Assignment The inner circle displays the corresponding parallel minor chords. The roman numerals mark the chords of the current key with their scale degree. You can use these chords to create typical chord progressions. However, you can also use the other chords for more creative results. ● To play a chord, click it. The last 3 chords that you clicked are shown in bold. ● To assign a chord to the next unassigned chord pad, right-click the suggested chord and select Assign to Pad.
Chord Pads Chord Assignment Assigning Chords with the Chord Editor If you know exactly which chord you want to assign to a specific chord pad, you can use the Chord Editor. PROCEDURE 1. Move the mouse pointer to the left edge of the chord pad, and click Open Editor. 2. In the Chord Editor window, use the chord definition buttons to define a root note, a chord type, a tension, and a bass note. The new chord is triggered automatically to give an acoustic feedback.
Chord Pads Chord Assignment Assigning Chords with the Chord Assistant – Circle of Fifths Mode If you have a chord that you want to use as a starting point for a chord progression, but you do not know how to create such a progression, you can use the Chord Assistant – Circle of Fifths window. PROCEDURE 1. Right-click the chord pad that you want to use as a starting point and activate Use X as Origin for Chord Assistant.
Chord Pads Swapping Chord Assignments 2. On your MIDI keyboard or on the On-Screen Keyboard, press the keys for the chord that you want to assign. The chord and its voicing are assigned to the chord pad, and you hear an acoustic feedback of the chord. NOTE The assigned voicing can be changed by the Adaptive Voicing setting. Therefore, if you want to keep the voicing for that specific pad, right-click the chord pad and select Lock from the context menu.
Chord Pads Copying Chord Assignments Copying Chord Assignments You can copy the chord assignment of one pad and paste it on another pad. PROCEDURE ● Alt-click a chord pad and drag it to another chord pad. While you drag, the border of the destination chord pad changes its color. RESULT When you drop the pad on another, the first pad’s assignment is copied to the destination chord pad together with its settings, except for the Adaptive Voicing Reference.
Chord Pads Playing Back and Recording Chords 4. Click Add Track. The instrument track is added to the track list, and the control panel of the selected VST instrument is opened. 5. On the instrument track, click Record Enable or Monitor. NOTE If Record-Enable allows MIDI Thru is deactivated in the Preferences dialog (Record— MIDI page), you must activate Monitor to use the chord pads. 6. Select Project > Chord Pads > Show/Hide Chord Pads to open the Chord Pads. 7. Activate Chord Pad Output Mode. 8.
Chord Pads Playing Back and Recording Chords RESULT The instrument track now receives MIDI data exclusively from the chord pad device. You can use a connected MIDI keyboard to trigger the chord pads. This still works if you hide the Chord Pads from view. NOTE On the Chord Pads page of the Studio Setup dialog, you can select your connected MIDI keyboard from the MIDI Input pop-up menu. This is useful if you want to use a specific MIDI keyboard exclusively for triggering the chord pads.
Chord Pads Player Setup 2. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Other Track or Use Track Preset . 3. Select Add Chord Track. The chord track is added to the track list. 4. In the Inspector for the chord track, click Record Enable. 5. On the Transport panel, activate Record. 6. On your MIDI keyboard, press the keys that trigger the chord pads. RESULT The chord events are recorded on the chord track.
Chord Pads Player Setup Chord Voicing Style Allows you to select a chord voicing style for the selected player. This determines how chords are played back, and what pitches are used. Player Modes ● Plain Chords triggers all notes of a chord simultaneously. ● Pattern plays an arpeggio that is based on the notes of the pattern. ● Sections controls the playback of single notes or groups of notes of a chord.
Chord Pads Player Setup The following options are available: Overlaps Allows you to select what happens with the notes of the first chord when you play a chord without releasing the previous chord. ● Hold First holds the notes of the first chord. No note-off message is sent. If the chords have common notes, these are not triggered again. ● Legato releases the notes of the first chord, except for the common notes. These are held and not triggered again.
Chord Pads Player Setup Pattern Presets Allows you to save pattern presets. Using the Pattern Player You can play back the pattern of a MIDI loop or a MIDI part with chord pads. This plays back the pattern with the notes that make up the chord. PROCEDURE 1. To the left of the chord pads, activate Show/Hide Player Setup. 2. In the Selected Player Settings section, open the Player Modes pop-up menu, and select Pattern. 3.
Chord Pads Player Setup For example, select a piano sound and activate Piano Player. NOTE When setting up the player for a track, make sure that Record Enable or Monitor is only active for this particular track. 10. Select the second instrument track, select a sound for the VST instrument, and set up another player. For example, select a guitar sound and activate Guitar Player. 11. Select the next instrument track, and proceed as for the other 2 tracks.
Chord Pads Player Setup Section Player Settings Opens the Custom Section Player Settings dialog. RELATED LINKS Chord Pads Setup Dialog on page 947 Custom Section Player Settings Dialog on page 945 Custom Section Player Settings Dialog The custom settings for the section player allow you to determine how the sections are triggered, how they are distributed, or if they are played at all. Only sections with remote keys assigned are available.
Chord Pads Player Setup ● Combination Combines sections and chord pads so that it does not matter whether you first press the remote key for the chord pad or for the section. ● Latch Chord Pads Activate this for sections and combination modes. This way, if you release the remote key for the chord pad, you will still hear the sections if you keep the section remote keys pressed.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Setup Dialog Chord Pads Setup Dialog The Chord Pads Setup dialog allows you to change the remote key assignments and the layout of the chord pads. ● To open the Chord Pads Setup dialog, click Set up Chord Pads. Pad Remote Control Allows you to specify a range of remote keys that trigger the chords that are assigned to the chord pads. Here, you can also set up chord modifiers that allow you to specify how the chords are played back.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Setup Dialog Pad Remote Control Tab The Pad Remote Control tab in the Chord Pads Setup dialog allows you to specify a range of remote keys that trigger the chords that are assigned to the chord pads. ● To open the Pad Remote Control tab, click Set up Chord Pads, and in the Chord Pads Setup dialog, click Pad Remote Control.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Setup Dialog Activate Activates/Deactivates the remote key assignment for the parameters voicings, tensions, and transpose. If this option is deactivated, only the remote key assignment for the pads remote range is active. NOTE If you use the remote keys for voicings, tensions, or transposition after releasing the remote key for the chord pad, the chord pad that you last played is affected.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Setup Dialog MIDI Learn Activates/Deactivates the MIDI Learn function to assign MIDI input to the parameters for changing tensions. In the Transpose Modifiers section, the following options are available: Transpose Up Plays back the last played chord and transposes it upwards. Transpose Down Plays back the last played chord and transposes it downwards.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Setup Dialog Sections Allows you to assign remote keys for up to 5 sections. You can use the section remote keys together with a pad remote key to trigger the chord notes that correspond to the sections. By default, Section 1 is set to G2, Section 2 is set to A2, Section 3 is set to B2, and Section 4 is set to C3. MIDI Learn Activates/Deactivates the MIDI Learn function to assign MIDI input to the sections.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Presets Pad Layout Tab The Pad Layout tab in the Chord Pads Setup dialog allows you to change the layout that is used for the chord pads. NOTE By default, the keyboard layout is active, but you can change to a grid layout if you prefer. After changing the pad layout, you may need to adjust the remote setup. ● To open the Pad Layout tab, click Set up Chord Pads, and in the Chord Pads Setup dialog, click Pad Layout.
Chord Pads Creating Chord Events from Chord Pads ● To load only the player settings of Chord Pads Presets, click Chord Pads Presets and select Load Players from Preset. Saving Chord Pads Presets If you have set up the chord pads, you can save them as Chord Pads Presets. PROCEDURE 1. To the left of the chord pads, click Chord Pads Presets and select Save Chord Pads Preset. 2. In the New Preset section, enter a name for the new preset. NOTE You can also define attributes for the preset. 3.
Logical Editor The Logical Editor is a powerful tool for search and replace functions on MIDI data. IMPORTANT The Logical Editor is only available in Cubase Pro. However, the Transformer MIDI insert and the Input Transformer that share many of the functions with the Logical Editor are also available in Cubase Artist. You can use the Logical Editor as follows: ● You set up filter conditions to find certain elements.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions 1 Filter Conditions Allows you to specify the conditions such as type, attribute, value, or position that a specific element must meet to be found. You can combine any number of filter conditions using AND/OR operators. 2 Action list Allows you to set up a list of actions that specifies exactly what is done. This is not necessary for all functions. 3 Function pop-up menu Allows you to select a function. 4 Apply Applies your settings.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions Parameter 1 Sets which value the element properties are compared to. This depends on the Filter Target. Parameter 2 Only available if one of the Range options is set in the Condition column. Allows you to find all elements with values inside or outside the range between Parameter 1 and Parameter 2. Bar Range/Time Base Only available if the Filter Target is set to Position.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions Bigger or Equal Has a value that is the same as or higher than the one set up in the Parameter 1 column. Less Has a value lower than the one set up in the Parameter 1 column. Less or Equal Has a value that is the same as or lower than the one set up in the Parameter 1 column. Inside Range Has a value that is between the values set up in the Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 columns. Note that Parameter 1 should be the lower value and Parameter 2 the higher.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions Searching for Elements at Specific Positions (Logical Editor only) You can search for elements starting at specific positions, either relative to the start of the project or within each bar. PROCEDURE 1. Open the Filter Target pop-up menu and select Position. This allows you to find elements starting at specific positions, either relative to the start of the project or within each bar. 2.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions RELATED LINKS Combining Multiple Condition Lines on page 979 Value 1 and Value 2 MIDI events can be composed of value 1 and value 2. Value 1 and value 2 have different meanings for different event types: Event type Value 1 Value 2 Notes The Note Number/Pitch. The velocity of the note. Poly Pressure The key that was pressed. The amount of pressure for the key. Controller The type of Controller, displayed as a number. The amount of Control Change.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions NOTE To find all notes of a certain key, in all octaves, open the Condition pop-up menu and select Note is equal to. 3. Click below the list to add another condition line. Parameter 1 is automatically set to Note. Also, Value 1 and Value 2 will be displayed as Pitch and Velocity respectively. RELATED LINKS Combining Multiple Condition Lines on page 979 Searching for Controllers PROCEDURE 1. Open the Filter Target pop-up menu and select Value 1. 2. Click 3.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions Searching for Properties You can search for properties that are not part of the MIDI standard but rather Cubase-specific settings. PROCEDURE 1. Open the Filter Target pop-up menu and select Property. 2. Open the Parameter 1 pop-up menu and select the property that you want to search for. 3. Open the Condition pop-up menu and select one of the following options: ● Select Property is set if you want to search for events that have the specified property.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions In this example, the action is performed after playing the C1. Searching for Chords (Logical Editor only) You can search for chords in a MIDI part or on the chord track. PREREQUISITE NOTE A note belongs to a chord if at least 2 other notes play at the same time. PROCEDURE 1. Open the Filter Target pop-up menu and select Context Variable. 2. Open the Parameter 1 pop-up menu and select the property that you want to search for. 3.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions Voice If you set Parameter 2 to the voice in the chord, this finds the specified voice in the selected MIDI part. NOTE The Musical Context presets give you an idea of the possibilities of this filter target. Combining Multiple Condition Lines You can add condition lines and combine them by using boolean And and Or operators and brackets. ● To add a new condition, click below the list. The new line is added at the bottom of the list.
Logical Editor Selecting a Function EXAMPLE You can set up the Logical Editor to find all MIDI notes with the pitch C3, as well as all events (regardless of their type) set to MIDI channel 1. You can set up the Logical Editor to find all notes that either have the pitch C3 or the MIDI channel 1 (but no non-note events). Selecting a Function The pop-up menu at the bottom of the Logical Editor is where you select the function, that is, the basic type of editing to be performed.
Logical Editor Specifying Actions Extract (Logical Editor only) Transforms all found events and moves them to a new part on a new MIDI track. Select (Logical Editor only) Selects all found events and highlights them for further work in the regular MIDI editors. RELATED LINKS Specifying Actions on page 965 Specifying Actions You can specify actions, that is, changes that are made to the found elements, in the lower list of the Logical Editor.
Logical Editor Specifying Actions NOTE The Position and Length parameters are interpreted via the time base setting in the Bar Range/ Time Base column, with the exception of the Random setting, which uses the time base of the affected events. RELATED LINKS Searching for Properties on page 961 Value 1 and Value 2 on page 959 Operation The Operation column allows you to determine what to do with the Action Target. The options on this pop-up menu are different depending on the selected Action Target.
Logical Editor Specifying Actions Use Value 2 This is only available if you set Action Target to Value 1. If this option is selected, the Value 2 setting in each event will be copied to the Value 1 setting. Use Value 1 This is only available if you set Action Target to Value 2. If this option is selected, the Value 1 setting in each event will be copied to the Value 2 setting. Mirror This is only available if you set Action Target to Value 1 or Value 2.
Logical Editor Applying the Defined Actions Applying the Defined Actions Once you have set up filter conditions, selected a function, and set the required actions or loaded a preset, you apply the actions defined with the Logical Editor by clicking the Apply button. IMPORTANT The MIDI insert effect Transformer does not feature an Apply button. Here, the current settings are automatically applied in real time during playback or live playing.
Logical Editor Presets NOTE The list of presets is read each time the Logical Editor is opened.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) The Project Logical Editor is a powerful tool for search and replace functions in the Project window. The Project Logical Editor allows you to specify filter conditions and combine them with actions. This way you can search for all open folder tracks in your project, for example, and close them. It comes with a number of presets that show you the possibilities of this feature, and that you can use as a starting point for your own settings.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Filter Conditions Allows you to set up a list of actions that specifies exactly what is done. This is not necessary for all functions. 3 Function pop-up menu Allows you to select if the found elements are transformed, deleted, or selected. 4 Macro pop-up menu Allows you to select a macro. 5 Apply Applies your settings. IMPORTANT Not every combination of settings always makes sense. Experiment a bit before applying your edits to important projects.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Filter Conditions Bar Range/Time Base Only available if the Filter Target is set to Position. If one of the Bar Range options is selected in the Condition column, you use the Bar Range/Time Base column to specify zones within each bar. This allows you to find all elements on or around the first beat of every bar, for example. If any of the other Condition options is selected, you can use the Bar Range/Time Base column to specify a time base such as PPQ, seconds, etc.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Filter Conditions MIDI If no container type is specified, this finds MIDI parts and MIDI tracks. Automation If no container type is specified, this finds automation events and automation tracks. Marker If no container type is specified, this finds marker events and marker tracks. Transpose If no container type is specified, this finds transpose events and transpose tracks. Arranger If no container type is specified, this finds arranger events and arranger tracks.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Filter Conditions ● Select Unequal if you want to search for any other container type than the specified. ● Select All Types if you want to search for all container types. EXAMPLE You can set up the Project Logical Editor to find all folder tracks in the project. Container Type Filter When the Filter Target is set to Container Type, the Parameter 1 pop-up menu lists the available container types.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Filter Conditions You can set up the Project Logical Editor to find all MIDI and instrument parts (not tracks) or all audio events (not parts or tracks) in the project that are muted. Searching for Names PROCEDURE 1. Open the Filter Target value field and select Name. 2. Click the Parameter 1 pop-up menu and enter a name, or a part of a name that you want to search for. 3.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Filter Conditions EXAMPLE You can set up the Project Logical Editor to find all elements at the PPQ position 5.1.1. in the project. You can set up the Project Logical Editor to find elements starting around the second beat in each bar. Position Filter For positions, the following Condition options are available: Equal Has the exact same value as set up in the Parameter 1 column. Unequal Has any value other than the one set up in the Parameter 1 column.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Filter Conditions Inside Cycle Is inside the set cycle. Exactly Matching Cycle Exactly matches the set cycle. Searching for Elements of Specific Lengths PROCEDURE 1. Open the Filter Target pop-up menu and select Length. This allows you to find elements of a specific length only. NOTE The Length parameter is interpreted via the time base setting in the Bar Range/Time Base column, that is, in PPQ, seconds, samples, or frames. 2.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Filter Conditions Inside Range Has a value that is between the values set up in the Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 columns. Note that Parameter 1 should be the lower value and Parameter 2 the higher. Outside Range Has a value that is not between the values set up in the Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 columns. Searching for Color Names PROCEDURE 1. Open the Filter Target pop-up menu and select Color Name. 2.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Filter Conditions Properties Filter For properties, the following Condition options are available: Property is set This finds all events that have the property that is set in the Parameter 1 column. Property is not set This finds all events that do not have the property that is set in the Parameter 1 column. When the Filter Target is set to Property, the pop-up menu lists the available Parameter 1 properties. Event is muted This finds all muted events.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Specifying Actions ● Or determines that at least one of the conditions must be fulfilled for an element to be found. IMPORTANT When you add a new condition line, the boolean setting default is And. EXAMPLE You can set up the Project Logical Editor to find MIDI tracks. You can set up the Project Logical Editor to find all parts or events that match exactly the cycle.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Specifying Actions You can add action lines by clicking , and remove them by selecting it and clicking . Action Target The Action Target allows you to select the property that is changed. Position Adjusting the Position value moves the elements.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Specifying Actions Set to fixed value This sets the Length to the value specified in the Parameter 1 column. Set Random Values between This will add a random value to the current length. The added random value will be within the range specified with Parameter 1 and Parameter 2. Track Operation Adjusting the Track Operation value allows you to change the track status. NOTE Track operations may also affect automation tracks.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Selecting a Function Name Adjusting the Name value allows you to rename the found elements. Replace Replaces names with the text specified in the Parameter 1 column. Append The name will be appended with the string specified in the Parameter 1 column. Prepend The name will be prepended with the string specified in the Parameter 1 column.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Applying Macros Transform Changes one or several aspects of the found elements. You set up exactly what is changed in the action list. Select This will simply select all found elements, highlighting them for further work in the Project window. Applying Macros In the Macro pop-up menu, you can select a macro that will be executed automatically after completing the actions defined.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Presets NOTE To remove a preset, load it and click the Remove Preset button. Organizing and Sharing Presets The Project Logical Editor presets are stored within the application folder in the Presets \Logical Edit Project subfolder. Preset files cannot be edited manually, but you can reorganize them. This also makes it easy to share presets with other Cubase users, by transferring the individual preset files.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Project Tempo Modes For every project you can set a tempo mode, depending on whether your music has a fixed tempo or if it changes throughout the project. On the Transport panel, you can set the following tempo modes: ● Fixed Tempo Mode If you want to work with one fixed tempo that does not change throughout the project, deactivate Activate Tempo Track on the Transport panel. You can change the tempo value to set a fixed rehearsal tempo.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Track Editor RELATED LINKS Instrument Track Inspector on page 113 MIDI Track Inspector on page 128 Audio Track Inspector on page 106 Tempo Track Editor The Tempo Track Editor provides an overview of the project tempo settings. It allows you to add and edit tempo events. To open the Tempo Track Editor, do one of the following: ● Select Project > Tempo Track. ● Press Ctrl/Cmd-T.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Track Editor Tempo Track Editor Toolbar The toolbar contains tools for selecting, adding, and changing tempo and time signature events. The following tools are available: Activate Tempo Track Activate Tempo Track Switches the project tempo between fixed tempo mode and tempo track mode. Left Divider Left Divider Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown. Auto-Scroll Auto-Scroll Keeps the project cursor visible during playback.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Track Editor Current Tempo Current Tempo In fixed tempo mode, this allows you to change the current tempo. Snap Snap On/Off Restricts horizontal movement and positioning to the positions specified by the Snap Type. Time signature events always snap to the beginning of bars. Snap Type Allows you to specify to what positions you want events to snap. Tempo Recording Open Tempo Recording Panel Opens a panel that allows you to record tempo changes.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Track Tempo Track You can use the tempo track to create tempo changes within a project. ● To add a tempo track to your project, click Add Other Track or Use Track Preset global track controls area of the track list, and select Add Tempo Track. in the ● You can use the tools on the Project window toolbar to add and edit tempo events. ● You can use the tempo event editor to edit selected tempo events.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Changes for Projects If you click in the upper right corner of the editor, you can tilt the right part of the curve. This allows you to tilt the event values at the end of the curve upwards or downwards. 7 Scale Around Relative Center If you Alt-click in the middle right border of the editor, you can scale the curve relative to its center. This allows you to raise or lower the event values horizontally around the center of the editor.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Changes for Projects Setting up Projects for Tempo Changes When you create a new project, the project tempo is automatically set to fixed tempo mode. If your music contains tempo changes, you must set your project to tempo track mode. PROCEDURE ● To set your project to tempo track mode, do one of the following: ● On the Transport panel, activate Activate Tempo Track. ● Select Project > Tempo Track and activate Activate Tempo Track.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Changes for Projects 3. On the Tempo Track Editor toolbar, use the Tempo Recording panel to add tempo changes on the fly. By moving the slider to the right, you can raise the project tempo, by moving it to the left, you can lower it. RESULT The tempo changes are recorded and added to the tempo curve in the Tempo Track Editor.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Changes for Projects Setting up a Tempo Track from Tempo Detection (Cubase Pro only) You can set up a complete tempo track using the result of a tempo detection for an audio event or a MIDI part. PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, select the audio event or the MIDI part that you want to analyze. 2. Select Project > Tempo Detection. 3. On the Tempo Detection Panel, click Analyze. RESULT ● A tempo track is added to the project.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Changes for Projects NOTE If your material includes multiple sections with different tempos, you can also split the material at each major tempo change and perform a tempo detection for every single resulting section. Each section must have a length of at least 7 seconds. Editing Tempo Events In the Tempo Track Editor, you can edit selected tempo events. Use the following methods: ● With the Object Selection tool, click and drag horizontally and/or vertically.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Setting up a Fixed Project Tempo Setting up a Fixed Project Tempo If your music does not contain tempo changes, and the tempo track is deactivated, you can set up a fixed tempo for your project. When the tempo track is deactivated, the tempo track curve is grayed out. The fixed tempo is displayed as a horizontal line in the tempo curve display.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Setting up a Fixed Project Tempo PROCEDURE 1. Activate playback. 2. Select Project > Beat Calculator. 3. Click Tap Tempo. The Tap Tempo window opens. 4. Use Space to tap the tempo of the recording that is played back. In the BPM field, the calculated tempo is updated each time you tap. 5. Click OK to close the window. The tapped tempo is shown in the BPM field of the Beat Calculator. 6.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Beat Calculator Beat Calculator The Beat Calculator is a tool for calculating the tempo of freely recorded audio or MIDI material. It also allows you to set the tempo by tapping. ● To open the Beat Calculator for an audio or MIDI recording, select Project > Beat Calculator. 1 Beats Allows you to enter the number of beats for the selected section of your recording. 2 BPM Shows the tempo calculated for the selection.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Exporting a Tempo Track (Cubase Pro only) 1 Name Shows the name of the selected event or part. 2 Analyze Starts the tempo detection. 3 Multiply by 2 Allows you to double the detected tempo. This is useful if your material is twice as fast as the detected tempo. 4 Divide by 2 Allows you to halve the detected tempo. This is useful if your material is half as fast as the detected tempo. 5 Multiply by 4/3 Allows you to adjust the detected tempo with a factor of 4/3.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Importing a Tempo Track (Cubase Pro only) 3. Click Save. RESULT The tempo track information is saved together with signature events with the file extension .smt. Importing a Tempo Track (Cubase Pro only) You can import a tempo track from another project. PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Import > Tempo Track. 2. In the file dialog that opens, navigate to the file you want to import. 3. Click Open.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Process Bars Dialog (Cubase Pro only) Finish at Bar Shows the end time of the locator range in bars and beats. The following options are available in the Alternative Time Format section: Time Display Format Allows you to select the alternative time format. Start at Position Shows the start time of the locator range in the selected time format. Finish at Position Shows the end time of the locator range in the selected time format.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Time Warp (Cubase Pro only) Inserts empty bars with the specified Time Signature at the Process Start Bar Position position. ● Delete Bars Deletes the bar at the Process Start Bar Position position. ● Reinterpret Bars Reinterprets bars with the specified Time Signature at the Process Start Bar Position position. However, the playback of the notes stays the same. ● Replace Bars Replaces bars at the Process Start Bar Position position.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Set Definition from Tempo Dialog Adjusting Musical Positions to Time Positions You can adjust musical positions to positions in time with the Time Warp tool. PREREQUISITE Tempo track mode is activated. Snap is activated and you have selected an appropriate Snap Type. PROCEDURE 1. On the Project window toolbar, click Time Warp. The ruler is automatically set to Bars+Beats format. 2.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Time Signature Events Set all Tracks to Musical Time Base Sets all tracks to musical time base. If this is deactivated, only the tracks with the selected events are set to musical time base. Adjusting the Audio Tempo to the Project Tempo You can adjust the tempo of freely recorded audio material to the project tempo. PROCEDURE 1. Select the audio events that you want to adjust to the project tempo. 2. Select Audio > Advanced > Set Definition from Tempo. 3.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Time Signature Events RESULT The time signature event is added at the specified time position. The timeline and the event displays for the Project window and the editors reflect the changes. Adding Time Signature Events on the Signature Track You can add multiple time signature events for a project. This is useful if you want to change the time signature at a specific bar, for example. PROCEDURE 1.
Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) The Project Browser provides a list-based representation of the project. It allows you to view and edit all events on all tracks. ● To open the Project Browser, select Project > Browser. NOTE The Project Browser can be open while you are working in other windows. Any changes in the Project window or an editor are immediately reflected in the Project Browser and vice versa.
Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) Project Structure Time Format Allows you to change the time display format in the Project Browser. Track/Part/Event Shows what is added when you click Add. Add Adds the track, part, or event type that is shown in the pop-up menu to the left. Filter Allows you to filter the event display by event type. Sync Selection Links the selection in the Project Browser to the selection in the Project window. This allows you to locate events in the two windows.
Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) Event Display Audio events: Double-click the waveform image to open the event in the Sample Editor. Audio parts: Double-click the waveform image to open the event in the Audio Editor. MIDI parts: Double-click the part image to open the event in the Key Editor. File Audio events: The name of the audio file referenced by the audio clip of the event. Type MIDI events: The type of the MIDI event. Tempo track: The type of the tempo curve. Start The start position of the event.
Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) Event Display Mute Mutes or unmutes the event. Image Audio events: Displays a waveform image of the event. Editing Note Expression Data In the Project Browser, you can view and edit the MIDI controller events or VST 3 events of a MIDI note with note expression data. PROCEDURE 1. In the Project Structure, select the Note Expression subitem of the MIDI note that you want to view or edit.
Rendering Audio and MIDI You can render existing material to new audio material. You can render the following: ● Audio tracks ● Instrument tracks ● Audio events or parts on audio tracks ● MIDI parts on instrument tracks ● Range selections on audio or instrument tracks ● Range selections on multiple audio or instrument tracks IMPORTANT The rendering function does not support side-chain routing. Render Tracks Dialog The Render Tracks dialog allows you to customize the track render settings.
Rendering Audio and MIDI Render Tracks Dialog The following settings are available in the Mode section: As Separate Events Creates one or more tracks that contain separate events or parts that are saved as separate audio files. As Block Events Creates one or more tracks that contain adjacent events/parts that are combined to blocks. Every block is saved as a separate audio file. As One Event Creates one or more tracks that contain the events/parts and combines them to one event/part.
Rendering Audio and MIDI Render Tracks Dialog activated. The resulting audio file format is determined by the output channel of the source track. A mono track that is routed to a stereo bus results in a stereo audio file. Complete Signal Path + Master FX Renders the complete signal path and the master bus settings into the resulting audio files. This includes all channel settings, group channel settings, FX send channel settings, and panner settings.
Rendering Audio and MIDI Render Selection Dialog Rendering Tracks You can render selected tracks either via the Render Tracks dialog or by directly using the Render (with Current Settings) command. PROCEDURE 1. Deselect all events. 2. Select one or more audio, MIDI, or instrument tracks. 3. Select Edit > Render in Place > Render Settings. 4. Specify the render options. 5. Click Render. RESULT All selected source material is processed according to your render settings.
Rendering Audio and MIDI Render Selection Dialog The following settings are available in the Mode section: As Separate Events Creates one or more tracks that contain separate events or parts that are saved as separate audio files. As Block Events Creates one or more tracks that contain adjacent events/parts that are combined to blocks. Every block is saved as a separate audio file. As One Event Creates one or more tracks that contain the events/parts and combines them to one event/part.
Rendering Audio and MIDI Render Selection Dialog File Path Allows you to select a custom folder to which the resulting .wav files are rendered. Mix down to One Audio File Creates one audio file from all your source material. This option is only available if several tracks are selected and Dry (Transfer Channel Settings) is deactivated. The following settings are available in the Source Event Settings section: Source Events ● Keep Source Events Unchanged Keeps the source events unchanged.
Export Audio Mixdown The Export Audio Mixdown function allows you to mix down and export all audio that is contained between the left and right locators of a project. Cubase Pro only: You can also export audio that is contained in different ranges defined by cycle markers. ● To open the Export Audio Mixdown dialog, select File > Export > Audio Mixdown.
Export Audio Mixdown Export Audio Mixdown Dialog File Name Allows you to specify the name of the mixdown file. Click File Name Options to open a pop-up menu with naming options: ● Set to Project Name inserts the project name into the File Name field. ● Auto Update Name adds a number to the file name and increments the number every time you export a file. File Path Allows you to specify the file path of the mixdown file.
Export Audio Mixdown Export Audio Mixdown Dialog Between Locators Exports the locator range. Between Cycle Markers (Cubase Pro only) Exports the range between cycle markers. In the Audio Output Format section, the following options are available: File Type Allows you to select a file type for the mixdown file. Sample Rate Allows you to select a sample rate for the mixdown file. NOTE ● This parameter is only available for uncompressed audio file formats and FLAC files.
Export Audio Mixdown Export Audio Mixdown Dialog Real-Time Export Allows you to export the mixdown file in real time. This takes at least the same time as regular playback. Some VST plug-ins, external instruments, and effects require real-time export in order to have enough time to update correctly during the mixdown. Consult the plug-in manufacturers for further information. Cubase Pro only: During the real-time export of a single channel, the Audition Volume fader is displayed in the progress dialog.
Export Audio Mixdown Export Audio Mixdown Dialog The tracks will have the corresponding mixdown file as audio event. The track names will be identical with the export channel names. Note that the new project will be the active project. Activating this option disables the Pool and Audio Track options. Pool Folder Allows you to specify a Pool folder for the clip.
Export Audio Mixdown Mixing Down to Audio Files Scheme Allows you to select, create, save, and delete naming schemes. Attributes Shows the available naming scheme attributes. Result Allows you to drag attributes to this field and rearrange them. Settings Allows you to make separator and counter settings. Preview Displays a preview of your current naming scheme.
Export Audio Mixdown Available Channels for Export (Cubase Pro only) IMPORTANT The setting of the Output Routing in the corresponding track Inspector determines the channel width of the Export Audio Mixdown export. This means if no main output bus is selected, the exported audio file only contains silence. 3. Select File > Export > Audio Mixdown. 4. In the Export Audio Mixdown dialog, make your settings. 5. Click Perform Audio Export. RESULT The audio file is exported.
Export Audio Mixdown Available Channels for Export (Cubase Pro only) Channel Selection Section (Cubase Pro only) The Channel Selection section allows you to select the channels that are mixed down. An individual file is created for each channel. ● To open the Channel Selection section, select Export Multiple Channels. The following options are available: Filter Allows you to enter the channel name to filter the channels. This is useful if your project contains a large number of channels.
Export Audio Mixdown File Formats File Formats The File Type pop-up menu in the Export section allows you to select a format and make additional settings for the mixdown file. The following file formats are available: Wave File This is the most common file format on the PC platform. Wave files have the extension .wav. AIFC File This is an audio file format standard defined by Apple Inc. AIFC files are used on most computer platforms.
Export Audio Mixdown File Formats If you select the Wave File format for the exported file, you can make the following settings in the Select Attributes section: Insert Broadcast Wave Chunk Activates the embedding of additional file information in Broadcast Wave format. NOTE By activating this option, you create a Broadcast Wave file. Some applications may not be able to handle these files.
Export Audio Mixdown File Formats Insert Broadcast Wave Chunk Activates the embedding of additional file information in Broadcast Wave format. NOTE By activating this option, you create a Broadcast Wave file. Some applications may not be able to handle these files. If you get problems using the file in another application, deactivate Insert Broadcast Wave Chunk and export the file again. Set up Broadcast Wave Chunk Opens the Broadcast Wave Chunk dialog where you can enter information.
Export Audio Mixdown File Formats MP3 (MPEG 1 Layer 3) files MP3 files are highly compressed files that still provide good audio quality. They have the extension .mp3. ● To open the MPEG 1 Layer 3 File Settings, click Codec Settings in the Select Attributes section. Bit Rate Sets the bit rate for the MP3 file. The higher the bit rate, the better the audio quality and the larger the file. For stereo audio, 128 kBit/s is considered to be providing good audio quality results.
Export Audio Mixdown File Formats Windows Media Audio File Settings Dialog - General Tab The General tab in the Windows Media Audio File Settings dialog allows you to specify sample rate, bit depth, and channels for the encoded file. Sample Rate Allows you to set the sample rate to 44.100, 48.000, or 96.000 kHz. Set this to match the sample rate of the source material or use the closest available value that is higher than the actual value. Bit Depth Allows you to set the bit depth to 16 bit or 24 bit.
Export Audio Mixdown File Formats Windows Media Audio File Settings Dialog - Advanced Tab The Advanced tab in the Windows Media Audio File Settings dialog allows you to specify the dynamic range control, that is, the difference in dB between the average loudness and the peak audio level (the loudest sounds) of the audio for the encoded file. Dynamic Range Control The dynamic range is automatically calculated during the encoding process.
Export Audio Mixdown File Formats Compression Level Sets the compression level for the FLAC file. Since FLAC is a lossless format, the level has more influence on the encoding speed than on the file size. Ogg Vorbis Files Ogg Vorbis is an open source, patent-free audio encoding and streaming technology, offering compressed audio files of small size, but with comparatively high audio quality. Ogg Vorbis files have the extension .ogg.
Export Audio Mixdown File Formats Insert Tempo Definition This option is only available if Insert iXML Chunk is activated. It allows you to include tempo information from the tempo track or from the Definition section of the Sample Editor in the iXML chunk of the exported files.
Synchronization Synchronization is the process of getting 2 or more devices to play back together at the same speed, position, and phase. These devices can range from audio and video tape machines to digital audio workstations, MIDI sequencers, synchronization controllers, and digital video devices. If you know the position and speed for the master device, you can resolve the speed and position of the slave device to it, so that the 2 devices play in perfect sync with one another.
Synchronization Timecode Formats ● Timecode Slave Any device receiving the timecode and synchronizing or locking to it. ● Machine Control Master The device that issues transport commands to the system. ● Machine Control Slave The device receiving timecode commands and responding to them. Cubase can be the machine control master, sending transport commands to an external device which in turn sends timecode and audio clock information back to Cubase.
Synchronization Timecode Formats 30 fps non-drop SMPTE (N) This is the frame count of NTSC broadcast video. However, the actual frame rate or speed of the video format runs at 29.97 fps. This timecode clock does not run in real time. It is slightly slower by 0.1 %. 30 fps drop-frame SMPTE (D) The 30 fps drop-frame count is an adaptation that allows a timecode display running at 29.
Synchronization Clock Sources Frame count vs. frame rate Part of the confusion in timecode stems from the use of frames per second in both the timecode standard and the actual frame rate. When used to describe a timecode standard, frames per second defines how many frames of timecode are counted before one second on the counter increments. When describing frame rates, frames per second define how many frames are played back during the span of one second of real time.
Synchronization Project Synchronization Setup Dialog Project Synchronization Setup Dialog The Project Synchronization Setup dialog provides a central place to configure a complex synchronized system. In addition to settings for timecode sources and machine control settings, project setup parameters are available along with basic transport controls for testing the system. ● To open the Project Synchronization Setup dialog, select Transport > Project Synchronization Setup.
Synchronization Project Synchronization Setup Dialog In the topmost section, the following options are available: Activate External Sync Activates/Deactivates the external synchronization. Timecode Source The Timecode Source section allows you to determine whether Cubase is acting as timecode master or slave.
Synchronization Project Synchronization Setup Dialog NOTE Discrepancies between the Project Frame Rate and the incoming timecode can cause problems during postproduction, even if Cubase is able to lock to that timecode. MIDI Timecode Settings The MIDI Timecode Settings become available if you activate MIDI Timecode as a Timecode Source. MTC Input Allows you to select the MIDI input ports. To allow Cubase to synchronize to MIDI timecode from any MIDI connection, select All MIDI Inputs.
Synchronization Project Synchronization Setup Dialog Destinations Page The Destinations page allows you to set up the synchronization outputs, and to determine which external signals leave the application. MIDI Clock Destinations In the MIDI Clock Destinations section, you can select any MIDI ports that you want to output MIDI clock. Some MIDI devices, such as drum machines, can match their tempo and location to incoming MIDI clock.
Synchronization Project Synchronization Setup Dialog MIDI Timecode Preferences In the MIDI Timecode Preferences section, the following options are available: MIDI Timecode Follows Project Time Ensures that the MTC output always follows the time position of Cubase. Allows you to specify an offset to be applied to outgoing MTC. The amount of offset is added or subtracted from the project’s current position before being transmitted.
Synchronization External Synchronization Machine Control Output Settings In the Machine Control Output Settings section, the following options are available: MMC Master Active Routes transport commands to any device while sync is enabled. MMC Input Determines which MIDI port in your system receives MMC commands. Set this to a MIDI port that is connected to the desired MIDI device. MMC Output Determines which MIDI port in your system sends MMC commands.
Synchronization Setting up Synchronization for a Personal Music Studio (Cubase Pro only) ● Select Transport > Project Synchronization Setup, and on the Sources page, activate Activate External Sync. ● Cubase Pro only: Transport commands are routed to the machine control destination output as specified in the Project Synchronization Setup dialog. Locate, play, stop, and record commands will now be sent to an external device.
Synchronization Setting up Synchronization for a Personal Music Studio (Cubase Pro only) 6. In Cubase, start playback. RESULT The hard disk recorder starts playback and sends MTC to Cubase. Once Cubase syncs to MTC, the status on the Transport panel changes to Lock and the current frame rate of incoming MTC is shown.
VST System Link VST System Link is a digital audio network system that allows you to link several computers using digital audio hardware and cables. Linking up 2 or more computers allows you to split different tasks and different tracks between different computers. You can run CPU-intensive processes, such as send effect plug-ins or VST instruments on one computer, and record audio tracks on another one.
VST System Link Setting up VST System Link Active Activates VST System Link. Online Puts the computer online. ASIO Input Allows you to define the networking input channel. ASIO Output Allows you to define the networking output channel. Use Selected ASIO Ports for Data only Activate this if you want to devote more bandwidth to MIDI, and send VST System Link information on the entire channel. This channel is then no longer available for audio transfer.
VST System Link Setting up VST System Link List Shows the name of each computer. Setting up a Network You can set up a network by connecting computers. PROCEDURE 1. Use a digital audio cable to connect the digital output of computer 1 to the digital input of computer 2. If you have more than 2 computers, add the others one by one. 2. Use a cable to connect the digital output of computer 2 to the digital input of computer 1.
VST System Link Setting up VST System Link indication that you have connected the cards and set up clock sync properly. Check the documentation of your audio hardware for details. RELATED LINKS Selecting an Audio Driver on page 12 ASIO Driver Setup Page on page 15 Adjusting the Buffer Size In a VST System Link network, adjusting the buffer size to minimize latency is extra important.
VST System Link Activating VST System Link 2. In the Project Time Displays section, open the Sample Rate pop-up menu and select a sample rate. Setting up Digital Audio Connections PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Audio Connections. 2. Click the Inputs tab, and click Add Bus. 3. In the Add Input Bus dialog, configure the bus. 4. Click Add Bus. 5. Click the Outputs tab, and click Add Bus. 6. In the Add Output Bus dialog, configure the bus. 7. Click Add Bus. 8.
VST System Link Activating VST System Link 3. In the Devices list, select VST System Link. 4. Use the ASIO Input and ASIO Output pop-up menus to define which channel is the networking channel that carries the VST System Link information. NOTE The networking signal is carried on only one bit of one channel. For an ADAT-based system 7 channels of 24-bit audio and 1 channel of 23-bit audio will be used for networking. You will still have around 138 dB headroom on this channel. 5.
VST System Link Activating VST System Link PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Studio Setup. 2. In the Devices list, select VST System Link. 3. Activate Online. 4. Repeat this for each computer in the network. RESULT The computers are online now. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Start playback on one computer to check if the system is working, and if all computers start and play perfectly in time. VST System Link sends and understands all transport commands.
VST System Link Application Examples Application Examples VST System Link allows you to split different tasks between 2 or more computers. The following application examples should give you an idea of what is possible. Configuring a Main Mix Computer Configuring one computer as a main mix computer that receives the audio from your other computers allows you to mix internally in the computer.
VST System Link Application Examples NOTE If your audio cards have multiple sets of input and output connections, you can link up multiple ADAT cables and send audio via any of the busses on any of the cables. Routing MIDI Tracks to VSTis on Other Computers You can route MIDI tracks from one computer to VST instruments on another computer. This allows you to use one computer for playback and recording and the other one as a VSTi rack. PROCEDURE 1. Record a MIDI track into computer 1. 2.
VST System Link Application Examples 7. Open the Sends rack for the track in the Inspector or the MixConsole. 8. Open the Send Routing pop-up menu for one of the sends and select the VST System Link bus assigned to the effect. 9. Use the Send slider to adjust the amount of effect as usual. RESULT The signal will be sent to the track on computer 2 and processed through its insert effect, without using any processor power on computer 1.
Video Cubase supports the integration of video files in your project. You can play back video files in various formats and via different output devices from within Cubase, extract the audio material from a video file, and edit your music to the video. Video File Compatibility When working on a project involving a video file, you must make sure that the video file type works on your system.
Video Frame Rates Frame Rates Cubase supports different video and film frame rates. Frame rate (speed) Regardless of the frame counting system, the actual speed at which frames of video go by in real time is the true frame rate. Cubase supports the following frame rates: 23.98 fps (Cubase Pro only) This frame rate is used for film that is being transferred to NTSC video and must be slowed down for a 2-3 pull-down telecine transfer. It is also used for the type of HD video referred to as 24 p.
Video Preparations for Creating Video Projects Dedicated Video Cards You can use a dedicated video card. Video is sent directly to the output of this video device. The following video cards are supported: ● Blackmagic Design video output devices IMPORTANT ● You must install the appropriate driver for the video device and set the video card output to the video file resolution used in your project. ● Video output via FireWire is not supported.
Video Preparations for Creating Video Projects Adopting the Project Frame Rate To ensure that the time display of Cubase corresponds to the actual frames in the video, you must set the project frame rate to the frame rate of the imported video file. PREREQUISITE The frame rate of the imported video file differs from the project frame rate. PROCEDURE 1. Select Project > Project Setup. 2. In the Project Setup dialog, click Get Frame Rate from Video. 3. Click OK.
Video Preparations for Video Playback RESULT The thumbnail cache file is generated in the background so that you can continue working with Cubase. Preparations for Video Playback You can play back imported video files from within Cubase by using the transport controls. For this to work, you must activate and set up a video output device. IMPORTANT Your graphics card must support OpenGL 2.0 or higher.
Video Preparations for Video Playback The available video output devices are listed in the Device column. 3. In the Active column, activate the checkbox for the device that you want to use for playing back video. NOTE If you have no external device connected, you can use the Onscreen Window device that allows you to play back the video file on your computer monitor.
Video Editing Video Aspect Ratio You can also drag the borders of the Video Player window to resize it. However, this might lead to a distorted image. To prevent this, you can set an option from the Aspect Ratio pop-up menu. ● If you select None, the aspect ratio of the video is not kept when you resize the window. The image is enlarged/reduced to occupy the whole Video Player window. ● Internal allows you to resize the window freely while keeping the aspect ratio of the video.
Video Editing Video 3. In the Import Options dialog, select the desired import options. RESULT The extracted audio stream is added to the project on a new audio track and can be edited like all other audio material. RELATED LINKS On Import Audio Files Settings on page 284 Importing Video Files on page 1056 Use Video Follows Edit Mode The Use Video Follows Edit Mode allows you to edit audio while getting continuous visual feedback on the video display.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications OMF Files (Cubase Pro only) Open Media Framework Interchange (OMFI) is a platform-independent file format that allows you to transfer digital media between different applications. Cubase can import and export OMF files. Importing OMF Files PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Import > OMF. 2. In the file dialog, select the OMF file and click Open. 3. Optional: If a project is open, choose if you want to create a new project.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications OMF Files (Cubase Pro only) Import Allows you to select a track for import. Type Shows the media type of the track. Track Name Shows the track name. Select All Tracks Selects all tracks for import. Import All Media Files Imports media files that are not referenced by events. Import Clip Gain as Automation Imports volume automation and envelopes of the volume automation track of each track.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications OMF Files (Cubase Pro only) 5. Click Save. RESULT The OMF file is exported. It contains or references all audio files that are played in the project, including fade and edit files. Unused audio files that are referenced in the Pool, or any MIDI data are not contained in the file. Video files are not included. OMF Export Options Dialog ● To open the OMF Export Options dialog, select File > Export > OMF. Export Allows you to select a track for export.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications AAF Files Copy Media Allows you to create copies of all the media files. By default, the copied audio files are placed in a subdirectory in the export destination folder. To specify a different location for the copied files, use the Media Destination Path field. Consolidate Events Allows you to copy only the portions of audio files that are used in the project.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications AAF Files 4. In the Import Options dialog, choose the tracks you want to import and make your settings. 5. Click OK. NOTE Depending on the size of the imported project and whether the files are embedded or referenced, the import process may take a while. RESULT The audio tracks and events of the imported AAF file are added.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications AAF Files AAF File Info Shows information about the file. Import at Absolute Position Places the file at its original timecode position in your project. If the start time of the imported file is outside of your project range, the start/end time of your project is modified. Import at Relative Position Places the file relatively to the start time of your project.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications AAF Files Export Allows you to select a track for export. Track Name Shows the track name. Select All Selects all tracks in the project for export. From Left to Right Locator Allows you to export the range between the locators only. Media Destination Path Allows you to specify a location for the exported files. You can also click Browse. NOTE You can create references to media destinations that do not exist on the system you are working with.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications AAF Files Export Media File References Exports only media file references. This keeps the exported file small. However, the referenced audio files must be available for the receiving application. Export All to One File Exports all data to one self-contained file. This could result in a large file size. Export Sample Size Allows you to set a sample size for the exported files. Quantize Events to Frames Moves the event positions in the exported file to exact frames.
ReWire Introduction ReWire is a special protocol for streaming audio between two computer applications. Developed by Propellerhead Software and Steinberg, ReWire provides the following possibilities and features: ● Realtime streaming of up to 256 (Cubase Artist: 128) separate audio channels, at full bandwidth, from the synthesizer application into the mixer application. In this case, the mixer application is Cubase. An example of a synthesizer application is Propellerhead Software’s Reason.
ReWire Launching and quitting PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > ReWire > ReWire Setup. 2. Activate the ReWire applications that you want to use. 3. Click Apply. RESULT The enabled ReWire applications become available in the ReWire submenu. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can activate ReWire channels in the ReWire panel of the application.
ReWire Activating ReWire channels NOTE Please note that the two programs now compete for system resources such as audio cards, just as when running with other, non-ReWire audio applications. Activating ReWire channels ReWire supports streaming of up to 256 (Cubase Artist: 128) separate audio channels. The exact number of available ReWire channels depends on the synthesizer application. The ReWire device panels in Cubase allow you to activate the channels that you want to use.
ReWire How the ReWire channels are handled Basic transport controls When you run ReWire, the transports in the two programs are completely linked. It does not matter in which program you play, stop, fast forward or rewind. However, recording (if applicable) is still completely separate in the two applications. Loop settings If there is a loop or cycle facility in the synthesizer application, that loop will be completely linked to the cycle in Cubase.
ReWire Considerations and limitations play the synthesizer application via MIDI from Cubase, using it as one or several separate MIDI sound sources. ● The number and configuration of MIDI outputs depends on the synthesizer application. Considerations and limitations Sample rates Synthesizer applications may be limited to audio playback in certain sample rates. If Cubase is set to a sample rate other than those, the synthesizer application will play back at the wrong pitch.
Key Commands Key commands are assigned to most main menus and functions in Cubase. They are stored as Preferences that are used for all your projects. You can view and add key commands in the Key Commands dialog. Key command assignments are also shown in the tooltips. Tooltips that show an exclamation mark at the end have no key command assigned yet. You can save key commands settings as a key commands file, which is stored separately and can be imported into any project.
Key Commands Searching for Key Commands NOTE You can set up several different key commands for the same function. Adding a key command to a function that already has another key command does not replace the key command previously defined for the function. Searching for Key Commands You can search for key commands. This is useful if you want to know which key command is assigned to a certain function in Cubase. PROCEDURE 1. Select Edit > Key Commands. 2.
Key Commands Saving Key Commands Presets NOTE Commands are added after the selected command in the list. This allows you to specify the order of commands of a macro. 8. Click OK. RESULT All macros are available in the Macros submenu of the Edit menu. To remove a command from the macro, select it in the Macros list and click Delete. Similarly, to remove an entire macro, select it in the Macros list and click Delete. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can also assign key commands to a macro.
Key Commands Importing Key Command Settings Importing Key Command Settings You can import key commands settings that you saved with an earlier program version. PROCEDURE 1. Select Edit > Key Commands. 2. In the Presets section, click Import Key Command File. 3. In the file dialog, select the file that you want to import. You can import key commands files with the file extension .key or macro commands files with the file extension .mac. 4. Click Open. RESULT The file is imported.
Key Commands Default Key Commands Default Key Commands The default key commands are arranged in categories. NOTE When the On-Screen Keyboard is displayed, the usual key commands are blocked because they are reserved for the On-Screen Keyboard. The only exceptions are: Ctrl/Cmd-S (Save), Num * (Start/Stop Record), Space (Start/Stop Playback), Num 1 (Jump to Left Locator), Delete or Backspace (Delete), Num / (Cycle on/off), F2 (Show/Hide Transport panel), and Alt-K (Show/Hide On-Screen Keyboard).
Key Commands Default Key Commands Devices (Studio) Category Option Key command Audio Connections F4 Audio Performance F12 MixConsole F3 MixConsole in Project Window Alt-F3 On-Screen Keyboard Alt-K Video Player F8 VST Instruments F11 Direct Offline Processing Category Option Key command Direct Offline Processing F7 Edit Category Option Key command Activate/Deactivate Focused Object Alt-A Auto-Scroll On/Off F Copy Ctrl/Cmd-C Cut Ctrl/Cmd-X Cut Time Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-X Delete Del
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command Group Ctrl/Cmd-G Group Editing on Selected Tracks On/Off K Insert Silence Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E Invert Alt-F Invert Selection Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-I Left Selection Side to Cursor E Lock Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L Move to Cursor Ctrl/Cmd-L Move to Front (Uncover) U Mute M Mute Events Shift-M Mute/Unmute Objects Alt-M Open Ctrl/Cmd-E Paste Ctrl/Cmd-V Paste at Origin Alt-V Paste Relative to Cursor Shift-V Paste Time Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-V Primary Par
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command Secondary Parameter: Increase Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Right Arrow Select All Ctrl/Cmd-A Select None Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-A Snap On/Off J Solo S Split At Cursor Alt-X Split Range Shift-X Stationary Cursor Alt-C Undo Ctrl/Cmd-Z Ungroup Ctrl/Cmd-U Unlock Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-U Unmute Events Shift-U Write W Editors Category Option Key command Edit In-Place Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-I Open Score Editor Ctrl/Cmd-R Open/Close Editor Return File Category Opt
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command Quit Ctrl/Cmd-Q Save Ctrl/Cmd-S Save As Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-S Save New Version Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-S Media Category Option Key command Open MediaBay F5 Open/Close Attribute Inspector Ctrl-Alt-Num 6 Open/Close Favorites Ctrl-Alt-Num 8 Open/Close File Browser Ctrl-Alt-Num 4 Open/Close Filters Ctrl-Alt-Num 5 Open/Close Previewer Ctrl-Alt-Num 2 Preview Cycle On/Off Shift-Num / Preview Start Shift-Enter Preview Stop Shift-Num 0 Search MediaB
Key Commands Default Key Commands Navigate Category Option Key command Add Down: Shift-Down Arrow Expand/Undo selection in the Project window to the bottom/Move selected event in the Key Editor down 1 octave Add Left: Shift-Left Arrow Expand/Undo selection in the Project window/Key Editor to the left Add Right: Shift-Right Arrow Expand/Undo selection in the Project window/Key Editor to the right Shift-Up Arrow Add Up: Expand/Undo selection in the Project window to the top/Move selected event in th
Key Commands Default Key Commands Nudge Category Option Key command End Left Alt-Shift-Left Arrow End Right Alt-Shift-Right Arrow Left Ctrl/Cmd-Left Arrow Right Ctrl/Cmd-Right Arrow Start Left Alt-Left Arrow Start Right Alt-Right Arrow Project Category Option Key command Open Browser Ctrl/Cmd-B Open Markers Ctrl/Cmd-M Open Pool Ctrl/Cmd-P Open Tempo Track Ctrl/Cmd-T Remove Selected Tracks Shift-Delete Set Track/Event Color Alt-Shift-C Setup Shift-S Quantize Category Option Ke
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command 1/4 Alt-3 1/8 Alt-4 1/16 Alt-5 1/32 Alt-6 1/64 Alt-7 1/128 Alt-8 Toggle Dotted Alt-.
Key Commands Default Key Commands Track Versions Category Option Key command Duplicate Version Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-D New Version Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-N Next Version Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-H Previous Version Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-G Transport Category Option Key command Activate External Sync Alt-Shift-T Activate Metronome C Activate Punch In I Activate Punch Out O Cycle Num / Enter Left Locator Shift-L Enter Project Cursor Position Shift-P Enter Punch In Position Shift-I Enter Punch Out Position Shift-O
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command Go to Project Start Num.
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command Set Right Locator to Project Cursor Position Ctrl/Cmd-Num 2 Start Enter Start/Stop Space Stop Num 0 To Marker 1 Shift-1 To Marker 2 Shift-2 To Marker 3 to 9 Num 3 to Num 9 or Shift-3 to 9 Window Zones Category Option Key command Show/Hide Left Zone Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-L; Alt-I Show/Hide Right Zone Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-R Show/Hide Upper Zone Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-U Show/Hide Lower Zone Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-E or Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-B Show/Hide Transport Bar Ctrl/Cmd-A
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command Inline: Settings Shift-F3 Inline: View Layout Shift-F2 Workspaces Category Option Key command New Ctrl/Cmd-Num 0 No Workspace Alt-Num 0 Update Workspace Alt-U Workspace 1-9 Alt-Num 1-Num 9 Workspace X Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-Num 0 Zoom Category Option Key command Zoom Full Shift-F Zoom In H Zoom In Tracks Ctrl/Cmd-Down Arrow Zoom In Vertically Shift-H Zoom Out G Zoom Out Tracks Ctrl/Cmd-Up Arrow Zoom Out Vertically Shift-G Zoom to
Key Commands Setting up Tool Modifier Keys Setting up Tool Modifier Keys You can set up tool modifier keys that allow you to get an alternative function when using a tool. PROCEDURE 1. In the Preferences dialog, select Editing > Tool Modifiers. 2. Select an option in the Categories list, and locate the action for which you want to edit the modifier key. 3. In the Action list, select the action. 4. Hold down the desired modifier keys and click Assign.
Customizing In Cubase you can organize windows and dialogs in workspaces, set up the appearance of specific elements, and save program settings as profiles. RELATED LINKS Workspaces on page 1092 Setup Options on page 1095 Profiles (Cubase Pro only) on page 1097 Workspaces Workspaces in Cubase allow you to organize windows and specific dialogs for your common work routines.
Customizing Workspaces Project workspace Allows you to save a specific layout of dialogs and windows that is saved with your current project. This allows you to open your project layout on other computers. Project workspaces are indicated by the letter P on your Workspaces menu. Workspace Templates Cubase provides sample templates that you can use as a starting point for your own workspaces.
Customizing Workspaces To return to the view that you last saved without any workspace assigned, select No Workspace on the Workspaces menu. RELATED LINKS Workspaces Organizer on page 1094 Open Projects in Last Used View on page 1118 Creating Workspaces To save your current dialog and window setting for future use, you can create a new workspace. PROCEDURE 1. Select Workspaces > Add Workspace. 2. In the Name field of the New Workspace dialog, enter a workspace name. 3.
Customizing Setup Options The Workspaces Organizer displays the global workspaces and the project workspaces in separate lists. Every workspace has an assigned key command that lets you switch views quickly. Moving or deleting workspaces within the lists changes the key command assignments. When you change the position of a workspace, the key command assignments remain in their original list position.
Customizing Setup Options ● Toolbars ● Inspector Setup Context Menus Setup context menus are available for the Transport panel, the toolbars, the info lines, or the Inspector. ● To open the setup context menus, right-click the corresponding element. ● NOTE You can also click the corresponding setup buttons to open the context menu. The following general options are available on the setup context menus: ● Show All makes all items visible. ● Reset All resets the interface to the default setting.
Customizing Profiles (Cubase Pro only) The left section of the dialog shows the visible items, the right section shows the hidden items. ● To change the current show/hide status of an item, select it in one section and use the arrow buttons in the middle of the dialog to move it to the other section. ● To reorder the items list, select an item in the list of Visible Items and click Move Up or Move Down. ● To name the current configuration and save it as a preset, click Store in the Presets section.
Customizing Profiles (Cubase Pro only) IMPORTANT The following is not included in profiles: Settings in the Studio Setup dialog and in the Audio Connections window, presets on the Control Room tab of the Audio Connections window, track presets, plug-in presets, and project templates. Profile Manager Dialog The Profile Manager allows you to save customized program settings as profiles and to organize profiles on your computer. ● To open the Profile Manager, click Edit > Profile Manager.
Customizing Profiles (Cubase Pro only) Creating Profiles The Profile Manager allows you to create a new profile that is based on the factory default settings. PROCEDURE 1. Select Edit > Profile Manager. 2. In the Profile Manager, click New. 3. In the Add New Profile dialog, enter a profile name and click OK. RESULT The new profile is added to the list. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Activate the new profile to apply the settings.
Customizing Profiles (Cubase Pro only) Renaming Profiles The Profile Manager allows you to rename profiles. PROCEDURE 1. Select Edit > Profile Manager. 2. In the Profile Manager, select the profile that you want to rename. 3. Click Rename. 4. In the Rename Profile dialog, enter a profile name and click OK. Deleting Profiles The Profile Manager allows you to delete profiles. PREREQUISITE You have saved at least two profiles. NOTE You cannot delete the active profile. PROCEDURE 1.
Customizing Where are the Settings Stored? Importing Profiles The Profile Manager allows you to import profiles. PROCEDURE 1. Select Edit > Profile Manager. 2. In the Profile Manager, click Import. 3. In the file dialog, select the profile that you want to import. 4. Click Open. RESULT The imported profile is added to the list of available profiles. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Activate the new profile to apply the settings.
Customizing Where are the Settings Stored? When your previous Cubase version is older than Cubase 6, its settings are discarded, and the default settings of the new version of Cubase are used. Disabling the Preferences Sometimes you might experience odd program behavior that can be due to inconsistent preferences settings. In such a case, you should save your project and relaunch Cubase. You can disable or delete the current preferences settings, and load the factory defaults instead. PROCEDURE 1.
Optimizing Optimizing Audio Performance This section gives you some hints and tips on how to get the most out of your Cubase system, performance-wise. NOTE For details and current information on system requirements and hardware properties refer to the Steinberg web site. Performance Aspects Tracks and Effects The faster your computer, the more tracks, effects, and EQs you are able to play. Exactly what constitutes a fast computer is almost a science in itself, but some hints are given below.
Optimizing Optimizing Audio Performance This is especially true when using Cubase for Windows: ● Under Windows, ASIO drivers written specifically for the hardware are more efficient than the Generic Low Latency ASIO Driver and produce shorter latency times. ● Under macOS, audio hardware with properly written macOS (Core Audio) drivers can be very efficient and produce very low latency times. However, there are additional features only available with ASIO drivers, such as the ASIO Positioning Protocol.
Optimizing Optimizing Audio Performance Average load Shows how much of the available CPU power is used for audio processing. Real-time peak Shows the processing load in the real time path of the audio engine. The higher this value, the higher the risk that dropouts occur. Overload indicator The overload indicator to the right of the real-time peak indicator and the average load indicator displays overloads of the average or real-time indicator.
Optimizing Optimizing Audio Performance RELATED LINKS VST 2 Plug-in Path Settings on page 728 Activating the ASIO-Guard PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Studio Setup. 2. In the Devices list, select VST Audio System. 3. Activate the Activate ASIO-Guard option. NOTE This option is only available if you activate Activate Multi Processing. 4. Select an ASIO-Guard Level. The higher the level, the higher the processing stability and audio processing performance.
Preferences The Preferences dialog provides options and settings that control the global behavior of the program. Preferences Dialog The Preferences dialog is divided into a navigation list and a settings page. Clicking one of the entries in the navigation list opens a settings page. ● To open the Preferences dialog, select Edit > Preferences. In addition to the settings, the dialog provides the following options: Preference Presets Allows you to select a saved preference preset.
Preferences Preferences Dialog Apply Applies any changes that you have made without closing the dialog. OK Applies any changes that you have made and closes the dialog. Cancel Closes the dialog without saving any changes. Saving Preference Presets You can save complete or partial preference settings as presets. PROCEDURE 1. In the Preferences dialog, make your settings. 2. Click Store in the lower left section of the dialog. 3. Enter a preset name and click OK.
Preferences Editing Editing ‘Edit Solo’/’Record in MIDI Editors’ Follow Focus Suspends Record in Editor and Solo Editor in the MIDI editor if the Project window gets the focus. Default Track Time Type Allows you to select the default track time type for new tracks. ● Musical Sets new tracks to musical time base. ● Time Linear Sets new tracks to linear time base. ● Follow Transport Main Display Sets new tracks to follow the primary time format: Bars+Beats format sets new tracks to musical time base.
Preferences Editing Use Up/Down Navigation Commands for Selecting Tracks only Uses the Up Arrow/Down Arrow keys for track selection, not for event/part selection. Track Selection Follows Event Selection Automatically selects the corresponding track if you select an event in the Project window. Automation Follows Events Lets automation events automatically follow when you move, duplicate, copy, or paste an event or part on the track.
Preferences Editing Creates a new editing version of the clip, and applies the processing to that version leaving the original clip unaffected. ● Process Existing Clip Applies the processing to the existing clip. All events playing that clip are affected. Time Stretch Tool Algorithm Sets the default algorithm that is applied when you use the Object Selection tool in Sizing Applies Time Stretch mode. Default Warping Algorithm Sets the warp algorithm for new audio clips in the project.
Preferences Editing ● Jump Clicking anywhere on a slider instantly moves the slider handle to that position. ● Touch Clicking and dragging the actual slider handle adjusts the setting. ● Ramp Clicking and dragging a slider causes the handle to move smoothly to the new position. ● Relative Clicking and dragging up or down changes the setting according to how far you drag, not according to where you click.
Preferences Editing Scroll to Selected Track Scrolls the track list when you select a MixConsole channel and the respective track is out of view. Sync Selection in Project Window and MixConsole Synchronizes the selection in the Project window and the MixConsole. Enable Record on Selected MIDI Track Record-enables MIDI tracks when you select them. Enable Record on Selected Audio Track Record-enables audio tracks when you select them. Enable Solo on Selected Track Solos tracks when you select them.
Preferences Editors Select Tool: Show Extra Info Displays the current pointer position and the name of the track and event at which you are pointing when you use the Object Selection tool in the Project window event display. Editors Use Drum Editor when Drum Map is assigned Shows drum note symbols in parts on MIDI tracks to which drum maps are assigned. The parts automatically open in the Drum Editor on double-click. This overwrites the Default MIDI Editor setting.
Preferences Event Display Event Display - Audio Interpolate Audio Waveforms Interpolates sample values to form curves when you zoom in to one sample per pixel or less. Show Event Volume Curves Always Shows event volume curves, regardless of whether the event is selected. Show Waveforms Shows waveforms for audio events. Show Hitpoints on Selected Events Shows hitpoints for selected audio events. Waveform Brightness Sets the brightness of the waveform.
Preferences Event Display ● New Custom Chord allows you to add a new custom chord symbol. ● The options to the left allow you to specify the chord for which you want to change the chord symbol. ● Click the Type and Tension column and enter your custom symbol. NOTE You must define custom symbols for each set of tensions. ● The Result column shows how the chord will be displayed. ● The Remove Custom Chord button allows you to remove the custom chord symbol that is selected in the list.
Preferences General Show Controllers Shows non-note events such as controllers, etc. in MIDI parts. Note Brightness Sets the brightness of note events. Controller Brightness Sets the brightness of controller events. Event Display - Tracks Colorize Track Controls Applies the track color to track controls. Colorize Only Folder Track Controls Restricts the effect of Colorize Track Controls to folder tracks only. Default Track Name Width Sets the default name width for all track types.
Preferences MIDI Auto Save Automatically saves backup copies of all open projects with unsaved changes. These are named Name.bak, where name is the name of the project, and are saved in the project folder. Backup copies of unsaved projects are named #UntitledX.bak, where X is an incremental number, to allow multiple backup copies in the same project folder. Auto Save Interval Allows you to specify how often a backup copy is created.
Preferences MIDI channels. This allows you to hear the correct sound from your MIDI instrument during recording. NOTE If you use MIDI Thru, select Local Off mode on your MIDI instrument to prevent each note from sounding twice. Reset on Stop Sets Cubase to send out MIDI reset messages, including note-off and controller resets, on stop. Never Reset Chased Controllers Never resets controllers to 0 when you stop playback or move to a new position in the project.
Preferences MIDI High increases the latency and the playback buffer. Use this if you work with complex VST instrument libraries or with projects that have a very high performance level. MIDI Max. Feedback in ms Allows you to set the maximum length of the notes when using Acoustic Feedback in MIDI editors. MIDI - MIDI File Export Options These options allow you to specify what data is included in exported MIDI files.
Preferences MIDI Import Options The Import Options for MIDI files allow you to specify what data is included in imported MIDI files. Extract First Patch Converts the first Program Change and Bank Select events for each track to Inspector settings for the track. Extract First Volume/Pan Converts the first MIDI Volume and Pan events for each track to Inspector settings for the track.
Preferences MediaBay MIDI - MIDI Filter This page allows you to prevent certain MIDI messages from being recorded and/or echoed by the MIDI thru function (thruput). The page is divided into 4 sections: Record Prevents the corresponding type of MIDI message from being recorded. It will, however, be thruput, and if already recorded, play back normally. Thru Prevents the corresponding type of MIDI message from being thruput. It will, however, be recorded and played back normally.
Preferences Record Meters’ Peak Hold Time Allows you to specify for how long the peak levels are held in the meters. For this to work, deactivate Meters - Hold Forever in the MixConsole. Meters’ Fallback Allows you to specify how quickly the meters in the MixConsole return to lower values after signal peaks. Metering - Appearance This page allows you to assign colors to level meter values to quickly identify what levels are reached. Channel Meter Activate this to assign colors for the channel meter.
Preferences Record Record - Audio - Broadcast Wave This page allows you to specify the Description, Author, and Reference Value text strings that are embedded in recorded Broadcast Wave files. The settings you make here also appear as default strings in the Broadcast Wave Chunk dialog when you export files to certain formats. Not only Broadcast Wave files can contain embedded information, but also Wave, Wave 64, and AIFF files.
Preferences Scores (Cubase Pro only) Scores (Cubase Pro only) This page allows you to make settings for the Score Editor. Select one of the available entries. Scores - Colors for Additional Meanings Allows you to specify different colors to identify non-standard elements in the score. ● Click in the Active column to activate this function for the respective element. ● Click in the color field to the right to specify a color.
Preferences Scores (Cubase Pro only) Unlock Layout When Editing Single Parts If there is more than one part on a track, and you open the Score Editor for one of these parts, the other parts are displayed as empty space to preserve the layout. If this option is activated, this empty space is avoided, so you can print this single part without endless rests. NOTE This option erases the layout for the whole track.
Preferences Transport Transport This page contains options related to playback, recording, and positioning. Playback Toggle Triggers Local Preview Allows you to use Space on your keyboard to start/stop local playback of the selected file in the Sample Editor or the Pool. When the Sample Editor is not open or when there is no audio file selected in the Pool, Space still toggles the global project playback. Show Timecode Subframes Shows subframes for all frame-based display formats.
Preferences User Interface Use High Quality Scrub Mode Enables effects for scrubbing and uses a higher resampling quality. However, scrubbing will be more demanding on the processor. Use Inserts While Scrubbing Allows you to activate insert effects for scrubbing with the shuttle speed control. By default, insert effects are bypassed. User Interface This page contains options that allow you to adjust the default user interface colors.
Preferences VST VST This page contains settings for the VST audio engine. Default Stereo Panner Mode (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to specify the default pan mode for inserted audio tracks. Connect Sends Automatically for Each Newly Created Channel Automatically connects the send routing for existing FX channels when you create a new audio or group channel.
Preferences VST ● While Record-Enabled Connects the audio source to the channel input when you click Record Enable. ● While Record Running Switches to input monitoring only during recording. ● Tapemachine Style Activates input monitoring in stop mode and during recording, but not during playback. NOTE The automatic monitoring options apply when you monitor through Cubase, or when you use ASIO Direct Monitoring.
Preferences VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) VST - Control Room (Cubase Pro only) This page contains settings for the Control Room. Show Control Room Volume in Transport Panel If the Control Room is enabled, the Control Room volume is shown on the Transport panel. Auto Disable Talkback Mode Determines if talkback is disabled during recording, during playback and recording, or not at all. NOTE Set the Talkback DIM level to 0 dB so as not to radically change the mix level when punching in and out of record mode.
Preferences Video Video Extract Audio on Import Video File Extracts and saves the audio data of imported video files as a separate audio clip. Thumbnail Memory Cache Size Allows you to set the size of the thumbnail cache.
Index A AAF files 1065 ACID® loops 531 Action Target 981 Length 981 Name 983 Position 981 Set Color 983 Track Operation 982 Trim 983 Activate Project 97 Activate Read/Write for all tracks 696 Activate tempo track 988 Active Track Version 194 Adapt to Zoom 76 Grid type 81 ADAT Lightpipe Synchronization 1035 Add Latency to MIDI-Thru Processing 1124 Add Track dialog Audio tracks 104 Folder tracks 155 FX channel tracks 135 Group channel tracks 141 Instrument tracks 112 Marker tracks 151 MIDI tracks 127 Ruler t
Index Attribute Inspector MediaBay 643 Attributes 641 Defining 645 Editing in the MediaBay 643 Managing lists 645 MediaBay 639 Audio Handling 206 Overlapping 185 Rendering 1010 Zooming 77 Audio Alignment 537 Audio Alignment Panel 538 Audio Click Render 260 Audio clock Synchronization 1035 Audio Connections 21 Editing 36 Exclusive port assignment 419 Presets 29 Audio effects Surround 653 Audio events 205 Auditioning 210 Audio files Previewing in MediaBay 633 Audio Functions 491 Detect Silence 491 Spectrum A
Index Automation (continued) VST MultiPanner 662 Write 686 Automation data Editing 689 Removing 693 Selecting 690 Automation Event Editor Compress Left 691 Compress Right 691 Move Vertically 691 Scale Around Absolute Center 691 Scale Around Relative Center 691 Scale Vertically 691 Stretch 691 Tilt Left 691 Tilt Right 691 Automation Follows Events 1109 Automation modes 696 Auto-Latch 698 Cross-over 698 Touch 697 Automation panel 696 Read buttons 696 Write buttons 696 Automation tracks 694 Assigning paramete
Index Chord events 910 Adding 911 Adding chords 911 Assigning to MIDI effects or VSTis 920 Auditioning 916 Chord type 910 Converting to MIDI 920 Editing 911 Extracting from MIDI 925 Getting suggestions 914 Mapping offset 918 Resolving Display Conflicts 917 Tension 910 Voicings 918 Chord Font 1115 Chord Pad Controls 929 Chord Pads 927, 929–931 Adaptive voicing 941 Assigning chords 933–936 Context menu 930 Controls 931 Copying Assignments 937 Creating chord events 953 Creating MIDI parts 953 Custom Section P
Index Control Room (continued) External section 421 Input gain 426 Input phase 426 Insert effects 426 Inserts 426 Main 421 Main mix output 419 Monitors section 423 Opening 418 Outputs 419 Phones section 424 Right zone 74 Routing 419 Control Room channels 419, 422 Adding 418 Control Room 424 Cues 420 External inputs 420 Monitors 419, 426 Phones 420 Talkback 420, 426 Control Room Volume Showing in Transport Panel 1131 Controller Brightness 1116 Controller curves Smart controls for scaling 801 Controller Data
Index Designating a new pool record folder Pool 606 Detect Silence Audio Functions 491 Device panels 773 Device ports Selecting for busses 28 Dim Cue during Talkback 1131 Direct Offline Processing 466 Applying 471 Applying permanently 477 Applying to multiple events 472 Auto Apply 472 Batches 474 Bypassing 476 Copying 477 Deleting 475 Envelope 478 Extend Process Range 475 Fade In 478 Fade Out 478 Favorites 473 FX Chain presets 474 Gain 479 Key Commands 486 Modifying 475 Normalize 480 Phase Reverse 480 Pitc
Index Effects (continued) Saving presets 460 Selecting presets 460 Send effects 437, 448 Side-chain inputs 453, 455 System Component Information window 463 Tempo sync 439 VST 3 438 élastique algorithm 488 Enable Record on Selected Audio Track 1112 Enable Record on Selected MIDI Track 1112 Enable Solo on Selected Track 1112 Enable Track 184 Enharmonic shift 834 Enlarge Selected Track 182, 1112 Envelope Direct Offline Processing 478 Realtime processing 316 Envelope editor Sampler Control 586 EQ Channel racks
Index External monitoring 269 Extract Audio on Import Video File 1132 Extract MIDI from Audio 563 Extracting Audio from video 288, 1060 MIDI Automation 785 Extracting chord events from MIDI 925 F Fade Handle Brightness 1115 Fade In Direct Offline Processing 478 Fade Out Direct Offline Processing 478 Fader section (MixConsole) 372 Fades Auto fades 313 Editing in dialog 309 Presets 309 With Range Selection tool 308 Favorites Adding 620, 621, 627 Direct Offline Processing 473 Media rack 619 File Browser Medi
Index Group channels Adding insert effects 441 Routing 381 Setting up 29 Group Channels - Mute Sources as well 1129 Group editing 222 Grouping events 221 H Hardware controls Activating pick-up mode 737 Hardware setup Control panel 12 Hermode tuning 760 Hide muted Notes in Editors 1111 Hide Notes beyond limits 1125 Hide Truncated Event Names 1114 High Quality Scrub Mode 1127 History Edit History 83 MixConsole 351, 358 Project window 40 Hitpoints 521 Showing 1115 HMT Type Hermode tuning 761 Horizontal Snap
Index Instrument tracks 112 Add Track dialog 112 Inspector 113 Track controls 118 Instruments use Automation Read All and Write All 1129 Interpolate Audio Waveforms 1115 K Keep Crescendo Symbols Horizontal 1125 Keep moved Notes within Key 1125 Key commands 1075 Default 1079 Importing 1078 Loading 1077 Modifying 1075 Removing 1076 Resetting 1078 Saving 1077 Searching for 1076 Key Editor 803 Controller display 813 Info line 811 Inspector 812 Lower zone 66 Note display 813 Note expression data 821 Status lin
Index Lower zone 63 Chord Pads 64 Editor 66 Link Project and Lower Zone Cursors 68 MixConsole 65 Sampler Control 66 Selecting a MIDI editor 67 Setting up 64 M macOS Port activation 27 Port selection 27 Macros 1076 Main Dim Volume 1131 Main mix Output 419 Setting up 28 Managing media files Pool 592 Map Input Bus Metering to Audio Track 1122 Mapping offset 918 Marker track 340 Inspector 152, 162 Track controls 152, 163 Marker tracks 151, 162 Add Track dialog 151 Marker window 336 Functions 337 Marker list 3
Index Meters’ Peak Hold Time 1122 Metronome 251, 256, 257, 259 Click Pattern Editor 252–254 Setup window 254 Metronome Click Setting up 253 Metronome Setup 254 Click Pattern 251 Click Patterns 259 Click Sounds 257 General 256 MIDI channels Send effects 763 Separating for drum map sounds 854 MIDI Click Render 260 MIDI clock Synchronization 1035 MIDI Controller Automation 705 Setting up 706 MIDI controllers Note Expression 886 MIDI devices Defining new for patch selection 772, 773 Device Manager 767 Editing
Index MixConsole (continued) FX chain presets 383 History 351 Inspector 349–352 Left zone 349 Level meters 376 Listen 374 Lower zone 65 Meter section 431, 432 Mute 374 Notepads 398 Opening 344 Panning 373 Pre rack 381 Racks 378 Setting volume 375 Snapshots 352 Solo 374 Solo Defeat 374 Strip presets 394 Surround Pan 661 Toolbar 352 Undoing parameter changes 351, 358 Visibility 350 Visibility agents 363 VST MultiPanner 661 Zones 351 MixConsole in Project Window 65 MixConsole parameters Track Quick Controls 7
Index Note Expression (continued) MIDI controllers 886 MIDI learn 896 Moving events 904 Overdubbing 898, 899 Overlaps 908 Pasting events 902 Pasting events to different parameters 903 Recording 896, 897 Recording by overdubbing 898 Recording via MIDI Input 899 Removing events 905 Repeating events 903 Sustain pedal 897 Tools 894 Trimming events 907 Trimming to note length 905 VST note expressions 886 Note Expression Event Editor Change Editor Size 899 Change Release Length 899 Compress Left 899 Compress Rig
Index Pedals To note length 782 Performance Aspects 1103 Audio performance 1104 Optimizing 1103 Phase MixConsole 382 Phase Reverse Direct Offline Processing 480 Phones channel Source buttons 424 Phones Channel Using as Preview Channel 1131 Piano voicings 918 Pick-up Mode 737 Pitch Changing for chords 818 Pitch Notation 1115 Pitch Shift Algorithm 488 Direct Offline Processing 480 Limitations 490 Pitch Snap Mode VariAudio 552 Plain Chords Chord Pads 940 Playback Disable Acoustic Feedback 1111 Excluding note
Index Project Logical Editor (continued) Overview 970 Presets 984 Setting up Key Commands 985 Storing Presets 984 Project Root Key 327 Assigning to a Project 328 Assigning to Parts or Events 328 Changing 329, 330 Recording with 329 Project Setup Dialog 93 Project structure Automation 1007 Track data 1007 Project Synchronization Setup 1036 Destinations 1039 Machine Control 1040 Sources 1036 Project window Event display 49 Global track controls 49 History 40 Info line 52 Inspector 54 Keyboard focus 75 Left z
Index Recording (continued) Levels 12 Lock Record 281 Notes and Note Expression 897 Pre-roll and post-roll 267 Remaining Record Time 281 Stopping 266 Stopping automatically 266 With Effects 273 Recovering recordings Audio 274 MIDI 281 ReCycle files 289 Reducing the project size Pool 607 Reference file Pool 592 Reference Level 1131 Refresh Views MediaBay 627 Regions Creating with Detect Silence 494 Event or Range as Region 207 Events from Regions 208 Renaming 597 Remote control 738 Apple Remote 752 Assignin
Index Sample Editor (continued) Showing multiple waveforms 510 Snap 518 Toolbar 501 Undo zoom operations 511 Sample rate Externally clocked 16 Sampler Control 580 Amp section 586 AudioWarp section 584 Envelope editor 586 Filter section 585 Keyboard section 588 Lower zone 66 Pitch section 585 Playing back samples 590 Root Key 589 Sample editing 589 Sound parameter section 584 Toolbar 580 Transferring samples to VST instruments 591 Waveform display 583 Sampler tracks 120 Add Track dialog 120 Creating 579 Ins
Index Side-chain (continued) Inserts rack 383 Trigger signals 454 Side-chain inputs 439 Signature track 163 Inspector 164 Track controls 164 Silence Detecting 491 Direct Offline Processing 484 Inserting 229 Removing 494 Simple Crossfade Editor 312 Single Voice Follow Chord Track 922 Slices 521 Close gaps 526 Delete overlaps 526 Slider Mode 1111 Smallest Track Height To Show Data 1114 Smallest Track Height To Show Name 1114 Snap 80 Sample Editor 518 Snap MIDI Parts to Bars 1124 Snap point Setting 80 Snap Po
Index Synchronize Plug-in Program Selection to Track Selection 1130 Synchronizing Track Data Follow Chord Track 923 SysEx Changing settings 869 Editing values 870 Messages 867 System component information Exporting 465 Managing system components 464 System Component Information 463 T Tail Direct Offline Processing 475 Tap Tempo 996 Tapemachine Style Monitoring 1129 Template projects 92 Templates Renaming 93 Workspaces 1093 Tempo Process Bars 1001 Process Tempo 1000 Set Definition from Tempo 1003 Tempo Ch
Index Track archives Exporting 175 Importing 174 Track Area Width 1117 Track Color Resetting 85 Track Controls Settings 102 Track Folding 186 Track Height 182 Track Inspector Opening 55 Track list 48 Dividing 48 Track Name Width 1117 Track parameters Track Quick Controls 732 Track Pictures 180 Browser 181 Showing 180 Track presets Quick Control assignment 735 Track Presets 198 Applying 198, 200 Audio 199 creating 202 Creating 199 Extracting Sounds 201 Instrument 200 Loading 203 Loading in MediaBay 647 Load
Index Transpose Exclude Parts or Events 334 Global 334 Independent 334 Indicate Transpositions 332 Info line 333 Lock 331 MIDI function 776 Mute 331 Project Root Key 327 Transpose functions 327 Transpose track 166, 330 Inspector 166 Lock 331 Mute 331 Recording 333 Track controls 167 Transposing 331 Treat Muted Audio Events like Deleted 1110 Trim Automation 699 Trim tool Changing event lengths 817 Tube Compressor Details view 405 Edit Module 405 Tuplets Quantizing 299 Type of New Tempo Points 988 U Undoing
Index Vintage Compressor Details view 406 Edit Module 406 Virgin territory Automation 695 Creating gaps 695 Defining a terminator point 695 Virtual reality Video playback 682 Visibility Inspector 60, 61 MixConsole 350 Synchronizing track and channel visibility 62 Voicings 918 Automatic voicings 918 Configuring parameters 918 Library 918 Library subset 918 Octave offset 918 Piano 918 Range 918 Volume MixConsole 375 Volume curve 316 Volume databases Creating in the MediaBay 650 Mounting in the MediaBay 651 R
Index Workspaces Adding 1094 Creating 1094 Editing 1094 External projects 1093 Modifying 1094 Organizing 1094 Saving 1094 Templates 1093 Types 1092 Updating 1094 Workspaces Organizer 1094 Writing automation 686 Automatically 687 Manually 687, 688 Tools 688 Z Zones Keyboard focus 75 Left zone 54 Lower zone 63 MixConsole 349, 351 Project zone 39 Right zone 69 Zones Visibility Inspector 62 Zoom Adapt Grid to Zoom 76 Audio Contents 77 Cycle Markers 79 Project window 76 Zoom history Project window 79 Zoom pres
